JP2020031729A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide new playability using game settings.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine 500 includes setting change means for changing to any one of a plurality of settings that may differ in the advantage of the game. The Pachinko game machine 500, when an advantageous period in which the game state advantageous to a player continues ends, can execute a normal performance of a content that matches the number of times the special game is executed in an advantageous period. The Pachinko game machine 500 can execute a performance of a content inconsistent with the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period, not a normal performance, as a setting suggestion performance suggesting a set value in a predetermined probability when the advantageous period ends.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 41

Description

  Related to gaming machines.

  Conventionally, among various ball game machines, a so-called first-type pachinko game machine has a plurality of symbols fluctuating in a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided substantially at the center of the game board. Is displayed (hereinafter, such a display is referred to as “design variation” or “variation display”). This gaming machine shifts to a special game called a so-called big hit in which more prize balls can be obtained than in a normal game when a combination of symbols when a plurality of rows of symbols change is stopped has a specific mode. Known as one. In the variable display of the symbols in the display area, not only a plurality of symbols are displayed in a variable manner, but also in a state called a so-called reach screen, if one more symbol is aligned, a time of the variable display is usually set in a state where it becomes a big hit. For example, an effect for enhancing the player's sense of expectation, such as making it longer, is achieved. In addition, the player's expectation is enhanced by an effect of giving a story to the variable display using characters in images such as patterns and a notice effect that gives a preliminary notice of the high degree of expectation of transition to special games. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In recent years, it has been recognized that there is a need to develop models that are not tied to a type in order to further pursue an improvement in gaming characteristics.For example, a pachinko game machine in which a plurality of game machines of the same type are mixed or game machines of different types are mixed. Is also under development. In addition, when a small hit occurs, the game ball is passed through a specific area (V zone) in the variable ball entry device to be promoted from "small hit" to "big hit", and a new special game (hereinafter, " A gaming machine that generates a "small hit development big hit" or "small hit V" has also been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 2).

JP 2003-230714 A JP 2010-29308 A

  At present, ball game machines having a setting change function are being introduced into game arcades. For example, a plurality of settings that can differ in the advantage of the game such as the big hit probability are prepared, and for example, six levels of settings are possible. The setting of each gaming machine can be changed only by the administrator of the gaming machine, and the actual setting value cannot be directly known by the player. The present inventor considered that new playability could be provided in accordance with the difference in the setting concealed by the player.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and has as its object to provide a new game property using a game setting.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, a gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention is a lottery that executes a lottery to determine whether to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, in response to a predetermined game operation. The advantage of the game may be different from the means and the special game control means for executing the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied as a result that the lottery by the lottery means can be shifted to the special game. Setting changing means for changing to any one of the plurality of settings, storage means for storing the set values set by the setting changing means, and an advantageous period in which a gaming state advantageous to the player continues, ends. In this case, there is provided an effect control means capable of executing a normal effect having contents matching the number of times of executing the special game in the advantageous period. The effect control means suggests a set value stored in the storage means, at a predetermined probability, when the advantageous period ends, at a predetermined probability, instead of a normal effect, an effect inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period. This can be executed as a setting suggestion effect.

  It should be noted that any combination of the above-described components, and the components and expressions of the present invention, which are mutually substituted among methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, and the like, are also included. This is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

  According to the ball-and-ball game machine of the present invention, new gaming properties using game settings can be provided.

It is a figure showing a basic structure on the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing a basic structure on the back side of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing a functional block of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a main board. It is a figure which shows a success / failure determination table typically. It is a figure which shows typically the range setting of the winning / failure lottery value for every set value. It is a figure which shows a symbol determination table typically. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern table typically. It is a figure which shows the prior | preceding right / wrong determination table referred by prior | preceding right / wrong determination typically. It is a figure which shows typically the prior award determination table corresponding to game setting. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a sub-board. It is a figure which shows the outline of a mobile cooperation system typically. FIG. 3 is a block diagram schematically showing a hardware configuration of a main board and a sub board. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware structure of an effect control apparatus roughly. It is a flowchart showing a control start process of the main board in the pachinko gaming machine. 16 is a flowchart showing the details of a setting change process in S124 in FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of a setting confirmation process in S126 in FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a main process of S120 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of an interruption process. It is a flowchart showing a control start process of the sub board in the pachinko gaming machine. 21 is a flowchart showing details of a main process of S518 in FIG. 20. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an interrupt process when a command is received from a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process when the timer interruption for effect display control occurs. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an interrupt process when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special symbol change display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a decoration symbol change display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special game. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a small hit game. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a basic structure on an outer surface of the slot machine. It is a rear view of a case door part exposed when a case door part is opened. It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the housing | casing base exposed when a housing door part is opened. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. FIG. 3 is a functional block diagram of the slot machine. 40 is a flowchart showing a basic game flow in the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a hardware configuration of a main control device and a sub control device. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware structure of an effect display control part schematically. 6 is a flowchart showing main program control processing of a main control device in the slot machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process in the main control device. It is a figure showing the main game flow of the pachinko gaming machine of the 1st example. It is a figure showing the basic structure in the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of the 1st example. It is a figure which shows the breakdown of the big hit in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Example. It is a figure showing a plurality of kinds of variation pattern modes. It is a perspective view of a starting port unit. It is a right view of a starting port unit. It is sectional drawing of a starting port unit. It is a figure showing the example of the chance production at the time of usual. It is a figure showing an example of a chance production during a time saving game. It is a figure showing the basic structure in the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of a 2nd example. It is an appearance perspective view showing roughly composition of a special winning a prize mouth. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a big winning opening schematically. It is a figure showing an example of an effect during a small hit game. It is a figure which shows the display timing of a suggestion effect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect. FIG. 55 is a view illustrating an example of an effect subsequent to FIG. 54. It is a figure showing an example of a big hit end demonstration production. It is a time chart regarding the demonstration performance of the big hit end. It is a figure showing an example of a hold change lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of a hold change lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of a special game end screen. It is a figure showing an example of a trophy lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of a trophy lottery table of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a trophy lottery table of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a trophy lottery table of a modification. It is a figure showing the example of the special game end screen of a modification.

(Prerequisite technology)
FIG. 1 shows a basic structure on the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. Pachinko gaming machine 100 mainly includes a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. The gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a firing handle 107, a speaker 108, a production button 109, a cross key 110, Includes decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 has an opening and is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 100 at a position where the pachinko gaming machine 100 is to be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that matches the opening of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for firing game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like.

  The transparent plate 103 is formed of glass or the like, and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball tray 105 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending the game balls to the firing rail, extracting the game balls to the lower ball plate 106, and the like. The lower ball tray 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right at the upper part of the door 104, and the means for controlling the production outputs sound effects and music sounds corresponding to the game state and the production. Most of the resin member constituting the exterior of the door 104 is translucent, and the decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent member. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to a game state or a performance by means for controlling the performance, and plays a role of the performance by blinking or the like.

  The game board 80 has a first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, a large winning opening 20, a first operating opening 31, a second operating opening 32, and a general winning opening 33 on a game area 81 defined by rails 82. , An outlet 34, an effect display device 60, and a center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over a substantially central portion of the game area 81 and an upper portion and a right portion thereof. It has 60 functions such as protection and decoration. At the lower part of the center decoration 64, a stage 65 on which the flowing game ball rolls is formed, and depending on the way of rolling, the falling direction from the stage 65 depends on the direction in which the ball enters the first starting port 11 and the first starting port 11 Is divided into the side direction that does not enter the ball. On the upper part of the center decoration 64, there is provided a movable role 66 that is driven in accordance with the effect contents and performs an effect operation. In the game area 81, a plurality of mechanisms (not shown) such as a game nail and a windmill for forming a flow path of the game ball are installed. In this specification, “entering a ball”, “winning”, and “dropping” may be synonymous with each other. Further, each winning opening or each entrance may be constituted by a “passing opening” of a type through which a game ball passes (also referred to as a “gate” or a “through chucker”). "Prize", "drop", and "pass" may also be synonymous with each other.

  The first starting port 11 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the first game, and the second starting port 12 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that it is possible to aim at entering one of the balls by the strength of shooting of the game ball according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided substantially below the center of the game area 81, and the second starting port 12 is provided immediately below the first starting port 11. If the ball is left hit, that is, if the ball is hit relatively weakly so as to flow to the left side passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, while the right hit. In other words, when the ball is hit relatively strongly aiming at flowing to the right side passage of the center decoration 64, the ball can enter or is easy to enter the second starting port 12, but cannot enter the first starting port 11. In addition, a flow path is formed by the arrangement of the game nails so that it is difficult to enter the ball. However, since the upper portion of the opening of the second starting port 12 is normally covered with the first starting port 11 to prevent the inflow of game balls, the second starting port 12 is opened unless the opening mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened. 12 cannot enter or is difficult to enter. The success / failure lottery is a lottery for judging whether or not to shift to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and is executed every time a ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. You.

  In addition, the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to such an extent that it is possible to hit any one of them according to the strength of shooting of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, respectively, so that a game ball aimed at one is difficult to enter the other. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where it is possible to enter the ball or to easily enter the ball when fired relatively weakly with the aim of flowing leftward, that is, flowing to the left side passage of the center decoration 64. The second starting port 12 is provided at a position where it is possible to enter the ball or to easily enter the ball when fired relatively right, that is, shot rightward, that is, to the right passage of the center decoration 64.

  The first starting port 11 includes a first starting winning detection device 16. The first start winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 11, and generates first start winning information indicating the entry when the ball is entered. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting winning detection device 17, an ordinary electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) as an expanding mechanism, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 90. Prepare. The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 12, and generates second start winning information indicating the entry when the ball is entered.

  The first operating port 31 is provided at a position on the left side of the game area 81 and includes the first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operation port 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The second operation port 32 is provided at a position on the right side of the game area 81 and includes the second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operation port 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 is a trigger of an open lottery that determines whether or not the electric powered accessory 90 is to be expanded. When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, a normal symbol, which is a symbol indicating a determination result of the open lottery, is variably displayed on the normal symbol display section 45. Therefore, the open lottery is also referred to as “ordinary symbol lottery”. After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the change, the normal symbol change display stops. When the ordinary symbol stops at the winning symbol, the ordinary electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91, and the possibility of entering the second starting port 12 is increased. Note that, as a modification, the number of operating ports may be one and provided at a position on the left side of the game area 81.

  Each of the three general winning openings 33 includes a general winning detecting device 38 for detecting the entering of a game ball. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entering when the ball is entered.

  The special winning opening 20 includes a special winning detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a special winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the special winning opening 20. The special winning detection device 25 is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the special winning opening 20, and generates special winning opening winning information indicating the entering when the ball is entered. The special winning opening 20 is a horizontal rectangular winning opening that is opened as a "big hit" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined manner. The special winning opening 20 is provided at the upper right position of the out opening 34. As a modified example, another large winning opening may be provided at the lower center of the game area 81 or above or below the large winning opening 20, and a plurality of large winning openings may be provided. The out port 34 is an outlet from which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are discharged, and includes an out detecting device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball discharged through the out port 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out port 34 is provided at the lowermost center portion of the game area 81 so that all game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports can be guided and pass through. A configuration in which a plurality of out detecting devices 39 are arranged side by side while securing a game ball passage having a width sufficient to prevent ball clogging of the out port 34 is also possible.

  A display unit 120 such as a symbol is disposed below and below the game area 81 on the game board 80. The symbol etc. display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display unit 41, a second special symbol display unit 42, a first special symbol reservation display unit 71, a second special symbol reservation display unit 72, a normal symbol display unit 45, a general symbol display unit. Each display unit such as a hold display unit 75, a game state display unit 76, and an abnormality notification unit 77 is provided. Specifically, a first special symbol display unit 41 corresponding to the first game and a second special symbol display unit 42 corresponding to the second game are provided side by side at the lower left position, and the first special symbol is displayed. The change of 51 and the 2nd special symbol 52 is displayed.

  The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first winning / rejecting lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 11, and is a special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. As a big hit occurs. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second winning / rejecting lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12, and the special game when stopped in a predetermined hitting mode. As a big hit occurs. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 are, for example, eight-segment LEDs including eight segments of seven segments forming a “figure of eight” and one segment representing a “dot”. Is a display device. With an 8-segment LED, an 8-bit numerical value can be represented by combining eight segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 represented by a combination of segments do not necessarily have a body of characters and numerals, and may be a symbol having no general meaning formed by a combination of each segment. . These symbols are switched one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42, or a predetermined display (for example, “−”) and a non-display (for example, all unlit) are displayed. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after the repetition for the predetermined time, symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. It should be noted that the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 use an LED dot array which is not an 8-segment LED and a plurality of types of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol The special symbol 52 may be represented.

  In addition, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have to have a staging role, the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display at the lower left of the game area 81 are used in the base technology. The display is made in an inconspicuous size by the unit 42. However, when the technique of expressing without using a decorative symbol by giving the special symbol itself a staging role is used, the special symbol is displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. It is good also as a structure to make it.

  Above the first special symbol display unit 41, a first special symbol hold display unit 71 is provided as a special symbol change holding lamp corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display unit 42, a second special symbol display unit 42 is provided. A second special figure hold display section 72 is provided as a special symbol change hold lamp corresponding to the game. The first special figure reservation display part 71 is composed of two lamps, and the number of the winning / rejecting lottery values in the first game (hereinafter, the number of holdings of the winning / rejecting lottery values in the first game) is determined by the number of the lamps turned on or off. Simply referred to as “number of holds”). The number of reservations in the first special figure reservation display section 71 is the number (number) of times that the lottery value is acquired based on the fact that the first special symbol 51 has been changed or the special game has been executed and the first starting port 11 has been won. Indicates the number of winning balls for which the symbol change has not been executed yet. The second special figure hold display section 72 also includes two lamps, and displays the number of holds in the second game by the number of lights or the number of blinks. The number of holdings in the second special figure holding display section 72 is the number (number) of times a lottery value is acquired based on winning in the second starting port 12 during the change of the second special symbol 52 or during the execution of the special game. Indicates the number of winning balls for which the symbol change has not been executed yet. The number of holdings of the success / failure lottery value is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 60 in a form represented by the number of lighting of the holding lamp images.

  On the right side of the symbol etc. display unit 120, a normal symbol display section 45 is provided. The ordinary symbol display section 45 is composed of two lamps for convenience, and the display state of the ordinary symbol is expressed by a lighting combination of the two lamps. First, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol is expressed by blinking and displaying the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, and finally, the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is determined by a combination of the lighting state of the first lamp and the second lamp. Is expressed. For example, the turning off of the first lamp and the turning off of the second lamp represent an outage stop symbol, and the turning off of the first lamp and the turning on of the second lamp represent a first hit mode. The second hit mode is expressed by lighting of both the lamp and the second lamp.

  On the right side of the ordinary symbol display section 45, an ordinary symbol hold display section 75 is provided as an ordinary symbol change holding lamp. The ordinary figure holding display section 75 also includes two lamps, and displays the number of ordinary symbol fluctuations held by the number of lights or the number of blinks. The number of pending normal symbol fluctuations is the number of game balls that have passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during the normal symbol fluctuation, and the number of ordinary symbol lotteries for which the normal symbol fluctuation has not been executed yet. Is shown.

  The symbol display unit 120 includes a game state display unit 76 and an abnormality notification unit 77. The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that displays information corresponding to a game state such as a specific game state described later, and includes, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, when the probability is fluctuating, a lamp is lit, when the ball is in an easy-to-enter state, a blinking display is displayed, and when a normal state is displayed, a light is turned off to notify each game state. Displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that reports a part of the abnormality of the gaming machine, and includes, for example, a plurality of lamps, and reports the abnormality by a lighting pattern according to the type of the abnormality. Note that these display units may not be collectively arranged in the display unit 120 for design etc., and each display unit may be configured individually, or may be configured by dividing into a plurality of display devices that are appropriately assembled. Further, the notification of the game state such as the specific game state may be performed only during a predetermined period such as a certain time after returning from the power-off.

  At approximately the center of the game area 81, an effect display device 60 is provided so that a screen is exposed from a screen frame formed by a center decoration 64, and a decorative symbol 61 linked to the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is provided. The fluctuation of the effect image including is displayed. Hereinafter, such a display is referred to as “design variation” or “variation display”.

  The effect display device 60 is a display device including a liquid crystal display that variably displays the decorative symbol 61 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. The decorative symbol 61 is a symbol for visually producing the determination result display of the lottery shown by the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The effect display device 60 displays, as the decorative symbol 61, a moving image in which a plurality of columns of symbols simulating, for example, a game of a slot machine are changed in a central region of the screen. In the base technology, symbols composed of numbers “0” to “9” are displayed in three columns and are varied, and a hit or a miss is indicated by three symbol combinations finally stopped and displayed. Each of the plurality of patterns constituting the decorative pattern 61 is composed of numbers, characters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns, and the numbers, characters, and symbols are common to all the patterns. A different pattern may be added for each and integrated. This pattern is a pattern in which a motif related to the theme of the decoration or the effect set in the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is drawn, and may be, for example, a pattern in which a character of a person or an animal is drawn. The decorative pattern 61 is switched in accordance with the development of the effect between a case where the pattern integrally including the pattern is variably displayed and a case where the pattern is separated and only the numbers, characters, and symbols are variably displayed. Configuration may be used. On the background of the change display of the decorative pattern 61, a moving image having a staging effect related to the decoration or effect theme set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the pattern change.

  The effect display device 60 is configured by a liquid crystal display which is a high-definition dot matrix type display device. The width of the display area may be about half of the width of the game area, or a large size exceeding half. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the effect display device is formed with a passage width enough to allow one game ball to pass. The game ball can be passed through, so that it can be distinguished from what is called “left-handed”. The effect display device 60 is not limited to being configured with a single display device, but may be configured with a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of a plurality of displays, different sizes of displays such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal may be combined, and the sub liquid crystal may be arranged at a position adjacent to the main liquid crystal or at a position other than the game board, for example, a launch handle. (Such as an upper ball tray and a right-side decorative lamp). When installed near the firing handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel on which a player can perform operation input. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by a display device such as an organic EL display, or may be configured by a mechanical display device such as a drum rotating type or a display device such as an LED matrix type. .

  The effect button 109 is an operation input unit that is pressed by a player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine in accordance with the effect content, and changes the effect content and the like in accordance with the pressed state. The effect button 109 is provided on the front frame 102. The effect button 109 is usually stored in the front frame 102, but a bar-shaped member is attached to the back side of the effect button 109, and the bar-shaped member and the effect button 109 are arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so as to be able to protrude. The bar-shaped member and the effect button 109 function as a lever 112 in a state where the effect button 109 is projected to the outside, and a player can grip the effect button 109 and pull the lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input unit for a player to input a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the left outer wall surface of the upper bowl 105.

  An outline of a game method and control flow performed in the gaming machine having the above configuration will be described. When the player rotates the firing handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper bowl 105 are guided by the rail 82 one by one on the rail 82 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and are fired into the game area 81. . When the player fixes the rotation position of the firing handle 107 by hand, the firing of the game ball is repeated at fixed time intervals. The game ball fired at the upper portion of the game area 81 falls on a plurality of game nails, windmills, the center decoration 64, and the like, and falls in a direction corresponding to how the ball is hit. When a game ball falls into each of the general winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the special winning opening 20, a prize ball corresponding to the type of the winning opening is placed on the upper ball plate 105 or the lower winning plate. It is paid out to the bowl 106. A game ball dropped into each winning port such as the general winning port 33 is processed as a safe ball, and a game ball dropped into the out port 34 is processed as an out ball. The specification in which the discharge of the safe sphere is excluded from the detection by the out detection device 39 or the specification in which the safe sphere is guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all the discharge is detected by the out detection device 39. It may be. Alternatively, the specification may be such that the safe ball is not detected by the safe ball guidance and out detection device 39, and the sum of the number of safe balls detected and the number of out balls detected is used as the number of ejected balls.

  Also, when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display section 45, and is stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to the display. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode or the second hit mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded based on the hit mode of the stop-displayed symbol and the game state when the stop is displayed. . That is, when the gaming state at the time of the symbol stop is the normal gaming state and the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode, a short opening for 0.1 second is executed as the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90. In addition, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode in the specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state), the normal symbol is displayed in the second hit mode in the normal game mode and the specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state). When the stop display is performed, a long opening of 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90. Here, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol and the execution probability of the long opening are set differently depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, a normal symbol hits at a probability of 1/100, and in this case, the execution probability of the short opening (the probability of selecting the hit symbol in the first hit mode) is 1 /. 3. The execution probability of the long opening (the probability of selecting the hit symbol in the second hit mode) is set to 2/3. In an open lottery in a specific game state (for example, an easy ball entry state), a normal symbol wins at a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability of the first hit mode and the second hit mode does not change from the normal game mode. However, it is set so that the long opening is executed regardless of the winning in any mode. In this manner, in the easy ball entry state, the function of changing the probability of hitting a normal symbol (probability changes from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the open time (the open time when the stop display is performed in the first hit mode is set to 0). (Extended from 1 second to 6.0 seconds), the ease of entering the second starting port 12 is enhanced. Note that the function (long open) of extending the operation period of the ordinary electric accessory 90 may be referred to as “open extension”.

  As described above, by setting the specification that the probability of the long opening in the normal state is higher than the probability of the short opening in the normal state, the long opening is performed at a fixed rate even in the normal state at the time of winning a normal symbol. . As a modified example, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening, or the specifications of both may be the same, or the specifications of short opening may be used. Good. In addition, when the ball is in the easy-to-enter state, it may be configured to further enhance the ease of entering the second starting port 12 by using three functions including a function of shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. In this case, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state. Note that the probability of the open lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the specification may be such that the ordinary electric accessory 90 can be expanded only when the open lottery is performed in the easy ball entry state. Further, when the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded, the fact may be notified in advance, the suspension of the normal symbol change may be read in advance and notified before the start of the normal symbol change, or the normal symbol change may be notified. You may be notified during the change.

  As a modification of the opening mode when the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is long opened, the total opening time is extended to about 6 seconds by repeating the opening for 2 seconds longer than that for the short opening three times. It is good also as an aspect. Alternatively, a plurality of combinations of the opening time and the number of times of opening may be prepared, and one of the combinations may be selected. For example, in the case of opening three seconds for two seconds, the total opening time is the same as in the case of once opening six seconds, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, particularly in the configuration of the modified example in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the player who notices the opening adjusts the hitting direction to the second starting port 12 from that point in time, and the former enters the ball. The chances are long. In addition, it is also possible to configure so that there are a plurality of types of hits of a normal symbol, and to make the opening mode of the expanding mechanism differ according to the type of hit. For example, when the normal symbol is the first hit, in the normal state, the opening is 0.1 seconds once, in the easy ball entry state, the opening is 1 second three times, and when the second hit, the normal state is In this case, the player may open once for 6 seconds, and may open twice for 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol display section 41, the second special symbol display section 42 and the effect display device 60 display the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. , And the decorative pattern 61 are variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after a lapse of the variable display time determined prior to the display. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed in accordance with a variance pattern in which the variability from the start to the stop of the variance is determined. The decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed according to a fluctuation effect pattern in which the fluctuation mode from the start to the stop of the fluctuation is determined. A plurality of types of variation patterns and variation effect patterns are prepared, and each has various lengths of variation time. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is variably displayed according to the variation effect pattern having the same variation time. In the variation pattern, a variation display time is determined for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and the variation of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decoration symbol 61 is changed when the variation display time elapses. Stopped. Hereinafter, the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 displayed according to the variation effect pattern will be exemplified, and the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. The details of the method of determining the variation pattern and the variation effect pattern will be described separately.

  As an example of the change display of the decorative pattern 61, first, the pattern is changed in all three rows, such as the reel rotation of the slot machine, at the start of the change, and stopped one by one when approaching the change end timing, so that the final stop mode is achieved. Is displayed as a symbol combination. In addition, as the operation at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 190, control may be performed so as to simultaneously stop a plurality of columns instead of one by one, so that the effect display other than the decorative symbol may be noticed during the variable display, or with a shorter fluctuation time. You may enable it to display a symbol change. In addition, as an operation at the start of the change of the decorative symbol 190, control is performed so as to delay the start of the change of a part of the rows in accordance with the subsequent development (the type of the effect pattern, etc.) of the change, so as to produce a sense of expectation. It may be.

  Next, the fluctuation effect pattern will be briefly described. The fluctuation effect pattern includes a normal out-of-effect effect pattern, a out-of-reach effect pattern, and a reach jackpot effect pattern. The normal deviation effect pattern is an effect pattern for displaying a normal deviation symbol combination. The out-of-reach effect pattern is an effect pattern for displaying out-of-reach symbol combinations through a reach state, which is a state in which a big hit occurs if one more symbol is arranged. The reach jackpot effect pattern is an effect pattern for displaying a symbol combination of a jackpot through a reach state. In particular, as the pattern during the reach state, a pattern having various long and short fluctuation times is included, a reach pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time is referred to as “normal reach”, and a reach pattern having a long fluctuation time is referred to as “super reach”. ". The out-of-normal effect pattern, the out-of-reach effect pattern, and the reach big hit effect pattern each include a normal pattern displayed in a normal state and a time reduction pattern displayed in a time reduction state. However, even in the normal state, if the second symbol change corresponding to the ball entering the second starting port 12, the probability that the big hit is accompanied by a certain change or the probability that the unit game number of the special game increases is the second probability. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first variation corresponding to the ball entering the first starting port 11, a chance effect pattern for indicating that there is a chance to generate a relatively advantageous big hit may be used. In the base technology, a time-saving pattern is used in the time-saving state, but a time-saving pattern is used in the probability-changing state, so that the time-saving pattern is also used in the probability-changing state. However, in the modified example, it is possible to adopt a specification in which a probable variation pattern different from that for time saving is used in the probable variation state. Alternatively, the specification may use a common pattern for the time saving and the probable change, or may use the pattern for the probable change in the probable change state without particularly using the pattern for the time reduction.

  Note that when the number of pending lotteries becomes a predetermined number (for example, three), the symbol variation time in the case of a miss is shortened as compared with the normal case (hereinafter, also referred to as “shortened variation”) in order to increase game efficiency. Similarly, when the number of pending lotteries becomes four, the symbol change time in the case of a miss is further shortened as compared with the case of three pieces in order to further increase the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as “ultra shortened change”). ). When the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stop have a stop state indicating a big hit through the above-described symbol change, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 20 is started. The stop mode of the decorative symbol 61 indicating the big hit is, for example, a mode of a combination in which the types of the three symbols match.

  There are two types of special games: normal special games and shortened special games, each of which has a large difference in profits from the acquired prize balls. Usually, a special game is started by displaying an effect screen called a start demonstration time. After the start demonstration time is displayed on the screen, the special winning opening 20 is opened, and is closed once after the opening continues for about 30 seconds or after nine or more game balls fall. The process from opening to closing of the special winning opening 20 is basically called a unit game. However, a plurality of short opening times may be repeated during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the special winning opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 or 16 times, the special game is usually ended by displaying an effect screen called an end demonstration time. Normally, in special games, 9 or more balls can be expected per unit game, and sufficient prize balls (also referred to as “balls”) can be obtained by 16 unit games. Is obtained. A special game in which 16 unit games are repeated is also appropriately referred to as “16R big hit”, and a special game in which 4 unit games are repeated is also appropriately referred to as “4R big hit”. Note that, although the unit game is repeated 16 times, a small number of unit games are substantially repeated by opening the special winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual (for example, 1.6 seconds) in some unit games. A normal special game (sometimes referred to as “substantial nR big hit”) similar to the above can also be realized.

  On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are short or almost zero (eg, 0.1 second), and the large winning opening 20 is opened for 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice to complete the shortened special game. In the shortened special game, since the opening of the special winning opening 20 for a very short time is only repeated twice, it is hardly possible to enter the special winning opening 20 and the special game in which the number of balls substantially equals almost zero is achieved. is there. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also appropriately referred to as a “2R big hit”. Although the number of unit games is the same as that of the normal special game, the shortened special game can be realized by opening the special winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all the unit games.

  Further, if the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stoppage are in a predetermined small hit mode after the above-described symbol change, a small hit game constituted by one unit game is performed. The opening operation of the special winning opening 20 is executed. In one unit game constituting the small hitting game, the big winning port 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds, and the operation mode is similar in appearance to a 2R big hit.

  If a special game has occurred and the hit stop symbol at that time is in a specific mode (for example, “777”), after the special game ends, a certain change, which is one of the specific games, is further started. During the probable change, a winning / losing lottery having a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game may be generated relatively early. It should be noted that the result of the determination of the success / failure lottery may be a specific jackpot, that is, a jackpot with a probability change, which may be a latent probability change state that is not explicitly reported as a decorative design or effect contents without explicitly indicating the appearance. In this case, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether the change is the probability change or the non-probability change even during the probability change. It should be noted that when the predetermined condition is satisfied, whether the change is a probable change or a non-probable change may be clearly indicated on the effect display device 60.

  In the normal game after the end of the special game, a ball entry easy state, which is one of the specific game states, is started. In the easy ball entry state, the opening probability is increased so that the opening probability of the ordinary motorized accessory 90 is extended while the probability of hitting in the opening lottery is higher than usual. The number of hits to the second start port 12 can be increased because the number of hits of the normal symbol per fixed time can be increased, and the ease of entering the second start port 12 is also increased. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chance of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12, it becomes possible to hardly reduce the number of possessed balls or to continue playing while gradually increasing the possessed balls.

  In the easy ball entry state, as one of the specific game states, a so-called time reduction in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shorter than that in the normal state is further executed. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after a predetermined number of fluctuations, for example, 100 fluctuations are displayed, but reaches the fluctuation number. If a big hit occurs before, the time savings will end once. Since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is reduced in the time reduction, until a big hit occurs, as compared with the case of the normal state in which the symbol fluctuation is performed with the normal fluctuation time. Can be shortened, and the ease of obtaining a big hit can be relatively increased. In a modified example, it is good also as a specification which does not carry out the time saving of a special symbol in a ball entry easy state.

  FIG. 2 shows a basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on and off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and processes the entire gaming operation such as a lottery when the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are won. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151 and controls display contents on the effect display device 60, and fluctuates the effect-like display contents in accordance with the determination result by the main substrate 200 in particular. The back setting mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path of the prize ball, a payout device 154 that pays out a prize ball, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball plate 105 in accordance with a prize at each winning port. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The launching device 156 launches the stored balls in the upper bowl 105 into the game area 81 one by one. The launch control board 157 controls the launch operation of the launch device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies power to each unit of the pachinko gaming machine 100. On the substrate of the main substrate 200, a performance display section 159 is provided. The performance display unit 159 includes four 7-segment LEDs that display the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the sum of the safe ball and the out ball, for example, a four-digit number.

  On the substrate of the main substrate 200, a setting change device 170 is provided. The setting change device 170 is a device for changing a setting to one of a plurality of settings (also called game settings) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six stages of settings (Setting 1 to Setting 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of a big hit can be varied according to the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specification is for the player. If the large hit probabilities from the settings 1 to 6 are M1 to M6, respectively, M1 ≦ M2 ≦ M3 The jackpot probability of each setting can be determined so that ≦ M4 ≦ M5 ≦ M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

  The setting change device 170 includes a setting key cylinder 171 for inserting a setting key possessed by an amusement store employee, a setting change button 172 for changing a setting to one of a plurality of game settings, and a setting value that has been set. The display unit 173 includes a setting display unit 173 that illuminates and displays a setting memory that stores set values. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turn key type switch for shifting to a state in which the setting can be changed (hereinafter, referred to as a “setting change state”) or a state in which the setting can be checked (hereinafter, referred to as a “setting check state”). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 and the setting key is turned to turn on the setting key. Then, when the power switch 150 is turned on, the state shifts to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In order to shift to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as “RMW clear switch”) is pressed. On the other hand, to shift to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

  In the case of shifting to the setting change state, a number “1” indicating setting 1 is displayed as an initial value of the game setting on the setting display section 173, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display unit 173 is configured by a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed once, the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 are changed in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 →. When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is changed back to the off state after the setting is changed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory, and the setting change is confirmed. , The game can be played. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 does not change, and the setting cannot be changed. Thereafter, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off, the game can be played. Note that when the setting key is turned off to enable the game, the setting display section 173 turns off, and the current setting value cannot be visually recognized.

  Note that the setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, if the power is turned on while the setting key is not turned (the setting key is off) and the RAM clear switch is pressed, the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the setting key is turned (the setting key is on) and the RAM clear switch is pressed, the state is changed to the setting change state together with the execution of the RAM clear. If the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key-off state, the power is restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key on state, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state. Further, the setting display unit 173 may also be used as the performance display unit 159. In this case, the dual-purpose display section may function as the performance display section 159 in the game possible state, and may function as the setting display section 173 in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the setting change device 170 may not be provided, and the game setting may not be changed.

<Function block>
FIG. 3 shows functional blocks of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Hereinafter, the functions realized by using the respective configurations will be described. In this specification, for example, in order to match the physical configurations with the functional configurations, the physical configurations such as the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the emission control board 157, and the like are used. For the parts already described as above, the terms may be used as they are for convenience.

  The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a power supply board 158 that generates a power supply used in the gaming machine based on an AC power supply (24 VAC or the like) supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. , A payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling award ball payout, a launch control board 157 for controlling launching of a game ball to a game area, and controlling a stunning operation and processing. The configuration is such that the functions are shared with a sub-board 300 as a sub-control device.

  The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a large winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a group of general winning ports (a first general winning port 33a, a second general winning port). The port 33b), the out port 34, the display unit 120 for design etc., and the external information output terminal 160 are electrically connected to each other to transmit and receive various control signals. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 transmits a firing permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a prize ball payout transmitted from the main board 200 or a signal indicating the control state of the main board 200, and indirectly controls the launch control board 157. And the payout of the prize balls by the payout device 154 is controlled. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launching device 156, and the ball feeding device 164, and based on the launch permission signal transmitted from the payout control board 155, the ball sending device 164 and the launching device. The device 156 is controlled to fire a game ball. The sub-board 300 includes an effect display device 60, a movable accessory 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), a speaker 108, an effect input operation device 115 (effect button 109, a cross key 110), a decorative lamp 111, and an electric lamp. , And transmits and receives various control signals to and from each other.

  Data transmission and reception between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is performed in one direction from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. It is arranged on the sub-board 300. Since one-way data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub-board 300 to the configuration included in the main board 200. I can't even make a request. Therefore, the sub board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. In addition, bidirectional data transmission and reception are performed between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155 and between the payout control board 155 and the emission control board 157. However, as in the case between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, a configuration in which data is transmitted and received in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155, or a one-way data transfer from the payout control board 155 to the emission control board 157. A configuration for transmitting and receiving data may be adopted.

  Note that the functional blocks included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the firing control board 157, and the sub-board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modification, some of the functional blocks may be included in other boards. It may be mounted. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the firing control board 157 may be configured to be mounted on the payout control board 155. Good. Further, for example, a part of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the main board 200, or the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. May be divided and provided on a plurality of substrates, and one functional block may be configured as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination unit 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation unit 202, a first lottery unit 211, a second lottery unit 212, a preliminary determination unit 235, a general drawing lottery unit 213, a hold control unit 240, Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small hit game control means 265, specific game control means 270, open / close control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, A main error detecting unit 284, a setting changing unit 286, a setting confirming unit 287, and a command communication unit 205 are provided.

<Entry judgment means 201>
The ball entry judging means 201 judges the entry of a game ball into each winning opening. The receiving ball determination means 201 determines that the game ball has won the first starting port 11 when receiving the first starting winning information, and that the gaming ball has won the second starting port 12 when receiving the second starting winning information. to decide. The winning determination unit 201 determines that the game ball has won the special winning opening 20 when receiving the special winning opening winning information, and determines that the game ball has won the general winning opening 33 when receiving the general winning information. Upon receiving the passage information, the ball entry determining means 201 determines that the game ball has passed the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. Upon receiving the ejection information, the entering ball judging means 201 judges that the game ball has passed through the out port. The entering ball judging means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launched balls, which is the sum of the safe ball and the out ball, and causes the performance display unit 159 to display the ratio. The entering ball judging means 201 calculates “the number of payout balls” ÷ “the total number of launching balls” × 100 when the probability of a big hit is a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state (a so-called low probability and low and low ball entry state). Is displayed on the performance display unit 159. Therefore, the performance display unit 159 displays the bass in the low bass state.

<Random number generating means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various determinations in the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the general-purpose lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation unit 202 sets the random number (also referred to as a “pass / fail lottery value”) to be used in the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination unit 221 and the second success / failure determination unit 222 from “0” to “65535”. A range of random numbers is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation unit 202 determines the random number (also referred to as “symbol determination lottery value”) used in symbol determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination unit 226 and the second symbol determination unit 227 as “0” to “255”. Random numbers in the range up to are generated by predetermined means. In addition, the random number generation unit 202 sets the random numbers (also referred to as “variation pattern determination lottery values”) used in the determination of the variation pattern by the first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232 as “0” to “255”. Is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in a range from “0” to “99” as a random number used in the success / failure lottery by the ordinary figure lottery means 213 by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generating means 202 generates a random number in a range from “0” to “2” as a random number used in determining a symbol by a predetermined means. The "random number" here is a physical random number generated by a random number generation circuit, a true random number in a mathematical sense, a pseudo random number such as a random number using a 16-bit counter or a software random number using a random number generation algorithm. May be. Alternatively, a random number generated by combining a hardware random number and a software random number may be used. Further, as the random numbers acquired by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212, a random number generated by the same generation means may be obtained, or a random number generated by another generation means may be obtained. .

<Plot drawing means 213>
When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the general figure lottery means 213 generates a random number used for winning or losing a normal symbol and a random number used for determining a stop symbol of the normal symbol. A lottery is executed by obtaining the information from 202. The ordinary symbol lottery means 213 includes an ordinary symbol success / failure determination table (not shown) that is referred to to determine an ordinary symbol success / failure, and a normal symbol judgment that is referred to for determining a stop symbol of the ordinary symbol to be displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 45. Table and hold. The correspondence between the lottery values for the winning / rejection lottery and the hit is set in the ordinary symbol hit / fail determination table, and the correspondence between the lottery values for the stop symbol determination and the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol determination table, respectively, as described above. Based on the winning probability and the selection probability of the symbol, the success or failure of the ordinary symbol and the stop symbol are determined. If the lottery value for the ordinary symbol hit / fail lottery corresponds to the hit, the ordinary symbol lottery means 213 determines the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol by referring to the ordinary symbol determination table, and determines the lottery value for the ordinary symbol success / fail lottery. If it corresponds to a deviation, the mode of one deviation symbol is always determined. When the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment corresponds to a hit and the normal symbol stops at a predetermined symbol (first hit mode or second hit mode), the opening / closing control means 275, which will be described later, changes the stop symbol mode and the game state. Then, the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded. The spreading time is 0.1 second for a short opening and 6 seconds for a long opening. Ordinary symbol lottery values are temporarily held by holding control means 240 described later. However, the lottery value is reserved only when the number does not exceed a predetermined suspension upper limit number retained by the suspension control means 240.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 has a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first success / failure determination means 221, a first symbol determination means 226, a first variation pattern determination as a function of executing a first lottery relating to the first game. It includes means 231 and executes a first success / failure lottery as a success / failure lottery corresponding to a ball entering the first starting port 11. On the basis of various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 causes the first special symbol display section 41 to perform a variable display of the first special symbol 51. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second success / failure determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to a ball entering the second starting port 12. A second winning / losing lottery is executed as the winning / losing lottery to be performed. On the basis of various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the second special symbol display section 42 performs a variable display of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display section 42. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 60.

<First lottery value obtaining means 216 and second lottery value obtaining means 217>
The first lottery value obtaining means 216 obtains random numbers for various lotteries and determinations by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the first starting port 11. More specifically, a first winning / losing lottery value for judging the success / failure by the first judging means 221, a first symbol lottery value for determining the mode of stopping the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol deciding means 226, a first variation pattern The first pattern lottery values for determining the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determination means 231 are obtained from the corresponding random number generation means. The second lottery value obtaining means 217 obtains random numbers for various lotteries and determinations by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the second starting port 12. Specifically, the second winning / decreasing lottery value for judging the success / failure of the second winning / decreasing means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determining means 227, the second variation pattern The second pattern lottery values for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determination means 232 are obtained from the corresponding random number generation means.

  The first success / failure determination means 221 performs a success / failure determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game based on the first success / failure lottery value. The second success / failure determination means 222 performs a success / failure determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game, based on the second success / failure lottery value. More specifically, in the success / failure determination, "big hit" indicating that the game is shifted to the special game, "small hit" indicating that the game is shifted to the small hit game, "not indicating that the game is not shifted to the special game and the small hit game" Is determined. The first contact determination unit 221 and the second contact determination unit 222 hold a contact determination table referred to in the contact determination. In addition, the pass / fail judgment performed at the time of starting the symbol change is appropriately referred to as a “pass / fail judgment as the main judgment” in order to be distinguished from a pre-win / fail judgment described later. Note that in this specification, when a “table” or “selection criterion” is used, the correspondence between a first parameter such as a lottery value and a second parameter such as a value indicating an option is strictly defined in a table structure. Not only data but also such a relationship is widely included in a case where the relationship is realized by a program structure that derives a second parameter from one or a plurality of first parameters. The term “selection criteria” is appropriately referred to as a concept substantially synonymous with “table” including these. When a table structure is used, a selection criterion that is substantially one kind may be constituted by a combination of a plurality of structurally divided tables. Indicates the number of substantive types of tables, not the number of structured tables.

  The first hit determination unit 221 and the second hit determination unit 222 hold tables corresponding to each hit determination as the hit determination tables referred to in the hit determination. More specifically, a hit / fail determination table (also referred to as a “first hit / fail determination table”) for determining hit / fail by the first hit / fail determination means 221 and a hit / fail determination table (“second And a table to be referred to in accordance with the execution determination. A plurality of hit / fail judgment tables are associated with the hit / small hit / miss judgment results and the hit / withdrawal lottery values, and the hit / fail probability is determined according to the associated hit / hit range setting. Also, a plurality of types of hit / fail judgment tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings are prepared. Is prepared. In addition, when the probability of the big hit, the small hit, and the departure is the same among a plurality of game settings, a win / fail judgment table common to the plurality of game settings may be prepared.

  FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the hit / fail judgment table. This figure shows a hit / fail judgment table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a hit / fail judgment table corresponding to setting 6. In the hit / fail judgment table of this figure, the big hit, small hit, out-of-office judgment result and hit / withdrawal lottery value are associated with each other. Is determined. The first contact determination unit 221 and the second contact determination unit 222 refer to the contact determination table of FIG. In both the first win / fail determination by the first win / fail determination means 221 and the second win / fail determination by the second win / fail determination means 222, a big hit is normally obtained only when the win / fail determination value falls within the range of 0 to 299. At the time of probable change, the range of the jackpot is expanded, and the jackpot is obtained not only when the winning / failing lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299 but also when it falls within the range of 300 to 2999. Thus, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the gaming state. In this figure, the single hit / fail judgment table shows the jackpot ranges for both normal time and probable change. However, the hit / fail judgment table may be separately prepared for normal time and probable change. You may prepare separately for 1 winning / losing lottery and for 2nd winning / losing lottery.

  In the base technology, even if the winning / rejecting lottery value does not fall within the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, it becomes a small hit. In the example of this drawing, when the winning / rejecting lottery value obtained by the first hit / reject determination unit 221 falls in the range of 56500 to 65535, a small hit occurs, and the winning / rejecting lottery value obtained by the second hit / reject determination unit 222 is 64000 to 65535. If it falls in the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the range of the first hit lottery corresponding to the small hit is wider than that of the second hit lottery, and the small hit is more likely to occur. As described above, when the hit does not correspond to the big hit, it is originally “out of place”. However, in the example of FIG. Is particularly described as “out of place”. That is, when the “acceptance” is considered from the viewpoint of “whether or not a big hit”, the “small hit” may be included in the “outside” in a broad sense meaning “not a big hit”. In addition, when “acceptance” is considered from the viewpoint of “hit or not”, “small hit” may be included in “broad hit” together with “big hit”. Although FIG. 2 shows an example in which the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are realized in the form of a single hit / fail determination table, each may be realized as a separate table. Good. Further, the “small hit” may be provided in only one of the first game and the second game, or may not be provided in any of the games. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding hit / fail judgment table.

  FIG. 6 schematically shows the range setting of the winning / rejecting lottery value for each set value. FIG. 7A shows the correspondence between the first winning / losing determination value obtained by the first winning / failing determination means 221 and the success / failure determination result. FIG. 6B shows the correspondence between the second winning / losing determination value acquired by the second winning / failing determining means 222 and the success / failure determination result. The range of the first success / failure lottery value and the second success / failure lottery value which become a big hit at the time of the normal time and the probability change is 0 to 294 if the setting value is “1”, 0 to 295 if the setting value is “2”, and the setting value “ The value is 0 to 296 for "3", 0 to 297 for "4", 0 to 298 for "5", and 0 to 299 for "6". Therefore, as the set value increases, the range of the winning / rejecting lottery value in which the jackpot is a big hit at the normal time is increased, and the probability of the big hit at the normal time is increased. In addition, the range of the first hit / rejection lottery value and the second hit / rejection lottery value that are a big hit (that is, a normal hit) during the probability change only is 295 to 2949 if the set value is “1”, and the set value is “2”. 296 to 2959, 297 to 2969 if the setting value is "3", 298 to 2979 if the setting value is "4", 299 to 2899 if the setting value is "5", and 299 to 21989 if the setting value is "6". 300-2999. Therefore, as the set value increases, the range of the winning / rejecting lottery value in which the jackpot at the time of the probability change is increased, and the probability of the jackpot at the time of the probability change is increased. In addition, the range of the winning / rejecting lottery value is determined so that the ratio of the normal time jackpot probability to be a big hit at the normal time and the probability changed big hit probability to be a big hit at the time of the probability change becomes constant irrespective of the set value. In this drawing, the range of the winning / rejecting lottery value is determined so that the probability of success jackpot probability is 10 times that of the normal jackpot probability, and is common to all set values “1” to “6”. . Further, the range of the winning / rejecting lottery value is determined so that the probability of the small hit is constant regardless of the set value. For all the setting values “1” to “6”, a small hit occurs when the range of the first winning / decreasing lottery value falls within the range of 56500 to 65535, and a small hit occurs when the range of the second winning / decreasing lottery value falls within 64000 to 65535. It will be a hit. The range of the winning / rejecting lottery value outside the range of the big hit or the small hit is “out”. In this figure, the jackpot probability is made different for each set value. However, the correspondence between the hit lottery value and the hit determination result may be determined so that the big hit probability is the same between different set values.

<First symbol determining means 226 and second symbol determining means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determination unit 226 and the second symbol determination unit 227 determine a stop symbol at the start of symbol change based on the symbol lottery value obtained from the random number generation unit 202 and the result of the hit / fail determination. . The first symbol determination unit 226 and the second symbol determination unit 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables that are referred to for determining a special symbol stop symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the determination as to whether or not the first hit determination means 221 is performed, and the second symbol determination means 227 determines whether or not the second hit determination means 222 determines whether or not the hit is determined. A plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the determination are held. The first success / failure determination means 221 holds a first big hit symbol design table to be referred to at the time of a big hit, a first big hit symbol design table to be referred to at the time of a small hit, and a first hit symbol design table to be referred to at the time of a miss. The second hit determination unit 222 holds a large hit second symbol determination table to be referred to at the time of a big hit, a small hit second symbol determination table to be referred to at the time of a small hit, and a detached second symbol determination table to be referred to at the time of coming off. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select a symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the hit determination. It should be noted that the symbol determination executed when starting the symbol change is appropriately referred to as “symbol determination as the final determination” in order to be distinguished from the prior symbol determination described later.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 7A is a table referred to when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, FIG. 7B is a table referred to when the result of the hit determination is out of order, and FIG. It is a table that is referred to when the result of the hit determination is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of the figure in the symbol determination as the final determination. In each symbol determination table, the correspondence between the numbers “0” to “10” indicating the types of special symbols and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value is defined. The special symbol types are respectively associated with the jackpot, small hit, out-of-office judgment result, "0" to "4" correspond to the big hit, "5" to "9" correspond to the small hit, “10” corresponds to the disconnection. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of symbols which are formed by combining segments and have no meaning in general.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the special symbol types “0” to “4” are associated with the jackpot and the presence or absence of the probability change after the jackpot. Specifically, the type “0” indicates a 16R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, and the first symbol lottery value is associated with “0 to 99”, and the second symbol lottery value is “0 to 99”. 144 ". The type “1” indicates a 4R jackpot (or “substantial 4R jackpot”) with a probability change as a specific jackpot, and is associated with “100 to 149” in the case of the first symbol lottery value and in the case of the second symbol lottery value This is associated with “145 to 149”. The type “2” indicates a 2R jackpot with a probability change, and the type “2” is associated with “150 to 189” for both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value. The type “3” usually indicates a 16R big hit without a probability change as a big hit, and the type “3” is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value “150 to 189”. The type “4” usually indicates a 4R big hit without a probability change as a big hit, and the type “4” is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value “230 to 255”. In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (that is, the content of the jackpot and the presence or absence of the probability fluctuation thereafter) is determined by the size of the symbol lottery value range.

  In addition, it is also possible to provide more types of special symbols. In that case, by configuring so that one big hit type is determined corresponding to a plurality of special symbol types, it is possible to increase the number of symbol types and You can set fewer types. Alternatively, it is also possible to subdivide into more jackpot types in accordance with the increased symbol types. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide different symbol types for the first lottery and the second lottery. In this case, one big hit type is determined so as to correspond to each of the type of the special symbol selected at the time of the first lottery and the type of the special symbol selected at the time of the second lottery. However, it is desirable that the first lottery and the second lottery be set so that the probability variation ratios are the same.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, the type “10” is associated with the symbol lottery value of the entire range in the case where the result of the determination as to whether or not the hit is out of order. Therefore, it is determined that the same special symbol is always stopped and displayed in the case of a miss. In addition, it is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols that are stopped and displayed in the case of a deviation.

  As shown in FIG. 7C, special symbol types “5” to “9” are associated with small hits. The type “5” is associated with the symbol lottery value range “0 to 49”, and the type “6” is associated with the symbol lottery value range “50 to 99”. The type “7” is associated with the symbol lottery value range “100 to 149”, the type “8” is associated with the symbol lottery value range “150 to 199”, and the type “9” is the symbol lottery value range. Corresponding to “200 to 255”.

  In the base technology, the table in FIG. 7 is also referred to as the prior symbol determination table in the prior symbol determination in order to save the storage area on the main board 200. The first symbol determination unit 226 and the second symbol determination unit 227 determine that the value of “0” to “10” indicating the type of the special symbol as the result of the preliminary symbol determination is the first winning / rejecting lottery or the second winning / rejecting lottery. It is transmitted to the effect deciding means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of reservations. It should be noted that, as the prior symbol determination table, a table that can be further subdivided to enable a complicated determination, or a table in which the determination range of the big hit symbol for executing the same special game is simplified and simplified may be used. . In addition, when a symbol is determined uniformly in the case of a departure as in the base technology, a specific symbol is determined without referring to the acquired symbol lottery value and without preparing a symbol determination table for the departure. May be.

<First variation pattern determining means 231 and second variation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determination unit 231 acquires from the random number generation unit 202 a variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is defined. It is determined from a plurality of variation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determination unit 232 converts the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined into the second pattern lottery value acquired from the random number generation unit 202. It is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on this. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 each determine the variation pattern of the symbol variation by referring to the variation pattern table when starting the symbol variation. In addition, the first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232 execute a preliminary pattern determination of which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232, and the control unit of the main board 200 are provided with a variation pattern table referred to for determining a variation pattern when the variation start condition is satisfied, A pre-pattern determination table used for generating information for determining execution of the pre-reading process when entering a ball is held or shared. The fluctuation pattern defines a fluctuation time from the start to the stop when the special symbol is variably displayed, and has various lengths of fluctuation depending on the type. In other words, in each variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is determined, the variation display time is substantially set for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and when the variation display time elapses, the special symbol is changed. Is stopped. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern determination executed when the symbol fluctuation is started is also referred to as “variation pattern determination as the final determination” as appropriate, in order to distinguish it from the prior pattern determination. Further, in order to contribute to selection of a variation effect pattern of a decorative symbol, which will be described later, the variation pattern may be defined as a different type of variation pattern while having the same variation time.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically illustrating a fluctuation pattern table. The first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232 refer to the table of FIG. 10A in the normal state, and refer to the table of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), when the result of the determination is incorrect in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, the super reach "super 1" of the pattern range number "0" is selected, If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, the super reach "super 2" of the pattern range number "1" is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, "Normal 1" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "2" is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, the normal reach which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "3" is selected. Select "2". If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, "reach without reach" of the pattern range number "4" is selected. As the “without reach”, a different fluctuation pattern is selected according to the number of holdings. When the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the fluctuation pattern is 10 seconds. When the number of holdings is 3, the fluctuation pattern is 7 seconds. Is 4, a variation pattern of 4 seconds is selected.

  In this figure, an example in which the fluctuation time is mainly classified into five types according to the fluctuation time is described. Is associated with the lottery value range of each classification.

  The range of the pattern lottery values assigned to “Normal 1”, “Normal 2”, and “Reach without reach” also differs depending on the number of holds. When the number of reservations is 0 or 1, it is as shown in FIG. 9A, but as the number of reservations increases, the lottery value range of “Normal 1” and “Normal 2” becomes narrower, and the lottery value of “No reach out”. The range becomes wider. The smaller the number of reservations, the wider the lottery value range of the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time, and the probability that a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is selected increases. Therefore, the smaller the number of holds, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of holds, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a fluctuation pattern table in which the correspondence between the pattern lottery value range and the fluctuation pattern differs for each number of reservations, it is possible to realize a control in which a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is easily selected when the number of reservations decreases.

  In the normal state, when the result of the hit determination is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, the super reach “super 1” of the pattern range number “5” is selected, and the pattern lottery value is If it is 124 to 248, the super reach “super 2” of the pattern range number “6” is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, the normal reach “normal 1” of the pattern range number “7” is selected, and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, the normal reach of the pattern range number “8” is “normal”. Select "2".

  In the normal state, if the result of the hit determination is 2R big hit or small hit, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, the super reach “Super 3” of the pattern range number “9” is selected, and the pattern lottery value is If it is 123 to 255, "normal 3" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "10" is selected.

  The first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232, when transmitting the pre-determination result to the effect determination unit 303 as a so-called pre-read result, sets the value (0 to 10) of the pattern range number to the first validity It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is a lottery or a second lottery lottery or the number of holds. In the configuration shown in FIG. 8, an example is shown in which a table is provided for each of the pass / fail judgment results in the pre-pattern judgment. In addition to deriving only information on whether or not the position is within the range, the control unit of the sub-board 300 may be controlled so as to determine what variation is to be executed together with the result of the preliminary right / wrong determination.

  In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8B referred to in the time reduction state, pattern lottery values are assigned to variation patterns for time reduction. However, the correspondence between the range of the pattern lottery value and the fluctuation time is the same as that of FIG. “Reach-less out-of-reach reduction” is a variation pattern of a relatively short variation time, which is associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as “reach out-of-reach in FIG. In the case of “reach-less reduction”, a different fluctuation pattern is also selected according to the number of holds. When the number of holds is 0 or 1, a change pattern of 10 seconds, and when the number of holds is 2 to 4, a change pattern of 1 second. Are respectively selected. Note that the first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232 may be configured to refer to different variation pattern tables, or may be configured to refer to different variation pattern tables according to the game state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery and the second lottery is processed in preference to the first lottery, the second lottery is processed in spite of the easy ball entry state due to a reduction in time. The situation in which the holding of the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. For this reason, in the deviation variation in the first lottery in the easy ball entry state, a variation pattern table in which a variation pattern of a long time (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the variation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of holds is referred to. It may be that.

<Holding control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the hold control means 240 includes a special figure holding means 241 and a general figure holding means 242. The special figure holding unit 241 changes the symbol variation corresponding to the first or second winning / losing lottery value acquired before the first or second winning / losing lottery value is newly acquired. Is displayed, the start of the symbol change corresponding to the newly acquired first winning / rejecting random determination value or the second winning / rejecting random determination value is suspended, and the winning / rejection random determination value is stored until the start of the variation display of the corresponding symbol. Here, for the first special symbol, the first winning / non-successful lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored with the upper limit of four each, and the second special symbol is stored with the upper limit of four each. The second win / fail lottery value, the second symbol lottery value, and the second pattern lottery value are stored. The general figure holding means 242 stores the general figure lottery value acquired by the general figure lottery means 213 as a reserved ball. The number of these reservations is represented by the number of lights or the number of blinks of the first special figure reservation display part 71, the second special figure reservation display part 72, and the general figure reservation display part 75, respectively. The number of reservations by the special figure reservation unit 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60.

  The lottery value of the second winning / rejecting lottery held in the special figure holding means 241 is preferentially consumed over the lottery value of the first winning / rejecting lottery, and the symbol variation is displayed. Therefore, even if the lottery value of the big hit is held as the first hit lottery, the symbol change corresponding to the big hit lottery value of the first hit lottery is not displayed as long as the lottery value is held as the second hit lottery. Therefore, even if a jackpot is held as the first winning / decreasing lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of continuous jackpots can be obtained by continuing to hit until the jackpot is held as the second winning / decreasing lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special figure control means 251, a second special figure control means 252, and a general figure control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display section 41 in accordance with the variation pattern determined in accordance with the result of the first lottery determination by the first lottery means 211. Let it. The first special figure control means 251 sets the completion of the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning / rejecting lottery or the second winning / rejecting lottery performed before that as a new symbol variation starting condition. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display part 42 in accordance with the variation pattern determined in accordance with the result of the second lottery determination by the second lottery means 212. Let it. The second special figure control means 252 also sets the completion of the change display of the symbol corresponding to the first win / fail lottery or the second win / fail lottery performed before that as a new symbol change start condition.

  The first special figure control means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first success / failure lottery when the success / failure lottery value of the second success / failure lottery is stored by the special figure holding means 241. On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second success / failure lottery regardless of whether the special figure holding means 241 stores the success / failure lottery value of the first success / failure lottery. Thereby, when the lottery value is held in both the first win / fail lottery and the second win / fail lottery, the lottery value held in the second win / fail lottery is read out preferentially and the symbol variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first lottery lottery is not read out and the symbol change does not start until the number of holds in the second lottery lottery becomes zero.

  The first special figure control unit 251 and the second special figure control unit 252 change the timing of starting and stopping the fluctuation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 by the command communication unit 205 described later. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determination means 303 (sub main). When transmitting the change start command, the value indicating each of the success / failure determination result determined or determined as the main determination, the stop symbol, the change pattern, and the value indicating which of the first success / failure lottery and the second success / failure lottery is set. The command is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the change start command. When transmitting the fluctuation stop command, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits a change start command, a change stop command, and the like to the effect control means 304 in order to control the change display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). Thus, the variable displays by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized, and the interlock is maintained. The general symbol control unit 254 causes the ordinary symbol display unit 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the general symbol lottery unit 213 as a variation display of the ordinary symbol.

<Special figure adjusting means 276>
The special figure adjustment unit 276 waits for the start of the variable display of one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 while the other variable display is performed. The special figure adjusting unit 276 is configured to perform the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 12 irrespective of the order in which the game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. The variable display of 52 is prioritized over the variable display of the first special symbol 51 based on the ball entering the first starting port 11. For example, when both the first success / failure lottery value and the second success / failure lottery value are suspended, the second success / failure lottery value is always preferentially consumed, and the second special symbol 52 is continuously and variably displayed.

  In addition, the special figure adjusting means 276 in the modified example displays the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in accordance with the order of entering the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The display may be selectively changed. For example, when the ball is entered in the order of the first starting port 11, the first starting port 11, and the second starting port 12, the display is changed in the order of the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52. Is done. In this case, the special figure adjusting unit 276 monitors the holding control unit 240 and stores the holding order of the winning / failure lottery values. Which of the special symbols should be changed is determined according to the order in which the game balls are entered, that is, according to the order of holding the winning / decreasing lottery values in the holding control means 240, so that the player can easily grasp the order of the change visually.

  The special figure adjusting means 276 in another modified example may display the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the order of entering the ball. Good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52. For example, when both the first success / failure lottery value and the second success / failure lottery value are reserved, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are alternately displayed. Which of the special symbols should be changed simply alternately regardless of the order in which the game balls are entered, so that the player can easily intuitively grasp the order of the change.

  When one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in the hit mode, the special figure adjusting unit 276 waits for the start of the variable display of the other. In this case, since the special symbol change display is not started during the execution of the special game, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Advance determination means 235>
The preliminary determination unit 235 includes a first lottery preliminary determination unit 236 and a second lottery preliminary determination unit 237. The first lottery advance determination unit 236 includes various random numbers acquired by the first lottery value acquisition unit 216 before the first lottery determination unit 221, the first symbol determination unit 226, and the first variation pattern determination unit 231 perform various determinations. Before the start of the change of the first special symbol by the first special figure control means 251, the information on the change is determined in advance. The second lottery advance determination unit 237 includes various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition unit 217 before the second lottery determination unit 222, the second symbol determination unit 227, and the second variation pattern determination unit 232 perform various determinations. Before the start of the change of the second special symbol by the second special figure control means 252, the information regarding the change is determined in advance.

  The first lottery advance determination unit 236 includes a first preliminary hit / failure lottery value determination table, a first prior symbol lottery value determination table, and a first prior variation pattern random value determination as a determination table for preliminary determination according to the first lottery unit 211. Keep the table. The first lottery preliminary determination unit 236 determines the random number group to which the first lottery value stored in the special figure holding unit 241 belongs by using the first preliminary lottery value determination table. The first lottery preliminary determination unit 236 determines a random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure holding unit 241 belongs using the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table. The first lottery preliminary determination unit 236 determines a random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure holding unit 241 belongs using the first preliminary variation pattern determination table. Then, these determination results are temporarily stored as preliminary determination results, and information relating to the preliminary determination results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication unit 205 (sub-control command transmission unit 207) described later.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically illustrating a prior contact determination table that is referred to in the prior contact determination. The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 (priority determination regarding the first game) refers to the first preliminary lottery value determination table of FIG. Is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the result of the preliminary right / wrong determination. If the winning / rejecting lottery value is “300 to 2999”, a value of “2” indicating that is set as a preliminary winning / failing determination result. If the winning / rejecting lottery value is "3000 to 56499", a value of "3" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / losing lottery value is “56500 to 65535”, a value of “4” indicating that fact is set as a result of the preliminary winning / failing determination. Next, with reference to a first prior symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the first symbol lottery value is “0 to 99”, a value of “0” indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "230-255", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Further, with reference to a first prior variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern lottery value is “0-9”, a value “A” indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. . When the first pattern lottery value is “10-29”, a value “B” indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. When the first pattern lottery value is “30 to 255”, a value of “C” indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the first lottery preliminary determination unit 236 (priority determination regarding the first game) is transmitted to the first starting port 11 by the command communication unit 205 (sub-control command transmission unit 207) described later. This information is transmitted to the effect deciding means 303 in synchronization with the transmission timing of information indicating the entry of the ball (indicating the first winning / rejecting lottery), information indicating the number of holds, and the like.

  The second lottery preliminary determination means 237 (priority determination regarding the second game) refers to the second preliminary selection lottery value determination table of FIG. When the value is “0 to 299”, a value of “1” indicating the value is set as the result of the preliminary right / wrong determination. If the winning / rejecting lottery value is “300 to 2999”, a value of “2” indicating that is set as a preliminary winning / failing determination result. If the winning / rejecting lottery value is “3000 to 63999”, a value of “3” indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / losing lottery value is “64000 to 65535”, a value of “4” indicating that fact is set as the result of the preliminary winning / failing determination. Next, with reference to a second prior symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is “0 to 144”, a value of “0” indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . When the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is “150 to 189”, a value of “2” indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the second symbol lottery value is "230-255", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, with reference to a second prior variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is “0-9”, a value “A” indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. . When the second pattern lottery value is “10-29”, a value “B” indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. When the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", a value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the second lottery preliminary determination unit 237 (priority determination regarding the second game) is transmitted to the second starting port 12 by the command communication unit 205 (sub-control command transmission unit 207) described later. This information is transmitted to the effect deciding means 303 in synchronization with the transmission timing of information indicating that the ball is entered (indicating that it is the second winning / rejecting lottery), information indicating the number of holds, and the like.

  The various information temporarily stored as the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 is stored in a predetermined pre-determination result storage area up to four each in the same manner as the number of reserved storages. Note that the result of the preliminary determination may be stored using a hold storage area stored by the hold control unit 240. The information may be deleted based on the fact that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit 235 is transmitted to the effect determination unit 303 by the command communication unit 205 (sub-control command transmission unit 207) described below. In this way, by sharing information with other areas or deleting information based on the completion of transmission, efficient use of storage areas in the main board 200 can be expected. Further, as a determination table for the preliminary determination, a determination table for the final determination may be used without providing a table dedicated to the preliminary determination, and the preliminary determination regarding the first game and the preliminary determination regarding the second game may be performed. Some or all of them may share a common pre-determination table. As described above, by sharing with another determination table, a reduction in the data capacity of the main board 200 can be expected. Note that the content to be transmitted as the determination result of the preliminary determination unit 235 can be appropriately selected, for example, by transmitting only the determination result of pass / fail. Further, the value of the random number acquired by the first lottery value acquisition unit 216 and the second lottery value acquisition unit 217 is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the above-mentioned command communication unit 205 without being determined by the advance determination unit 235, 300 may be used to determine the contents of the preliminary determination.

  The pre-judgment means 235 may refer to a pre-authorization lottery value determination table in which the correspondence between the improper lottery value and the pre-authorization determination result is different according to the setting value set by the setting change device 170. Similarly to the above-described winning / failing determination table, a plurality of types of preliminary winning / falling lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the prior winning / failing lottery value determination table referred to according to the setting value of the game setting may be switched. In addition, you may use the prior winning / non-prize lottery value determination table that can be commonly used among a plurality of game settings. In this case, whether or not the winning is determined in advance may be determined based on a combination of the set value of the game setting and the value of the result of the prior determination.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a preliminary success / failure determination table corresponding to game settings. FIG. 9A is a preliminary hit / fail judgment table referred to by the first lottery pre-judgment means 236, and FIG. 9B is a prior hit / fail judgment table referred to by the second lottery pre-judgment means 237. When the win / fail lottery value is “0 to 294”, the preliminary win / fail judgment result is “11”, which indicates that a big hit occurs in all the settings 1 to 6. When the winning / losing lottery value is “295”, the result of the preliminary winning / failing determination is “12”, which indicates that a big hit occurs in the normal setting 2 or more or in all the settings at the time of the probability change. When the winning / losing lottery value is “296”, the result of the preliminary winning / failing determination is “13”, which indicates that a big hit is obtained when the setting is 3 or more in the normal state or all the settings in the probability change. When the winning / losing lottery value is “297”, the result of the preliminary winning / failing determination is “14”, which indicates that a big hit occurs in the normal setting of 4 or more or in all the settings at the time of the probability change. When the winning / losing lottery value is “298”, the result of the preliminary winning / failing determination is “15”, which indicates that a big hit occurs in the normal setting of 5 or more or in all the settings at the time of the probability change. When the winning / losing lottery value is “299”, the result of the preliminary winning / failing determination is “16”, which indicates that a big hit is obtained with the normal setting 6 or all the settings at the time of the probability change. In addition, when the win / fail lottery value is “300 to 2949”, the preliminary win / fail judgment result is “21”, which indicates that a big hit occurs in all the settings at the time of the probability change. When the winning / rejecting lottery value is “2950 to 2959”, the result of the preliminary winning / rejecting determination is “22”, which indicates that a big hit occurs at the setting 2 or more at the time of the probability change. When the win / fail lottery value is “2960 to 2969”, the preliminary win / fail determination result is “23”, which indicates that a big hit occurs when the probability change setting is 3 or more. When the win / fail lottery value is “2970 to 2979”, the preliminary win / fail judgment result is “23”, which indicates that a big hit occurs when the probability change setting is 4 or more. When the winning / losing lottery value is “2980 to 2989”, the result of the preliminary winning / failing determination is “25”, which indicates that a big hit occurs at the setting of 5 or more at the time of the probability change. In the case where the winning / losing lottery value is “2990 to 2999”, the preliminary winning / failing determination result is “26”, which indicates that a big hit occurs in the setting 6 at the time of the probability change. Further, when the first winning / rejecting lottery value shown in (a) is “3000 to 56499” and when the second winning / rejecting lottery value shown in (b) is “3000 to 63999”, the result of the prior award determination is “ 30 ", which means that a small hit occurs in all the settings. In addition, when the first winning / rejecting lottery value shown in (a) is “56500 to 65535”, and when the second winning / rejecting lottery value shown in (b) is “64000 to 65535”, the result of the prior award determination is “ 40 ", indicating that all settings are out of order. By using such a pre-authorization determination table, an appropriate pre-authorization determination result can be shown for each set value of the game setting.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260, when the first lottery lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in the transition to the special game, when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode, the special game operation It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the special winning opening 20. Similarly, the special game control means 260, when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in the transition to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode It is determined that the special game operation condition is satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the special winning opening 20.

  The special game is a game in which the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 20 is continuously performed a plurality of times continuously, and is configured by a plurality of unit games. The special game includes a 16R jackpot in which the unit game is repeated 16 times, a 4R jackpot in which the unit game is repeated four times, and a 2R jackpot in which the unit game in which the opening time is shorter than the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot is repeated only twice. The 16R jackpot is a jackpot in the second win / fail lottery, and the 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first win / fail lottery. In the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot, the large winning opening 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in one unit game in principle. In the 2R jackpot, the large winning opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 terminates the special game when the set round number of the unit game is exhausted. In addition, even if it is a 2R jackpot, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special winning opening 20 may be opened in the same opening manner as the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot.

<Small hit game control means 265>
When the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 indicates a small hit, the small hit game control means 265 activates the small hit game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the small hit game is executed by causing the opening / closing control means 275 to open the big winning port 20. Similarly, when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 indicates a small hit, the small hitting game control means 265 sets a small hit when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small hitting mode. It is determined that the winning game operating condition is satisfied, and the small winning game is executed by causing the opening and closing control means 275 to open the big winning port 20.

  In the small hit game, the unit game is executed once, and the large winning opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small hitting game control means 265 opens the special winning opening 20 for about 1.6 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the special winning opening 20 to end the small hitting game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls the normal game in the probability change state, the time saving state, and the easy ball entry state. When the special symbol is a symbol with a special jackpot accompanied by a shift to a certain change, the specific game control means 270 shifts the game state to the certain change state, the time saving state, and the easy entry state after the end of the special game. The probable change state, the time saving state, and the easy entry state are continued until the next big hit occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 select a variation pattern having a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is substantially shortened. I do. However, in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of suspensions of the winning / rejecting lottery value by the suspension control means 240 is referred to, and the smaller the number of suspensions by the suspension control means 240, the more likely a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time to appear. In the easy ball entry state, both the normal change of the symbol and the extension of the opening of the second starting port 12 or only the extension of the opening of the second starting port 12 are performed. That is, the specific game control means 270 causes the second starting port 12 to be in the open extended state in the event of a specific big hit, and further increases the hit probability of the open lottery only when the success / failure lottery is the second success / failure lottery. Transition to a probabilistic state higher than the normal probability state. During the probable change state, the result of the determination by the first determination unit 221 and the determination by the second determination unit 222 is maintained at a high probability of a big hit.

<Opening / closing control means 275>
The opening / closing control means 275 controls the opening / closing of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the special winning opening 20 of the second starting port 12. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the opening / closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12. The opening / closing control means 275 opens the second opening 12 in the short opening time or the long opening time according to the result of the opening lottery in the normal state, and in the long opening time in the easy entry state. 2 Open the starting port 12. It is intended to enhance the ease of entering the second starting port 12 and allow the player to continue playing without reducing the number of balls. The opening / closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the special winning opening solenoid 92 to open the special winning opening 20 in the special game.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial process executing means 280 executes a process of starting control of the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored. The main power interruption processing executing means 282 executes an abnormal time response processing such as a power interruption processing in the main board 200 when a power abnormality such as a power interruption occurs. The main error detection unit 284 executes an abnormality detection process on the main board 200. The control start processing of the main board 200, the abnormality handling processing, and the abnormality detection processing will be described later.

<Setting change unit 286, setting check unit 287>
The setting change means 286 executes a “setting change process” for changing the game settings. When the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state, the setting changing unit 286 shifts to the above-described setting change state. When the setting is changed to the setting change state, the setting change unit 286 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the set values stored in the setting memory. The setting change means 286 changes the set values displayed on the setting display section 173 in order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 →... In response to pressing of the setting change button 172. , The setting value stored in the setting memory is updated to the same value as that displayed on the setting display unit 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting change unit 286 ends the setting change state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

  The setting confirmation unit 287 executes a “setting confirmation process” for confirming the game settings. When the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch when the setting key cylinder 171 is on, the setting check unit 287 shifts to the above-described setting check state. When the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation unit 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory. Unlike the above-described setting change unit 286, the setting check unit 287 does not change the set value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even when the setting change button 172 is pressed, and also updates the set value stored in the setting memory. do not do. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation unit 287 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

  Note that the set value data managed in the setting memory is not a numerical value of “1” to “6”, but may be a numerical value of “0” to “5” instead. In this case, the setting value “0” corresponds to the setting 1, the setting value “1” corresponds to the setting 2, the setting value “2” corresponds to the setting 3, and the setting value “3” corresponds to the setting 4. , The setting value “4” may correspond to the setting 5, and the setting value “5” may correspond to the setting 6. By using “0” as the normal value of the set value data, the RAM is cleared when the RAM is abnormal, and no abnormality is determined when the set value data is set to the initial value “0”. Can be simplified. In addition, when performing some sort of lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting a different table or data for each set value in the pre-reading process, there is an advantage that the offset process for the selection can be simplified. . For example, when “1” to “6” are used as the set value data, when these values are used as they are as the offset data for the table or the data selection, additional processing such as decrementing the start address by 1 is required. On the other hand, when “0” to “5” are used as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as it is as the offset data. When the setting change unit 286 and the setting confirmation unit 287 use numerical values of “0” to “5” as the set value data, the setting value data may be displayed on the setting display unit 173 as they are, A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the latter case, the numerical data of "0" to "5" are converted into numerical values of the setting 1 to the setting 6 in the game setting and displayed, so that the display can be easily understood by the administrator of the gaming machine.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication means 205 includes a payout control command communication means 206 for transmitting a control command necessary for performing payout and the like to the payout control board 155, and a subcontrol for transmitting a control command required for performing performance control and the like to the subboard 300. Command transmission means 207 is included. The payout control command communication unit 206 transmits a payout command instructing the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening based on the determination of the entering of each winning opening by the winning determination unit 201, and Sends a command indicating the status of the error or the like that occurred in. When starting the symbol variation, the sub-control command transmitting unit 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol variation to the effect determining unit 303 together with the symbol variation control command.

  The sub-control command transmitting unit 207 changes the timing at which the first special figure control unit 251 and the second special figure control unit 252 start and stop the fluctuation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determination means 303 (sub main). When transmitting the change start command, the value indicating each of the success / failure determination result determined or determined as the main determination, the stop symbol, the change pattern, and the value indicating which of the first success / failure lottery and the second success / failure lottery is set. The command is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the change start command. When transmitting the fluctuation stop command, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits a change start command, a change stop command, and the like to the effect control means 304 in order to control the change display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). Thus, the variable displays by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized, and the interlock is maintained. In addition, the sub-control command transmitting unit 207 transmits the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determining unit 235 to the effect determining unit 303. After the preliminary determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, the winning opening corresponding to the preliminary determination result (the first starting port 11, the second starting port) regardless of whether the symbol change display corresponding to the lottery is immediately started or not. The type information of the mouth 12), the information on the number of pieces to be held, the game state, and the like are transmitted to the effect determining means 303, and are deleted from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, the sub-board 300 realizes a so-called “look-ahead” process in which, based on the received pre-judgment result, the pass / fail result can be presumedly recognized before the symbol change start sequence comes. The processing based on the preliminary determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmitting means 207 is set by the special game control means 260, information on the special game by the small hit game control means 265, information on the small hit game by the small hit game control means 265, information on the lottery result by the general drawing lottery means 213, and setting by the setting change means 286. Is transmitted to the sub-board 300. The sub-control command transmitting unit 207 transmits various types of control on the main board 200, such as information on initial processing and information on errors by the main initial processing executing unit 280 and the main error detecting unit 284, and the like, or is transmitted to the main board 200. Information about various signals and the like is transmitted to the sub-board 300 as appropriate.

  FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes a symbol mode determination unit 301, a pattern storage unit 302, an effect determination unit 303, an effect control unit 304, a timing unit 307, an effect setting unit 308, a sub initial process execution unit 360, a sub power interruption process execution unit 362, A sub error detecting unit 364, a command receiving unit 370, and a sub side pre-determining unit 371 are provided.

  The pattern storage means 302 stores a plurality of effect patterns in which the effect image content to be displayed on the effect display device 60 in the variation of the decorative pattern 61 and the display process thereof are determined. In the effect pattern, a plurality of variable effect patterns in which the change process from the start to the stop of the change in the change display of the decorative symbol 61 and the effect process are determined, and the change display of the decorative symbol are displayed separately, and the degree of expectation to the big hit is displayed. And a plurality of announcement effect patterns that suggest the height of the advance notice in advance before stopping the fluctuation display.

  The command receiving unit 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication unit 205, and the sub-side preliminary determination unit 371 holds the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication unit 205. The effect deciding means 303 includes a normal effect deciding means 373 and a prefetch effect deciding means 374. The normal effect determination means 373 displays the effect on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 in accordance with the information of the determination result of the first success / failure lottery or the determination result of the second success / failure lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205. The effect contents to be output to the decoration lamp 111 and the like are determined. The effect determination means 303 determines the effect content according to the setting value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205. The prefetch effect determining means 374 determines the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, etc., according to the result of the preliminary determination transmitted from the command communication means 205. . The normal effect deciding means 373 is determined by the first fluctuation pattern deciding means 231 or the second fluctuation pattern deciding means 232, and is selected from a plurality of fluctuation effect patterns corresponding to the special pattern fluctuation pattern transmitted from the command communication means 205. One of them is selected and read out from the pattern storage unit 302. The normal effect deciding means 373 sends the read information of the variable effect pattern to the effect control means 304. The normal effect determining means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to for selecting a variable effect pattern. The normal effect determination unit 373 may determine the variable effect pattern with reference to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication unit 205, and the variable effect pattern may be determined together with the content of the pre-read effect by the pre-read effect determiner 374. The effect pattern may be determined. The pre-reading effect deciding means 374 specifies the result of the main judgment with higher accuracy based on the pre-judgment result from the command communication means 205, the past pre-judgment result held in the sub-board 300, the game state information, and the like. Based on the result, whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect from before the main determination and the content of the execution are determined. Specifically, the look-ahead effect determining means 374 determines whether the current game state is a probability variation game, and then shifts to the normal game state based on the pre-judgment result received earlier than the pre-judgment result received this time. It is determined whether or not to perform. Based on the determination result, the pass / fail result of the main determination based on the pre-determination result received this time, the variation pattern to be selected, and the like are specified, and based on the specified result, the availability of the prefetch effect, and the execution content of the prefetch effect are determined. . Note that the effect determination means 303 has many parts in which the normal effect determination means 373 and the pre-reading effect determination means 374 cooperate with each other.

  In each variation effect pattern, the variation time is determined for each pattern as a condition for ending the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a fluctuation effect pattern of the effect image having the same fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol.

  The symbol mode determining unit 301 determines the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol 61 and the arrangement thereof by the determination result of the lottery by the first lottery unit 211 or the second lottery unit 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the decoration. It is determined according to the fluctuation effect pattern of the symbol. The symbol mode determining unit 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of the stopped symbols to the effect control unit 304. The symbol mode determining means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to for determining a stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  The stop symbol of the decorative symbol 61 is formed as a combination of three symbols. For example, a case in which the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination unit 221 and the second success / failure determination unit 222 indicates a transition to the special game of the 4R jackpot or the 16R jackpot. , A specific combination such as "777" or "111" is selected. A specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as "357" is also selected when the result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, but the specific combination is not necessarily a combination of three symbols. It is not necessary. If the result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, it is a combination in which three symbols are not aligned, such as "312" or "946", and is a specific combination selected at the time of 2R big hit or small hit. An unsuitable combination is selected. If the result of determination is not a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot, and if a variation pattern indicating a detachment with reach is selected, only one combination such as "191" or "727" is not available. Select

  In the decorative effect change effect pattern, a change display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, an effect process from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change is defined. In the fluctuation effect pattern, the pattern when displaying the normal off symbol, the pattern when displaying the off symbol through the reach state that becomes a big hit if one more symbol is aligned, and the big hit symbol through the reach state are displayed When the pattern is included. In particular, patterns in the reach state include patterns having various long and short fluctuation times. In each variation effect pattern, the variation time is determined for each pattern as a condition for ending the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern of a decorative symbol having the same variation time as the special symbol according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

  In the time saving state, when the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 is a pattern for time saving, the effect determination means 303 sets the variation in which the effect content for time saving is determined. Select a production pattern. The effect content for the time saving is an effect in which a background image or a sound is output which gives an impression that the player is in an advantageous state due to the time saving or the probable change.

  The notice effect pattern is an effect pattern for temporarily displaying an image, animation, video, or the like of a specific character or motif on the screen, an effect pattern for operating an accessory, or an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound. The effect based on the notice effect pattern is executed in parallel with the symbol change, and it is suggested in advance that the symbol change has a high degree of expectation to stop in the big hit mode. For example, there are a normal announcement effect in which only one character image is displayed on the screen, and a group announcement effect in which a large number of characters are displayed so as to pass from one end to the other end of the screen. In addition, there is further included a step-up notice effect in which the display process of the notice effect is divided into a plurality of steps, the number of steps to be displayed is made variable, and the greater the number of steps, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes.

  The announcement effect pattern includes a pattern in which an effect is executed at a timing after the display mode of the decorative symbol 61 is in the reach state and a final stop status of the symbol is announced (post-reach announcement), and the decorative symbol 61. There is a pattern (a pre-reach notice) that simultaneously gives notice that the effect is executed and the reach state is reached at the timing when the stop is not performed.

  The effect determination means 303 should determine whether or not to display an announcement effect on the effect display device 60 in accordance with the result of the determination of the success or failure lottery or the result of the advance determination by a predetermined announcement lottery, set the advance effect, and display the effect. Determine the announcement production pattern. The effect deciding means 303 holds a notice determination table to be referred to for determining whether or not to display the notice effect, and a notice type table to be referred to when selecting the type of the notice effect pattern. The notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to according to the judgment result of the success / failure lottery or the result of the preliminary judgment, and the notice effect is displayed with a higher probability in the case of the success / failure lottery than in the case of the loss. In this manner, the correspondence between the determination result of the success / failure lottery and whether to display the notice effect is determined. Thus, the display of the notice effect itself can indicate a high degree of expectation to the big hit.

  The effect control unit 304 causes the effect display device 60 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern 61 in accordance with the selected variable effect pattern data. The effect control unit 304 sets the reception of the change start command of the decorative symbol 61 as a start condition of the change display of the new decorative symbol. The effect control means 304 displays the notice effect according to the selected notice effect pattern on the effect display device 60 in a form to be superimposed on the effect of the symbol variation when the effect decision means 303 determines that the notice effect is to be displayed. Let it.

  The effect control unit 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / rejecting lottery when the winning / rejecting lottery value of the second winning / rejecting lottery is stored, and determines whether the winning / rejecting lottery value of the first winning / rejecting lottery is stored. Regardless of whether or not the symbol is changed, the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / losing lottery is started. Thereby, when the lottery value is reserved for both the first winning / rejecting lottery and the second winning / rejecting lottery, the lottery value held in the second winning / rejecting lottery is read out preferentially, and the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. . In such a case, the lottery value held in the first success / failure lottery is not read out until the number of suspensions in the second success / failure lottery becomes zero, and the decoration symbol does not change. In this way, the effect control unit 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display a symbol change effect including the change display of the decorative symbol 61.

  The effect control means 304 further controls the turning on and off of the decoration lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66. The effect control unit 304 includes an effect display control unit 305, a voice control unit 306, and a lamp control unit 309. The effect display control means 305 controls display on the effect display device 60, and the sound control means 306 controls sound output from the speaker 108. The lamp control unit 309 controls turning on and off of the decoration lamp 111.

  During the change of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, it is necessary to display an image indicating that the symbol is changing on the effect display device 60. Normally, the decorative pattern 61 of the normal size having a certain size is displayed in a variable manner. May be displayed. In this case, the player is informed that the symbol is being changed by changing and displaying the alternative symbol which is a decorative symbol of a size smaller than the normal size decorative symbol. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative symbol, it means a normal-sized decorative symbol. However, when distinguished from an alternative symbol, the normal-sized decorative symbol is also referred to as a “normal decorative symbol” or a “main decorative symbol”.

  The substitute symbol is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative symbol is hindered, for example, while the normal decorative symbol is hidden. The substitute design is a form of a decoration design for stagingly suggesting the result of the pass / fail determination, and has a display form that is simplified (in other words, simplified, simplified) than the normal decoration design. It is displayed in a more simplified variation process. The substitute symbol has a display form on the appearance corresponding to a portion indicating the pattern type of the normal decorative pattern, and has, for example, a display form indicating numbers, characters, and symbols indicating the pattern type. Further, the substitute symbol is normally displayed in a variable manner in an area narrower than the area in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is displayed fluctuating. The substitute symbol is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative symbol, but has a display form in which at least the symbol type can be visually identified. The substitute symbol may be a reduced version of the normal decorative symbol, or may be the same as the normal decorative symbol except for the size.

  The plurality of alternative symbols displayed in place of the plurality of normal decorative symbols indicate a high degree of expectation that the result of the winning / rejecting lottery will be in a state advantageous to the player depending on the combination of the stop modes at the end of the change. For example, a plurality of alternative symbols indicate that the symbol type of the three alternative symbols is in the reach state, indicating that the jackpot in the variation is highly expected. Also, the left and right symbols in the reach state may be a specific type of symbol indicating that the degree of expectation such as "3" or "7" is relatively high, or the degree of expectation such as "1" or "2" A pattern that indicates a relatively low level may indicate the degree of expectation of the reach state. In addition, the alternative symbol does not become a definite stop state in appearance, but becomes a temporary stop state in which a slight swing is maintained. After the temporary stop of the alternative symbol, a normal decorative symbol may be displayed instead of the alternative symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in a fixed stop state. Further, instead of displaying the normal decorative symbol and the substitute symbol exclusively, the display period may overlap. Furthermore, at the time of a predetermined effect in which the visibility of the normal decorative symbol is impaired, the display of the fluctuation of the normal decorative symbol may be continued and the change of the alternative symbol may be displayed. Unlike the alternative symbol, the special symbol is changing in the predetermined area of the effect display device 60 during the change of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 with an image that is equal to or smaller than the alternative symbol. A simple symbol indicating that there is may be variably displayed. The simple symbol may be composed of a variable display of three symbol combinations as in the case of a normal decorative symbol, may be composed of a variable display of one symbol, or may be a simple symbol (such as “O” or “X”). May be sequentially switched. The simple symbol does not have any relation to the normal symbol and the alternative symbol's variable display mode, and displays a constant variation from the start of the special symbol's variation until the end of the variation. May be displayed. The simple symbol may be any type as long as the minimum symbol indicating that the special symbol is being displayed and the result of the special symbol is displayed at least, and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the simple design may be called a “sub-decorative design”, a “sub-decorative design”, a “mini-decorative design”, a “mini-design”, or the like. In addition to the effect display device 60, a variation display of a decorative symbol called a fourth symbol may be used, which indicates a display equivalent to a simple symbol by a light emitting mode such as an LED. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during the change of the special symbol, result display) in the case where a failure occurs in the effect display device 60 or the like. As an example of the display mode of the fourth symbol, the LEDs are sequentially turned on in a sequence of “white”, “blue”, “green”, “yellow”, “orange”, and “red” (alternatively, blinking including turning off). In this case, the display may be changed, or the display may be changed by blinking in a single color according to the type of the special symbol to indicate the change, and the color of light emission when the stop display is performed may indicate the type of deviation or big hit.

  The timing unit 307 is a timing circuit that outputs time information used for a game. The timer 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from when the power is turned on by a counter and outputs the time as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit that has a built-in battery and can continue measuring the date and time with the battery even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off or during a power failure may be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there may be a slight difference in the time of each game console due to individual differences and time lag, whereas in the case of a timer circuit, the time difference between multiple game consoles as long as the power is turned on at the same time Is unlikely to occur.

  The effect deciding means 303 executes a synchronized effect which starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the fact that the time information output by the timing means 307 indicates a predetermined time. The synchronizing effect is an effect that is displayed on the effect display device 60 during a synchronizing effect period that is a period that is substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the symbol fluctuation and the gaming state. The tuning effect period extends over several minutes, and its length is longer than one symbol change period, and may include a plurality of symbol change periods. The effect pattern of the synchronized effect is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and reproduction of a predetermined music and video is defined in the effect pattern. A plurality of types of effect patterns for the synchronized effect are prepared, and different types of effect patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as month, date, day of the week, and time.

  Synchronized production is performed regardless of whether the game is being played normally or in a special game. Here, “during normal game” includes displaying a so-called standby demonstration screen. That is, in the "during normal game", (1) the "variable displayed normal game" in which the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and (2) the "variable stopped normal game in which the symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner and the standby demonstration screen is not being displayed. And (3) "Normal game during standby demo screen display" in which the standby demo screen is being displayed instead of displaying the symbols in a fluctuating manner. The synchronizing effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3). However, in the cases (2) and (3), the output mode for controlling the volume reduction and the luminance reduction in the synchronizing effect is (1). It may be different from the time. In addition, during the display of the standby demonstration screen, information on the mobile cooperative system described later can be input by the operation of the effect button 109 and the cross key 110 by the player. When the operation input is performed, the output of the image and sound of the synchronized effect is performed. It is suppressed, and the screen display such as the effect customization by the mobile cooperation system is prioritized.

  The synchronizing effect is, for example, an effect in which a performance of a predetermined music or a video is reproduced at a predetermined time (referred to as a “tuning effect start time”). The time that triggers the reproduction of the synchronized performance may be a time that arrives at a predetermined time interval from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or may be a time of every hour or half an hour on the basis of the standard time. It may be. Alternatively, a time that may differ depending on a date or a day of the week may be set, and the interval is not fixed at "every hour", but is different at first at one hour, then at three hours, and so on. The interval may be different depending on the date or the day of the week. The setting may be a variable setting in which the time can be specified by the game store clerk for each game store. However, it is set in advance so that the same tuning effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of the same models installed in the same game arcade. For example, in the case of a specification that is triggered by a time at which a predetermined time interval is reached after the power is turned on, a plurality of game machines are turned on at the same time in a game arcade. As a result, at the predetermined time, the same synchronizing effect is simultaneously executed on the plurality of gaming machines. As a result, the effects are displayed simultaneously as if they were synchronized by multiple units, and the same music and video are played at the same time, so that live performances and movies are shown on the spot, and there is a synergistic effect. A directing effect can be obtained.

  The function of synchronizing production is similarly built in another game console of the same model, and a plurality of game consoles on the same game island are simultaneously powered on by a game clerk every day. Then, the plurality of gaming machines that are powered on at the same time all reach the synchronized production start time almost simultaneously, and the synchronized production can be executed simultaneously and simultaneously. This is called a multi-unit synchronized production. In this case, not only the display of images is synchronized with multiple units, but also the output of sound effects and background music is also synchronized with multiple units, and the synergistic effect by executing the effect all together as the number of synchronized units increases Increase.

  The effect setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes a history of game results and a history of effect results. The history of game results is a game result such as the number of hit balls, the number of prize balls, the number of big hits, the number of probable changes, and the number of time savings, which results in a ball being obtained by the player as a result of the game. The production result history is different from the gaming profit, and it is recorded in order to obtain the benefit of giving the right to change the content and type of the production and the right to make it easier to produce a specific type of production. Is the information such as the score. For example, in order to score the number of appearances of a predetermined effect or the result of a mini game and give the score to a player, encoded information indicating the score and the game history, for example, a two-dimensional code is displayed on the screen. When the player reads and decodes the two-dimensional code with the camera of his or her own portable terminal, the score and the game history information obtained by the decoding are accumulated in the portable terminal of the player. A cooperative system between the gaming machine and the player's portable terminal via the two-dimensional code will be described later. Note that the score here is necessary to expand the range of effect customization described later, and that the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.). As a trigger, customizable items increase.

  The effect setting means 308 stores a setting for selecting any of a plurality of types of effect content options as effect customization based on the player's selection instruction and the game history. For example, as an effect pattern to be displayed during a special game, a plurality of types of effect patterns with different motifs, characters, and songs to be displayed are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is allowed to select which effect is to be displayed. It shall be. Alternatively, a plurality of types of motifs or patterns of characters are prepared in the pattern storage means 302 as designs of the patterns included in the decorative patterns to be changed, and the player is to select which of the patterns is to be displayed. In these cases, when the operation of the effect button 109 or the cross key 110 by the player is received while the standby demonstration screen is displayed, and the effect pattern is selected through the operation, the effect setting means 308 displays the selected contents. Remember. The effect deciding means 303 selects the type of the effect pattern in the special game according to the setting stored by the effect setting means 308.

  The sub-initial processing execution means 360 executes a control start processing of the sub-board 300 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off. The sub power interruption processing execution means 362 executes an abnormal response processing such as a power interruption processing in the sub board 300 when a power abnormality such as a power interruption occurs. The sub-error detection unit 364 performs an abnormality detection process on the sub-board 300. When the sub error detection unit 364 detects the power interruption, the sub power interruption processing execution unit 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as the power interruption processing.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically illustrating the outline of the mobile cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperative system, a player registers a user by setting an account and a password in a game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site on the mobile terminal 354 in advance. At the start of the game, when the production button 109 is pressed by the player, the production display control means 305 causes the screen of the production display device 60 to display a two-dimensional code 350 encoding the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, This is read by the camera of the portable terminal by the player, and the dedicated site of the game history server 358 is accessed. Character information (also referred to as “password information”) obtained by encoding the player's identification information and effect score history is transmitted from the dedicated site to the portable terminal and displayed on the screen of the portable terminal. The effect display control means 305 causes the effect display control means 305 to display the input screen of the password information, and allows the player to input the password information via a button operation of the cross key 110 or the like. The effect setting means 308 decodes the input password information and registers it as player identification information and effect score history, so that the game content and effect score status of the player up to the previous time can be taken over. The input of the password information is an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start effect customization for selecting various effect elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, with the progress of the game and the effect, the effect setting means 308 adds the score given to the player as an effect in the effect as needed, accumulates the effect as a score of the effect, and Can perform effect customization at any time, and select and set favorite elements as various effect elements. The scoring in the effect is basically added for each symbol change, and a higher score is given to a type of effect having a higher degree of expectation of shifting to the special game, and a higher score is also given when shifting to the special game.

  As the effect customization, the player uses a part of the points obtained cumulatively, and according to the number of points used, the color, background, shape, character, Production elements such as music can be changed to a desired type. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change an effect element via a button operation by a player, and changes various effect elements according to the instruction. For the effect element that can be customized, a plurality of types of items are prepared for each element, and different values are set as the required number of points for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches the predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance to increase the number of customizable items is given. When the player performs a button operation as an instruction to end the game or the effect customization, the effect setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as special effects in the effect and effect score history, and displays the two-dimensional code 350 in the effect display control. Means 305 displays on effect display device 60. The player can read the two-dimensional code 350 with a camera of his or her own portable terminal, decode the read two-dimensional code 352, acquire information, and store the information in the portable terminal 354. The information is transmitted from the portable terminal 354 to the game history server 358 having the dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. As described above, information such as special effects in the production and production score history is transmitted to the portable terminal 354 via the transmission means of displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350 and managed by the game history server 358. The next game can take over the contents of the game and the production. In addition, by continuing the game for a long time, the score can be obtained as much as the number of symbol changes and the number of effects increase.

  FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing a hardware configuration of main board 200 and sub-board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291, and a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling the entire game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). The incoming signal from each entrance and the payout signal from the payout control board 155 are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as the winning opening solenoids and the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 by various driving circuits (not shown). Further, a command necessary for effect control is transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as the result of the winning / rejection lottery, the result of determining the symbol, and the result of determining the variation pattern. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 by one-way communication.

  The command data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte configuration by combining 1-byte command type data called so-called MODE data and 1-byte command content data called so-called EVENT data. The main board 200 can transmit one command by associating the command type data and the command content data with each other and transmitting the command content data to the sub-board 300. The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the type of the instruction, and a unique type code is assigned in advance at the development stage for each instruction type. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of the instruction type data and the instruction content data is an identification bit indicating which of the instruction type data and the instruction content data. When the most significant bit is 1, it indicates the instruction type data. When the bit is 0, it indicates instruction content data.

  Since the communication from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 transmits one byte of data for one data transmission, two transmissions of one byte are required for transmitting two bytes of instruction data. . MODE data as the upper byte is transmitted in the first communication, and EVENT data as the lower byte is transmitted in the second communication. In consideration of the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise or the like, the main board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the same data is read by the sub-board 300 two consecutive times, the completion of transmission / reception of the data is determined. . The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until two consecutive readings are performed, and transmits the same data up to five times.

  The sub board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub CPU 310, a sub RAM 311, a sub ROM 312, and an effect control device 313. The sub-ROM 312 is one of data storage units that hold a sub-control program including effect pattern data in which an effect process is defined, display pattern data in which an effect display process is defined, and the like. The sub control program including the effect pattern data, the display pattern data, and the voice pattern data is read from the sub ROM 312 into the sub RAM 311, and the effect control by the sub control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). Signals from an external device such as the effect button 109 are acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives and outputs external devices such as the effect display device 60, the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the movable role 66 by the effect control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data. , Sound output, lamp lighting, and control of the effect by the accessory operation. The sub CPU 310 transmits the display pattern data and the voice pattern data to the effect control device 313. In the base technology, an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the effect control device 313 will be described. However, the sub-board 300 and the effect control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a substrate, and are separately connected to each other. Alternatively, it may be formed as a separate substrate.

  FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically illustrating a hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. The effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and a voice control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and sound data used for sound output in a data compressed state. The effect image data is an image used for variable display and effect display as an effect object indicating a determination result of the success / failure lottery and the like. This is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data in which a motion when a motion effect is added to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing is defined. The audio data is audio data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and character lines output during the performance.

  Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data specified in the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the effect display using the effect image data and motion data is performed. Is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, a command related to effect display, effect image data, and motion data are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and display control is performed by the display control circuit 326. Similarly, a command relating to audio output and audio data are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the audio control circuit 314, and audio output control is performed by the audio control circuit 314.

  The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each of which is connected via a bus 330. The bus 330 in the figure comprehensively shows a bus such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus for convenience.

  The effect image data and the motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and the compressed data among the data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is used as a work area when rendering image data and motion data is decoded by the decoder 332, and is used as a work area when performing drawing processing and image processing by the drawing circuit 336. ).

  The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image, and uses the generated display image as a frame of a moving image as a frame buffer. 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing a frame of a moving image to be output to the effect display device 60.

  The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the order of storage in the form of video signals. The frame buffer 338 has, for example, a memory area for two frames, and while the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image, The data is stored in the memory area for another frame.

  The data ROM 324 holds “detailed display pattern data” in which a display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 is defined. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be referred to as “schematic display pattern data” that defines the outline of the effect display process. For example, the rough display pattern data defines a rough flow of a series of effect display processes, such as the start and stop timings of changing the decoration symbol, the order in which a plurality of moving images are played, and the timings of starting and stopping playback. . On the other hand, detailed display pattern data includes detailed display control such as the display order of sprite images for realizing the variable display of decorative symbols and the display processing order in frame units for displaying moving images based on motion data. The process is defined.

  When performing a display control based on the “schematic display pattern data” sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect control device 313 reads “detailed display pattern data” necessary for the processing from the data ROM 324 and uses both display pattern data. To perform display processing. Therefore, it can be said that the effect control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display pattern data including the “schematic display pattern data” and the “detailed display pattern data”. Therefore, in the present specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the “schematic display pattern data” stored in the sub-ROM 312 and the “detailed display pattern data” stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished from each other, but simply “display pattern data”. " For example, when the effect control means performs a specific process based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, the display pattern data includes "schematic display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". . In the modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into the “schematic display pattern data” and the “detailed display pattern data”, and even if the display pattern data serving as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324. Good.

  In the base technology, the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313 includes a configuration including a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In a modified example, the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, the data ROM 324, and the display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the effect control device 313 may execute processing assumed to be executed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also function as the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. In addition, the effect control device 313 may have a hardware configuration in which the display control circuit 326 is not included. In this case, the processing executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. May be done.

  In the base technology, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 includes a configuration in which an effect control device 313 is included in addition to the sub-CPU 310, the sub-RAM 311 and the sub-ROM 312. In a modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312, and the effect control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. The processing executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub RAM 311 may also function as the control RAM 322, or the sub ROM 312 may also function as the data ROM 324. In addition, a hardware configuration in which the effect control device 313 is not included in the sub-board 300 may be employed. You may.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the main board 200 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the main initial process executing means 280, but hereinafter, the description will be made assuming that the main CPU 290 functions as the main initial process executing means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial settings relating to hardware such as setting of internal registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

  The main CPU 290 checks the operation state of the setting key, and if the setting key is ON (Y in S105), checks the operation state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S122), a setting change process is executed (S124). On the other hand, if the RAM clear is OFF (N in S122), a setting confirmation process is executed (S126). If the setting key is in the OFF state in S105 (N in S105), the processing of S122 to S126 is skipped.

  Subsequently, power-off recovery processing or initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed in accordance with the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power-off information flag, and the state of data stored in the main RAM 291. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power-off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the processing at the time of power-off recovery is executed. I do. In other cases, that is, when the RAM clear switch is turned on or when the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power-off information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, an initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed.

  The main CPU 290 confirms the operation state of the RAM clear switch, and if the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the RAM clear switch has not been turned on (N in S106), the main CPU 290 checks the value of the power-off information flag (S108). If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data (N in S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (Y in S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is checked (S110). As will be described later, if the processing has been completed normally at the time of the previous power-off, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291. The data in the main RAM 291 is inspected. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), the data in the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), a process for returning to the state before the power was turned off is executed (S114).

  In the power-off recovery process (S114), power-on normal data indicating that power-on was performed normally is stored in the power-off information flag, and initialization of various errors and communication with the payout control board 155 are executed. I do. Subsequently, the command request for the untransmitted state before the power is turned off is cleared, and the command transmission of various information indicating the game state is requested. Subsequently, an effect command corresponding to the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open / closed state of the second starting port 12 and the special winning port 20 is returned to the state before the power was turned off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the special symbol probability varying function is executed.

  In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared to 0, and the initialization of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed. In the initialization process of S116, the setting value stored in the setting memory of the setting changing device 170 is not cleared, and the setting value set in the setting changing process of S124 is retained.

  When the power-off recovery process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) ends, a count value is set to start an interrupt process described later, and the operation of the interrupt timer is started (S118). Thereby, thereafter, a timer interrupt is generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds), and an interrupt process described later is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes a main process for managing the gaming machine (S120).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting is to be stored is checked. If the setting memory value is not normal (N in S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When "1" to "6" are used as set value data, "1" is set as an initial value, and when "0" to "5" is used as set value data, "0" is set as an initial value. If the set memory value is normal (Y in S132), the process in S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the state is shifted to the setting change state (S136), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display section 173 (S138). If there is a change operation by the setting change button 172 (Y in S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is updated and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N of S140), the process of S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N of S144), the processing of S138 to S142 is repeated. If the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off and turned off (Y in S144), the setting display unit 173 is hidden so that the set values cannot be visually recognized (S146), and the process returns.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing in S126 in FIG. 15 in detail. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting is to be stored is confirmed. If the setting memory value is not normal (N in S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S152), the process of S154 is skipped. The state shifts to the setting confirmation state (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value, and if the setting key is turned OFF (Y in S160), the setting display unit 173 is hidden. To make the set value invisible (S162), and the routine returns.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the details of the main process of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 once prohibits the timer interruption (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors the power interruption (S204). When the power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) detects a decrease in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158, the power supply interruption storage signal is executed by inputting an unconditional interrupt request signal to the main CPU 290 from the power supply voltage monitoring circuit. In the processing, the power-off confirmation data is stored in the power-off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and if the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y in S206), executes the process for power-off. To S212. If the value of the power-off confirmation flag does not match the power-off confirmation data (N of S206), the initial value random number per symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the software initial value random number per special symbol are updated. An initial value random number updating process is executed (S208), a timer interrupt is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. Thereafter, S200 to S210 are repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is prohibited (S202 to S208), an interrupt process described later is executed after the timer interrupt is permitted in S210.

  When power interruption is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and checks the contents of the power interruption information flag (S214). If the contents of the power-off information flag do not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is not normally stored, and the power-off abnormal data is stored in the power-off information flag. Then (S216), the process proceeds to S222. If the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is stored normally, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, at the next power-on, to check the backed up data in the main RAM 291, a checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Subsequently, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and the process loops until the power is turned off. The processing at the time of power-off is executed by the main power-off processing execution means 282 realized by the main CPU 290.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main processing (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt processing. First, an interrupt operation condition is set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Subsequently, in order to manage the gaming machine, input processing (S304), various random number updating processing (S306), initial value updating type random number updating processing (S308), initial value random number updating processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312) Second starting opening effective period setting process (S314), winning monitoring process (S316), winning ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol change start Monitoring process (S324), starting opening monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric auditors control process (S330), special winning opening effective period setting process (S332), special symbol change start monitoring control Processing (S334), abnormality detection processing (S336), incoming ball passage time abnormality detection processing (S338), game state display processing (S340), handle state signal Inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), emission control signal output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), production control command transmission processing (S352), external information output processing (S354) is sequentially executed, the next timer interrupt is permitted (S356), and the process returns.

  In the input process (S304), the data of the switches attached to the game board, the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the door / frame open signal, the magnetic detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the touch state signal input port data are monitored. , And creates data indicating the input state and stores it in the main RAM 291. The data indicating the input state includes level data (input port data at the time of the current interrupt), rising data or falling data (input port data at the time of the current interrupt and data at the time of the previous interrupt). This is data indicating a switch that has been switched by comparing the data of the input ports with exclusive OR.

  In the various random number updating process (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the value is smaller than the predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored, and if the value is equal to or larger than the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. In addition, the variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the result of subtracting the predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, the subtraction result is stored, and if it is less than 0, the predetermined maximum value is stored. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs.

  In the initial value update type random number update processing (S308), the normal random number per symbol, the special random number per design, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The value, maximum value, and initial value of each random number are read from the main RAM 291, and the value of the random number is incremented. If the increment result exceeds the maximum value, the value of the random number is set to 0. When the incremented result matches the initial value, the random number of the initial value is read from the main RAM 291 to update the initial value. As a result, the random number per symbol, the symbol number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs, and when the value of the random number returns to the initial value, that is, the random number is cycled. Then, a new random number is generated by resetting the initial value.

  In the initial value random number update processing (S310), the initial value random number per symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. An initial random number is read from the initial random number update table of the main RAM 291, and the value of the initial random number is incremented. If the increment result exceeds the upper limit, the value of the initial random number is set to 0. Similar processing is executed in the initial value random number updating processing (S208) in the main processing (S120).

  In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of various control timers are read from the main RAM 291 in accordance with the respective tables, and when the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the value of the timer is 0, the timer is not updated.

  In the second starting port valid period setting process (S314), the valid period of the second starting port 12 is set. An ordinary electric accessory 90 is disposed in the second starting port 12 as a prerequisite technology, and an effective period during which a payout of a prize ball and a lottery relating to a second special symbol are executed by entering a game ball, An invalid period in which the payout of the prize balls and the lottery relating to the second special symbol are not executed even if the game balls enter the game is set. As described later, in the start-up opening monitoring control process (S326), the monitoring process of the second start-up winning is not executed during the invalid period of the second start-up opening 12, so that a game ball enters the second start-up opening 12. However, the payout of the prize balls and the lottery relating to the second special symbol are not executed. The same applies to the case where the valid period and the invalid period are set for the first starting port 11, the big winning port 20, the first operating port 31, the second operating port 32, the general winning port 33, and the like. When the state of the ordinary symbol is "ordinary electric accessory is operating", data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the effective period is stored in the second opening valid period flag. If the state of the ordinary symbol is not "ordinary electrically-driven accessory in operation", the second start of timing the valid period for detecting a remaining ball inside the ordinary electrically-driven accessory 90 that has entered the ball immediately before the end of the operation of the ordinary electrically-driven accessory. If the value of the mouth opening extension timer is not 0, data indicating that the second opening 12 is in the effective period is stored in the second opening opening period flag, and the value of the second opening opening effective timer is 0. If so, data indicating that the second starting port is in an invalid period is stored in the second starting port valid period flag. As a modified example, the ordinary electric accessory 90 may be provided at a winning opening other than the second starting opening 12, and in this case, a second starting opening effective period setting process is performed for the target winning opening. It is configured to have a validity period setting process which is the same process.

  In the prize monitoring process (S316), the game ball is inspected for passing through the switch, and when the game ball passes through the switch, if the switch has no invalid period or is currently in the valid period and the prize ball is paid out. If there is, the winning counter is updated. Further, it requests creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and transmission of a command.

  In the prize ball control processing (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, a command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of data received from the payout control board 155 are performed. Are executed in order.

  In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the game ball through the first operation port 31 and the second operation port 32 is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. At this time, if the number of reserved ordinary symbol fluctuations is less than the upper limit value of 4, the number of retained ordinary symbols is updated, and a random number related to the ordinary symbol is stored in the main RAM 291.

  In the ordinary symbol control processing (S322), the state of the ordinary symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the ordinary symbol is being controlled, the processing related to the ordinary symbol display unit 45 or the ordinary electric accessory 90 is executed. When the state of the ordinary symbol is "ordinary symbol changing", the normal symbol changing process is executed, and when it is "ordinary symbol stopped symbol is being displayed", the ordinary symbol stopped symbol displaying process is executed, and the "ordinary motorized" is executed. If it is "during the operation of the accessory," the normal electric accessory in-operation process is executed, and if it is "during the demonstration of the end of the operation of the ordinary electric accessory," the process of the end of the ordinary electric accessory operation is executed. In the normal symbol change processing, after changing the normal symbol, the change time is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol change time has ended, the normal symbol change stop setting is performed, and the state of the normal symbol is changed to `` normal '' It is set to "Symbol stop symbol is being displayed." In the normal symbol stop symbol display processing, the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol has ended, the operation end setting of the normal symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a hit, set the state of the normal symbol to "Normal electric auditorium is operating", save the operation state of the normal electric auditorium opening extension function at the start of normal electric auditorium actuation, and start the normal electric auditorium actuation The operation setting of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operation state of the ordinary electric accessory opening extension function at the time is executed. In the case of a loss, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol change standby". In the processing during the operation of the ordinary electric auditorium, when the winning of the winning opening relating to the ordinary electric auditorium 90 of the game ball is monitored and it is determined that the winning number of the winning opening relating to the ordinary electric auditorium 90 has reached the maximum winning number. Executes the setting for terminating the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the setting of the second starting port effective extension time. If it is determined that the winning number of the winning opening related to the normal electric auditorium 90 has not reached the maximum winning number, the opening / closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric auditorium 90 is monitored, and the ordinary electric auditors 90 is monitored. The opening / closing of the entrance of the winning port according to the above is performed, and when it is determined that the opening of the series of entrances of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is completed, the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the second start port are enabled. Execute the extension time setting. If it is determined that the opening / closing time of the entrance of the winning opening relating to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not ended, the setting of opening / closing of the entrance of the winning opening relating to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not executed. During the normal electric auditors operation end demonstration processing, the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric auditors 90 is monitored, and when it is determined that the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric auditors 90 ends, the state of the ordinary symbol is changed to "ordinary symbols". Waiting for change ".

  In the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324), the status of the ordinary symbol is monitored, and if "normal symbol variation waiting" and the value of the number of ordinary symbol operation reserved balls is other than 0, the variation of the ordinary symbol is monitored. Is determined to be started. When it is determined that the variation of the ordinary symbol is to be started, the number of the ordinary symbol operation reserved balls is decremented, and the hit determination, the determination of the stop symbol, the setting of the variation pattern number of the ordinary symbol, and the setting of the variation time of the ordinary symbol are executed. . After that, the state of the ordinary symbol is set to “normal symbol is changing”, and the area of the main RAM 291 used for setting the ordinary symbol, determining the hit, and determining the variation pattern is cleared.

  In the starting port monitoring control process (S326), the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 of the game ball are monitored. If the winning of a game ball is confirmed when the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol is less than 4, a value obtained by acquiring a built-in random number and adding a value of a soft random number per special symbol to the acquired built-in random number, It is stored in the buffer as a random number per special symbol used in the big hit determination. Further, a symbol random number and a variation pattern random number are acquired and stored as random numbers related to the special symbol. In the case where the holding of the second special symbol is performed prior to the holding of the first special symbol, only the updating of the holding related to the winning is executed. However, if the finishing order of the holding of the special symbol is the winning order, In addition to the update of the hold related to the prize, the update of the total number of hold and storage of the winning order are executed. Next, in order to request an announcement effect command corresponding to the random number stored at the time of starting opening winning, the state of the gaming machine is checked, and when it is determined that the command transmission period is reached, a hit announcement effect request, a hit symbol announcement effect request, a pattern announcement. The production requests are executed in order. Here, (1) in the case where the big hit game is not executed and the random number relating to the first special symbol is stored in a situation where the ball is not easily entered, (2) the big hit game is not executed, and When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored in the situation where the ball is easy to enter the ball, (3) When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored during the big hit or the small hit, or Then, it is determined that it is the command transmission period. Subsequently, an effect command corresponding to the number of operation-reserved balls of the special symbol is requested. Thus, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of operation-reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated. As described above, in the pre-reading, the pre-judgment information (pre-authorization judgment information, pre-symbol judgment information, pre-pattern judgment information), the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are set to 1 4) are transmitted to the sub-board 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-determination process. However, in another example, when there is a ball in the starting port, the transmission is performed uniformly and the pre-reading is possible. The sub CPU 310 may make various status determinations such as whether or not a period is present. Subsequently, the value of the second starting port valid period flag is inspected. If the value of the second starting port valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is valid, the first starting port prize is awarded. As in the case, the monitoring processing of the second starting opening winning is executed. If the value of the second opening valid period flag is data indicating that the second opening 12 is in an invalid period, the monitoring process of the second opening winning is not executed. When the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of the reserved balls is 0, the number of the reserved balls is temporarily changed from 0 to 1 here, and a control process related to the start of the variation described later is executed. .

  In the special symbol control process (S328), the hit waiting state is inspected, and when the special electric accessory is operating, that is, during the big hit or the small hit, the special symbol control process ends. When the special electric accessory is not operated, the state of the special symbol is inspected. If "special symbol change waiting", the special symbol control general-purpose processing is ended. A start process is executed, and if "special symbol is changing", a special symbol changing process is executed. If "special symbol stopped symbol is being displayed", a special symbol stopped symbol displaying process is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is obtained based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the variation is displayed on the sub-board 300 to start the effect display. Requests the command for additional symbol information, variation pattern, and character information, sets the special symbol status to "special symbol variation", and clears the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern with 0. . In the special symbol change processing, after changing the special symbol, the change time is monitored, and if it is determined that the change time of the special symbol has ended, the change stop setting of the special symbol is performed, and the state of the special symbol is changed to "special". It is set to "Symbol stop symbol is being displayed." In the special symbol stop symbol display processing, the stop symbol display time of the special symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the special symbol has ended, the operation end setting of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a big hit, in order to end the operation of the special symbol, set the state of the special symbol to "special symbol change standby", set the number of times the special electric accessory will operate continuously, and set the probability of the special symbol Prevent the fluctuation function, special symbol fluctuation time reduction function, normal symbol probability fluctuation function, normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function, and normal electric character opening opening extension function, and prepare the state of the gaming machine to open the special winning opening Set the start start demonstration display time, the command request of the hit start demonstration effect, and the command request of the launch position designation effect (command request to execute the effect indicating the recommended launch position such as "right-handed") Execute If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the operation of the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function and the normal symbol probability fluctuation function is determined to be completed, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated, a game state command is requested, and the special symbol is requested. In order to terminate the operation of the special symbol, set the special symbol state to "special symbol change standby", set the gaming machine state to small hit start demonstration, set the hit start demonstration display time, A command request and a command request for a launch position designation effect are executed. When the result of the hit determination is a loss, the operation end determination of the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function and the normal symbol probability fluctuation function is performed, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated, a game state command request is made, and the special symbol In order to end the operation, the special symbol state is set to “special symbol change standby”, and a command request for a launch position designation effect is executed.

  In the special electric accessory control process (S330), to execute the process related to the special electric accessory, the operating condition of the condition device and the special electric accessory is checked, and the condition device is operating or the special electric accessory is operating. When it is determined that the special electric auditors special product is executed. Depending on the operation status of the special electric auditorium, the special winning combination opening preparation process, the special electric accessory opening process, the special winning opening closing process, the big hit end demonstration process, the small hit start demonstration process, the small hit special electric train The processing during operation, the processing during closing of the small hit big winning opening, and the processing during the small hit end demonstration are executed.

  In the special winning opening validity period setting process (S332), the result of the validity period determination of the special winning opening 20 is stored. If the value of the special winning opening valid time is 0, the special winning opening valid period flag is set to the special winning opening flag. The mouth invalid period data is stored, and if it is other than 0, the special winning opening valid period data is stored in the special winning opening valid period flag.

  In the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is ready to start changing. When the order of digestion of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the priority digestion of the second special symbol, (1) it is not in the middle of a big hit or a small hit, (2) the first special symbol is in a change waiting state, (3) ) When the second special symbol is waiting for change, and (4) the number of operation-reserved balls of the special symbol is other than 0, the special symbol can start to change. Is determined. When the order of digestion of the special design holding balls is the order of winning, in addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of special design holding balls is other than 0; When all of the determination matches the digestion order, that is, the winning order, it is determined that the special symbol can be started to change.

  When it is determined that the special symbol can be started to change, the number of operation-reserved balls of the special symbol is subtracted, and an effect command corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Thereby, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

  Subsequently, a special symbol hit determination is executed. In the hit determination, whether the hit is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is determined by a random number per special symbol, and the determination result is stored in a special symbol determination flag. Next, the symbols are determined. In the determination of the symbol, if the hit determination is a big hit, a big hit symbol is determined based on the symbol random number per special symbol, and if it is a small hit, a small hit symbol is determined. Is determined.

  If the result of the hit determination is a big hit, based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the hit symbol determined in the symbol determination process, determine the operation content of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol, the special symbol The game state after the end of the big hit is set, such as the operation contents of the variable time reduction function and the easy winning state of ordinary symbols. Subsequently, the setting during the big hit is executed, such as the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated and the content of the opening time of the special winning opening. Subsequently, based on the result of the hit determination and the activation state of the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting a variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the big hit. Subsequently, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are set with reference to the table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of the hit symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for hit determination and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "change start".

  If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, select the change pattern table to be referred to after the small hit is completed, set the contents of the change pattern selection state, set the start demo time and the end demo time, The area of the main RAM 291 used for the determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to “change start”. If the result of the hit determination is a miss, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "change start".

  In the abnormality detection processing (S336), the main CPU 290, which functions as the main error detection means 284, examines the magnetic detection signal, the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the door / frame open signal, and changes to the error state. If there is, an error state is stored, and a request for displaying an error state effect of the gaming machine on the sub board 300 is made. At this time, the light emission mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the storage of the error state and the display request of the error state effect are not executed.

  In the incoming ball passage time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detecting means 284 monitors the continuous on-time of each switch level to detect the incoming ball passage time abnormality, and performs the continuous on-time ( For example, when it is determined that the value of a counter that increments for each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, the setting of an incoming ball passage time abnormality, a command transmission request, and security for outputting to the external information output terminal 160 are performed. Create output requests in order. At this time, the light emission mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the incoming ball passing time abnormality. If it is determined that the continuous ON time is not abnormal, the security output request is not created.

  In the game state display process (S340), the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of operation-pending balls of a normal symbol, and the number of operation-pending balls of a special symbol are requested. Create data.

  In the steering wheel state signal inspection processing (S342), the steering wheel state is inspected in order to monitor the steering wheel touch state, and if it is determined that the steering wheel state has changed as a result of the inspection, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is decremented, and the steering wheel state is reduced. An update, a setting of a handle state monitoring timer, and a command transmission request for a handle state effect are executed. As a result of the inspection, when it is determined that the steering wheel state has not changed, the setting of the steering wheel state monitoring timer is executed. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle state monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being subtracted, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

  In the LED output process (S344), the display of the special symbol, the display of the ordinary symbol, the display of the number of operation-reserved balls of the special symbol, the display of the number of operation-reserved balls of the ordinary symbol, the display of the game state, and the special electric character are continuously performed. Initialization of display to display the number of times of actuation, display of the operating state of the special electric accessory when the accessory continuous operation device is not operating, display of distinction, display of error, display of prize ball ratio , The acquisition and output of display data are executed in order.

  In the firing control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal of prohibition / permission of launching of the game ball, communication with the payout control board 155 and setting of prohibition / permission of firing corresponding to the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, and After obtaining the prohibition / permission data of the launch, the output of the prohibition / permission signal of the launch is executed.

  In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port.

  In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the ordinary electric auditors 'solenoid 91 and the special winning opening solenoid 92, the output data of the ordinary electric auditors' solenoid 91 and the output data of the special winning opening solenoid 92 are acquired. Execute acquisition and output of output data. An operation flag and an operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and the solenoid operation timer are acquired. Subsequently, the solenoid operation timer is updated, and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

  In the effect control command transmission process (S352), the presence / absence of a request for transmission of a command to be transmitted to the sub-board 300 is examined. After clearing, MODE data acquisition corresponding to the acquired command data, MODE data output, MODE data retention, EVENT data acquisition corresponding to the acquired command data, and EVENT data output are sequentially executed.

  In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

  The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 will be described in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include a random number per normal symbol and a random number pertaining to a normal symbol as random numbers pertaining to a normal symbol, and a random number per special symbol (hard random number) as a random number pertaining to a special symbol. , There are soft random numbers per special symbol, symbol random numbers per special symbol, and variable random numbers. Also, as random numbers for giving initial values of the initial value update type random numbers, a random number per symbol, a random number per special symbol, and a soft random number per special symbol, an initial value random number per ordinary symbol, a symbol initial value per special symbol There are random numbers and soft initial value random numbers per special symbol.

  The normal random number per symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol per random number is the number of normal symbol fluctuations held when it is determined in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interruption process that the game ball has passed the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. Is less than the upper limit value of 4, it is obtained from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used for the hit determination and the determination of the stop symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324) that the variation of the ordinary symbol is started.

  The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes, for example, a value of 0 to 232, is updated in various random number update processing (S306) of the interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is reserved for the normal symbol variation when it is determined in the ordinary symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interruption process that the game ball has passed the first activation port 31 or the second activation port 32. If the number is less than the upper limit value of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used for determining the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol when it is determined in the ordinary symbol variation start monitoring process (S324) that the variation of the ordinary symbol is started.

  The random number per special symbol is obtained when the winning of a game ball is confirmed when the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start-up opening monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process. , The value of the built-in random number and the value of the soft random number per special symbol are acquired, and the values are generated by adding them, and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The random number per special symbol is used to execute a big hit determination and a small hit determination in the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

  The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored at a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. The soft random number per special symbol is determined by the main RAM 291 when the winning of a game ball is confirmed when the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326). And is used to generate a random number per special symbol as described above.

  The symbol random number per special symbol takes, for example, a value of 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value updating type random number updating process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is updated at a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Is stored. The symbol random number per special symbol is determined by the main RAM 291 when the winning of a game ball is confirmed when the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326). Of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The special symbol per symbol random number is used for determining the big hit symbol when the hit determination is a big hit in the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

  The variation pattern random number takes, for example, a value of 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processing (S306) of the interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is determined in the main RAM 291 when a winning of a game ball is confirmed when the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start-up monitoring control process (S326). It is obtained from the position and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is used to determine a special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

  The initial value random number per ordinary design, the initial value random number per design special symbol, and the initial value random number per special design are respectively in the same range as the random number per ordinary design, the symbol random number per special design, and the soft random number per special symbol. Then, it is updated in the initial value random number update processing (S208) of the main processing (S120) and the initial value random number update processing (S310) of the interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. In the initial value update type random number update processing (S308), the initial random number per symbol, the initial symbol random number per special symbol, and the random number initial soft random value per special symbol are processed in the random number updating process (S308). When updating the soft random number per symbol, it is used as an initial value of each random number.

  Since the interrupt process is executed at regular intervals by a timer interrupt, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update processes (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular intervals. You. That is, the random number per normal symbol, the random number pertaining to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, the random number per special symbol, the soft random number per special symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the fluctuation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, the main processing (S120) determines the time required for the interrupt processing from the fixed time measured by the timer until the next timer interrupt occurs after the interrupt processing is completed. Repeated for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process varies depending on the game state and the like, the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) includes various random number update processes (S306) and an initial value update type random number update process (S308). Unlike ()), it is not executed at regular intervals. Thereby, the initial value random number obtained when the initial value is set in the initial value updating type random number updating process (S308) can be made random every time.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the sub board 300 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the sub-initial-process executing means 360, but hereinafter, the description will be made assuming that the sub-CPU 310 functioning as the sub-initial-process executing means 360 executes. When the control of the sub board 300 is started, the sub CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and performs register setting and port initialization of the sub CPU 310. Initial settings relating to hardware are executed (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and placed in the sub-RAM 311. Among the various variables in the control program, an initial value is set for a variable having an initial value, and zero-clear data is set for a variable without an initial value. Thereby, the sub RAM 311 is initialized (S506). Note that the interrupt processing in the sub-board 300 is performed at the highest priority as the interrupt processing performed at the time of power-on and the reset processing when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is enabled. The next highest priority interrupt processing of priority level 7 is command processing received from the main board 200. The second highest priority interrupt processing of priority level 3 is CPU runaway detection by a watchdog timer. There is a reset process at the time. The next priority level 2 interrupt processing includes processing relating to commands transmitted to and received from the control CPU 320, and the lowest priority level 1 interrupt processing includes communication processing with the real-time clock. And various device control processes for lamps, solenoids, motors, and the like. If the interrupts related to the various processes described above occur at the same time, the interrupts with higher priority preset for each type of interrupt are executed with higher priority. It should be noted that the processing shown in this figure includes the processing at power-on, which is the highest priority interrupt, the reset processing at the time of occurrence of various abnormalities, and the reset processing at the time of CPU runaway detection, which is the priority 3 interrupt. Including.

  Interruption (priority level 7) other than the command received from the main board 200 is prohibited (S510), and various types of error information used in the model are set from all the error information stored in advance for all the models (S512). . All lamps such as the decoration lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the operation of the watchdog timer is started (S516), and the main processing is executed (S518). Normally, the process does not return to the main flow from S518, but shifts to sleep (small power consumption mode) when returning (S520).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the details of the main process of S518 in FIG. In S506 of FIG. 20, a start address for starting the check is obtained to check whether the control program arranged in the sub RAM 311 is correctly arranged in the main processing of FIG. 20 (S530). All interrupts are permitted (S532), and a device such as a motor or a solenoid is initialized (S534).

  If the setting is to use the watchdog timer, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the decorative symbol counter is updated so that the combination of the decorative symbols is random (S540), and the input port of the sub CPU 310 is set. Is monitored (S542). In addition, since S540 is a process in a method of determining a decorative symbol deviating symbol using a counter, in the case of a method of determining a decorative symbol deviating symbol using a lottery sheet incorporating all the symbol combinations that are deviating symbols. Does not execute the processing of S540. The process of determining a decorative symbol departure symbol using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is received from the main board 200 in S552 as described later. The sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub error detection means 364 monitors the error state and, when detecting various errors, notifies the error (S544) and executes a process according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546). A preliminary lottery is executed (S548). In the preview lottery in S548, in particular, a command for a preview effect to appear immediately after the start of symbol change is transmitted to the effect control device 313 as early as possible, so that the lottery process is not performed in one loop, but a plurality of times. It is divided into loops, and a preliminary announcement effect that appears immediately after the start of symbol change is selected by lot in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, etc., the operation is executed (S550), the command stored in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and immediately after the command analysis, the process proceeds to S536. Returning (Y in S554), if it is not immediately after the command analysis (N in S554), the software random number for lottery is updated as low priority processing which may be performed in the idle time (S556), and the processing returns to S536. In S552, if the command to be analyzed indicates a special symbol variation pattern, the decoration effect variation effect pattern is determined in the process of S552. If the analyzed command indicates the special symbol stop symbol, the lottery sheet is selected. If the method is used to determine a design that is out of the decorative design, a stop design of the decorative design is determined in the process of S552.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is a priority level 7 interrupt command having the second highest priority next to a reset interrupt or an error interrupt. The data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port. When the same data is read twice consecutively, the data is determined as a new command (Y in S600), and the determined command is the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y in S602), the first command is stored in the temporary storage area (S604). A hard random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606), and the process returns to the original routine. As described above, by acquiring a hard random number each time the main command is interrupted from the main board 200, the random number acquisition timing does not have periodicity, and the randomness of the value is improved. If the data read in S600 does not match twice in succession (up to five times can be read), S602 is skipped and the process returns to the original routine (N in S600).

  In S602, if the determined command is not the first command but the second command (N in S602), if it can be confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command buffer (command data) The command write pointer, which is the reading position in the ring buffer for the command, is acquired (S610), and the first command and the second command are stored in the command buffer (S612). The command data stored in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command stored in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the routine returns to the original routine. If the first command has not been received in S608, S610 and subsequent steps are skipped (N in S608), and the process returns to the original routine.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an interruption process when a timer interruption for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command related to effect display from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and occurs at a period of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y in S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). In transmitting command data to the control CPU 320, the control CPU 320 attempts to transmit a command indicating that the command has been normally received up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives the command from the control CPU 320. After the transmission, the setting of the read address of the buffer is updated (S628), and the process returns to the original routine. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N of S622), the process skips S624 and returns to the original routine.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing when sub CPU 310 receives a command from control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command received by the sub CPU 310 from the control CPU 320 is a command mainly indicating that the command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been normally received. If a command has been received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), saved in the command buffer (S634), and the routine returns to the original routine.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is an interrupt for lamp control of the decorative lamp 111 and the like, control of a solenoid and a motor for driving the movable accessory 66, and management control of various timers, and occurs at a period of 1 ms. Since the priority is the interrupt of the priority level 1 having the lowest priority, the interrupt of the priority level 2 or more is permitted (S640), and the signal indicating the input from the effect button 109, the signal indicating the error detection, and the signal indicating the power interruption. Then, input / output of a port for inputting / outputting a drive signal or the like to a device to be controlled such as a motor or a solenoid is processed (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating power interruption is input, the process immediately shifts to backup processing. A timer for updating device control data, such as a count process based on a control pattern of a device such as a motor or a solenoid, and ON / OFF control of a buffer for writing data to a port in S642 (S644), and measuring a timing of an effect. Updating (S646), updating the timer for managing the input valid time of the effect button 109 (S648), and updating the task control counter for the lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111, the runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320, and the like. Then, a 16 ms period is created (S650).

  Note that the minimum unit of the lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 is 16 ms. Since one frame of the image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and an integral multiple thereof is set as the minimum unit of the lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111, the lamp control and the image display control can be easily synchronized. Also, when counting a relatively long time period such as an error notification for 30 seconds, for example, if the count of one interrupt (1 ms) period is used, the count value becomes longer than necessary. The count value can be shortened by using the cycle count value.

  The task control includes 16 types of tasks 0 to 15, one of which is switching control of the decoration lamp 111 and two of which are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 is executed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter, thereby realizing switching at a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processing 0 and processing 8, and monitors the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 when the count value of the task control counter is 0 and 8, ie, once every 8 interrupts (S652). By doing so, monitoring at a period of 8 ms is realized.

  The control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that is turned on and off every frame. If the toggle signal does not change and remains the same value for 1600 ms, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is running out of control. Transmits a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and the control CPU 320 that has received the reset signal executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 at a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), monitoring is performed at a cycle of 8 ms shorter than the cycle. Finally, the timer for managing the relatively long error notification period, such as the error notification for 30 seconds as described above, is decremented (S654), and the error notification ends at the time out.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the special symbol change. If the second winning / decreasing lottery value has been reserved (Y in S700), the second winning / decreasing determination unit 222 reads out the second winning / decreasing lottery value and determines whether or not the second special symbol 52 is valid (S702). The determination means 222 determines the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determination means 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and issues a variation start command together with the determined result. The pattern is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to start the symbol change of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

  When the second winning / rejecting lottery value is not held (N in S700) and the first winning / rejecting lottery value is held (Y in S708), the first hit / no-go determination unit 221 determines whether the first hit / reject lottery value is not held. The value is read out and the rejection of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first rejection determination unit 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determination unit 231 determines A change pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and a change start command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 together with the determined result to start the symbol change of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first winning / rejecting lottery value has not been held, the processing from S710 to S722 is skipped (N in S708).

  The special symbol change display is processed (S718), and S718 is repeated until a predetermined change time elapses and the symbol display stop timing is reached (N of S720), and the symbol change is stopped after the predetermined change time elapses. When the timing has been reached (Y in S720), a fluctuation stop command is transmitted to the sub-board 300, and the fluctuation of the symbol being displayed is stopped at a predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the fluctuation display of the special symbol ends. I do.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the process of decorative symbol change display. The effect determining means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the start of fluctuation and the effect display content from the main substrate 200 (S750), and stops the decorative symbol according to the received special symbol stop symbol, the variation pattern, and the result of the hit / fail judgment. The mode is determined (S752), and a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, when the precursor setting is turned on by the preliminary determination (Y in S756), the pattern in which the already determined fluctuating effect pattern includes the specific effect content to be prevented from being superimposed on the notice effect is included. If this is not the case (N in S758) and the symbol change is not the trigger for turning on the precursor setting (N in S760), a setting for displaying a predetermined announcement effect is executed (S764), and the precursor setting is not performed. If it is a symbol change that is the trigger of turning on (Y in S760), the precursor setting is turned off (S762). If the precursor setting is not turned on (N in S756) or if the specific effect content is included in the variable effect pattern (Y in S758), the processing from S760 to S764 is skipped.

  After that, the display of the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol is started (S766), the process of displaying the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol (S768), the process of displaying the notice effect is executed (S770), and the process until the fluctuation stop command is received from the main board 200. S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772), and when the fluctuation stop command is received (Y in S772), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the stop mode determined in S752 to stop the symbol fluctuation display (S774). ), The variation effect of the decorative symbol is ended (S776).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the effect processing of the special game (S800), and the opening / closing control means 275 opens the special winning opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) and the number of balls in the special winning opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the process returns to S804 (N in S806), and whether the predetermined opening time has elapsed (N in S806). If the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804), but the number of balls in the special winning opening 20 has reached 9 or more (Y in S806), the opening / closing control unit 275 sets the special winning opening. 20 is closed (S810).

  If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), 1 is added to the number of rounds and the process returns to S802 (S812). If the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the effect display is performed. The control means 305 terminates the special game effect processing (S814), the special game control means 260 terminates the special game (S816), and starts the execution of the specific game, that is, the probable change, the time saving, and the easy ball entry state (S818). ).

  Here, the production process start of the special game (S800) is a production time for notifying the player of the start of the game related to the big hit (the special game in which the special electric auditory product is continuously operated based on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device). If the game state before the transition is a specific game state (probable change game or time-saving game) at the time of transition to the jackpot game, the normal game state (probability variation function, ), A process of setting the content of the big hit game to be executed, and setting a sub-control command. On the other hand, the processing related to the end of the special game effect processing (S814) includes a standby process and a sub-control for securing an effect time for notifying the player of the end of the big hit game and the transition to the specific game state. Command transmission processing is executed. The start of the special game effect processing (S800) and the end of the effect processing (S814) are referred to as a "big hit (combination) start demonstration" and a "big hit (combination) end demonstration".

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process of the small hit game. In the small hit game, a unit game executed only once is started (S819), the special winning opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time elapses (N in S822). If the time has elapsed (Y in S822), the special winning opening 20 is closed (S824), and if the opening and closing for the set number of times has not been completed (N in S826), 1 is added to the number of opening and closing and the process returns to S820. (S828) If the opening and closing of the set number of times have been completed (Y of S826), the small hitting game is ended.

  It should be noted that, when the small hit game is performed, the same control relating to the time called “start demonstration” and “end demonstration” may be performed similarly to the above-described big hit game. In addition, when executing the small hit game, the small hit game is generally different from the big hit game even when the small hit game is started in the specific game state, unless the specific game satisfies other end conditions. Does not trigger the normal game (the process of turning off the probability variation function and the time saving function is not performed).

  In the base technology, the number of jackpots in the second game is generally larger than the number of jackpots in the first game, that is, one big hit in the second game is larger than that in the first game. Was designed to increase the expected prize ball acquisition value in the above, but in another example, the first game may be designed to increase the expected prize ball acquisition value than the second game. Then, the first game and the second game may be designed so that expected prize ball acquisition values are substantially equal. In the latter case, it may be designed so that the average of the number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game is equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which a unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 100% is executed, and in the second game, a special game in which a unit game is executed 4 times with a probability of 50%. However, a special game in which a unit game is executed 16 times with a probability of 50% may be executed. In any case, a special area is provided in the special winning opening, and when a game ball entering the special winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in a normal game after the end of the special game, A specific game such as a probable change state may be implemented. In this case, the special game executed when the big hit occurs in the second game is easier to enter the specific area than the special game executed when the big hit occurs in the first game. May be configured so that the probability that the regular game in the probable change state is executed after the end of the special game is increased. For example, a first hit in which a special game in which it is relatively difficult to enter a specific area is executed, and a second hit in which a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area is executed. The second game may be provided so as to be more likely to be the second hit than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of the second hit in the first game may be less than 100%, but the probability of the second hit in the second game may be 100%.

(Prerequisite technology 2)
Next, a basic configuration of the slot machine will be described as a prerequisite technique.
FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing a basic structure on the outer surface of the slot machine 1010. The slot machine 1010 includes a housing base 1102 which is mainly a box-like body, a housing door 1104 provided on the front surface of the housing base 1102, and various types of housing provided on the housing base 1102 and the housing door 1104. And a device. The housing door 1104 is a door that is attached to the opening of the housing base 1102 so as to be openable and closable. The housing base 1102 and the housing door 1104 are integrated to form the housing of the slot machine 1010. Form. The housing door 1104 is locked during the business hours of the game store, thereby preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 1010. Access to the inside becomes possible only when the cabinet door 1104 is unlocked by the employee of the game store.

  The housing door 1104 is provided with a transparent window 1132 substantially at the center of the front surface, and the reel that rotates inside can be visually recognized through the transparent window 1132. An effect display device 1130 on which effect contents are displayed is provided on the upper front part of the housing door 1104. A first bet button 1112a, a second bet button 1112b, a settlement button 1113, a cross key 1118, an effect button 1120, and a medal slot 1110 are provided in an operation area provided below the transparent window 1132 in the housing door 1104. Can be The first bet button 1112a is a button for placing one medal (hereinafter, also referred to as "betting"), and the second bet button 1112b is a so-called max bet button. This is a button for placing a medal. The settlement button 1113 is a button for instructing the player to pay out a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 1110 and stored as a stored medal or a betted medal to the player. The cross key 1118 and the effect button 1120 are operation input means for accepting a player's operation input as an effect. Below the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b, a start lever 1114 for the player to instruct the start of reel rotation is provided. On the right side of the start lever 1114, a left stop button 1116a, a middle stop button 1116b, and a right stop button 1116c for instructing rotation stop of the three reels are provided. A medal payout port 1108 and a medal tray 1106 are provided in front of the medal payout port 1108 below the housing door 1104, and speakers 1122 are provided on the left and right of the payout port 1108. A plurality of effect lamps 1124 are provided at a plurality of places such as the outer periphery of the housing door 1104.

  Above the effect display device 1130 (not shown), a status display lamp, a frequency display lamp, a stored number display lamp, and a payout number display lamp are provided. The status display lamp is turned on when, for example, a bonus game or an AT (assist time) is started, and is turned off when it is finished. The number-of-times display lamp is a 7-segment display for displaying the number of executed bonus games and ATs. The stored number display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of stored (credited) game medals. The number-of-payouts display lamp is a seven-segment display that displays the number of game medals to be paid out when the small combination is established. When any abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1010, the number-of-payouts display lamp displays alphabetic characters indicating the type of the error. For example, there are a hopper empty error, a game medal payout error, a game medal retention error, a game medal backflow error, an auxiliary storage full error, a spine stop error, and a set value error. The hopper empty error is an error when the game medals in the hopper tank 1162 are empty. The game medal payout error is an error when a game medal is paid out at a timing different from the original. The game medal retention error is an error when a game medal is jammed inside the medal insertion slot 1110. The game medal backflow error is an error when the game medal advances in a direction different from the original route, such as when a game medal enters from a position different from the medal insertion slot 1110. The auxiliary storage full error is an error when the game medals in the hopper tank 1162 are full. The spine stop error is an error when each reel does not stop at a predetermined position. The set value error is an error when a set value is out of a predetermined numerical range.

  FIG. 31 is a rear view of the housing door 1104 exposed when the housing door 1104 is opened. A transparent window 1132 is provided substantially at the center. On the upper part, a sub-control device 1300, which is called a sub-substrate, for controlling effects in a game is installed. Below the transparent window 1132, a medal selector 1150, a medal guiding path 1152 to the right thereof, and a medal return path 1154 below are provided. When a medal is inserted into a medal slot to be described later, the medal selector 1150 distributes the medal to the medal guiding path 1152 when the medal can be accepted, and distributes the medal to the medal return path 1154 when the medal cannot be accepted. The medals distributed to the medal guide path 1152 are stored in a hopper tank described later through the medal guide path 1152.

  FIG. 32 is a front view showing the internal configuration of the housing base 1102 exposed when the housing door 1104 is opened. A left reel 1160a, a middle reel 1160b, and a right reel 1160c are rotatably provided substantially in the center of the housing base 1102. The left reel 1160a, the center reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c are rotating members having a plurality of symbols printed on their outer peripheral surfaces. The symbols are rotated by the driving force of the stepping motor, so that the symbols rotate through the transparent window 1132. Visible to the player.

  A main controller 1200 which is a so-called main board, which controls the progress of the game, is provided above the housing base 1102. In main controller 1200, a setting change switch 1168 is provided on the right side. The setting change switch 1168 includes a button for changing a game specification having six stages, a keyhole for inserting a setting key possessed by an employee of the game arcade, and a setting memory for storing the set value. The setting values of the six stages associated with the different game specifications are the game specifications that are more advantageous to the player as the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6 is larger. When an amusement store employee inserts the setting key into the keyhole and turns it, the button can be operated to change the setting.

  A hopper tank 1162 is provided below the housing base 1102, and a payout device 1164 (hereinafter, also referred to as a "hopper") that pays out medals from a payout opening 1108 is provided below the hopper tank 1162. On the left side of the hopper tank 1162, a power supply board 1166 for supplying electric power to each part of the slot machine 1010 is provided.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a symbol array of reels. On the outer peripheral surface of each of the left reel 1160a, the center reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c, a symbol row as shown in the table of the drawing is printed. On each reel, 20 symbols respectively corresponding to symbol numbers 0 to 19 are arranged at equal intervals. When the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line among these symbols becomes the same predetermined symbol or the predetermined combination in which the predetermined combination is established, the winning of the combination is determined. On the other hand, the line in which the symbols are arranged includes a line that is not set as an active line and is not treated as a winning combination even if the same predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination is stopped.

  In the above-described slot machine 1010, the player plays one to three medals by inserting one to three medals from the medal insertion slot 1110. When medals are stored as credits, the player places one or three medals by pressing the first bet button 1112a, the second bet button 1112b, or the settlement button 1113. When the player operates the start lever 1114, the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c starts, and the symbol row on the reel moves at high speed in the vertical direction. When the player presses the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c in any order, the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c stops in the order corresponding to the pressed order, Either symbol is displayed at the stop position. If the combination of symbols stopped on a predetermined activated line corresponds to one of a plurality of types of winning combinations, it is determined as "winning", and a number of medals according to the type of winning combinations are paid out, or a gaming state. Is executed.

  FIG. 34 is a functional block diagram of the slot machine 1010. The slot machine 1010 includes a main control device 1200 and a sub control device 1300. Main controller 1200 is electrically connected to reels 1160a-c, bet buttons 1112a, b, settlement button 1113, start lever 1114, stop button 1116a-c, and setting change switch 1168. 1124, the effect display device 1130, the speaker 1122, the cross key 1118, and the effect button 1120 are electrically connected. The main control device 1200 and the sub-control device 1300 are each configured by hardware including elements such as a ROM and a RAM for storing data and programs and a CPU used for arithmetic processing. Functional blocks taken from various perspectives will be described.

  Each of the functional blocks included in main control device 1200 may be configured such that any one of them is mounted in sub-control device 1300 instead of main control device 1200. Similarly, each of the functional blocks included in sub-control device 1300 may be configured such that any one of them is mounted in main control device 1200 instead of sub-control device 1300. However, since data transmission and reception between main control device 1200 and sub-control device 1300 is one-way from main control device 1200 to sub-control device 1300, the entire operation is realized by such one-way data transmission and reception. Each component is arranged in main control device 1200 and sub-control device 1300 so as to be operated. As described above, since the unidirectionality of data transmission from main control device 1200 to sub-control device 1300 is maintained, data is transmitted from the configuration included in sub-control device 1300 to the configuration included in main control device 1200. And cannot request data transmission. Therefore, information generated by main control device 1200 cannot be referred to from sub-control device 1300 unless main control device 1200 unilaterally transmits information to sub-control device 1300.

  The main control device 1200 includes a combination lottery unit 1202, a random number determination unit 1204, a winning flag control unit 1206, a reel control unit 1208, a stop position determination table 1210, an operation order detection unit 1212, a winning determination unit 1214, a payout unit 1216, and a special game. A control unit 1218 and a setting change unit 1220 are provided.

  When the player operates the start lever 1114, the role lottery means 1202 executes a role lottery to determine a winning role from a plurality of types of roles, and transmits a result of the role lottery to the sub-control device 1300. I do. The types of the role include a small role, a special role, and a replaying role. There are a plurality of small roles, and medals corresponding to the types are paid out. The special role includes a regular bonus (a special type of special role, also called "RB"), a big bonus (a type of special type that continuously operates is "BB", and a type 2 special type) One that operates continuously is also referred to as “MB”). The replaying role is also called “replay”, and is a role in which the same number of medals are inserted without inserting a new medal, and the player can play the game again. The random number determination unit 1204 acquires a value of a random number used for the winning lottery as a lottery value. Note that the “random number” referred to in the present application may not be a random number generated mathematically, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. The winning combination lottery means 1202 determines a winning combination as a winning lottery based on whether or not the lottery value acquired by the random number determination means 1204 falls into any one of the lottery value ranges assigned to each role.

  The winning flag control means 1206 turns on a flag corresponding to the winning combination among a plurality of flags corresponding to each combination. If the winning combination with the flag turned on is a small combination, the winning is not carried over, so the flag is turned off when the game ends, regardless of winning or non-winning. If the winning combination with the flag turned on is a special combination, the winning is carried over to the winning, so that the flag is kept on until there is a winning, and the flag is turned off when the winning. If the winning combination for which the flag is turned on is a replaying combination, the winning is not carried over, so that the flag is turned off when the game ends.

  The reel control unit 1208 controls the start of rotation of the left reel 1160a, the center reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c in response to the operation of the start lever 1114, and transmits information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114 to the sub reel. Transmit to control device 1300. The reel control unit 1208 selects one from the plurality of stop position determination tables 1210 according to the result of the winning lottery. The reel control unit 1208 is triggered by individual pressing of the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c, and stops the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c in response to the pressing. Control is performed, and information indicating that the stop button is pressed is transmitted to the sub control device 1300. The reel control unit 1208 controls the rotation and stop of the left reel 1160a, the center reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c by controlling the driving of the stepping motors provided respectively.

  Based on the stop position determination table 1210, the reel control unit 1208 determines whether the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c have been pressed and the order in which the left stop button 1116a, the right stop button 1116c were pressed, and the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c. To determine the stop position. The operation order detection unit 1212 detects the order in which the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c are pressed. The reel control unit 1208 detects the rotation position of the left reel 1160a, the center reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c by using a photo sensor corresponding to each of the reference positions.

  In the stop position determination table 1210, the result of the lottery, the positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c when the stop buttons 1116a to 1c are pressed, the pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c, and the plurality of reels 1160a to 1160c are displayed. Correspondence of which of the symbols is stopped on the activated line is determined. In other words, individual stop position determination tables 1210 are prepared according to the type of small combination, the type of special combination, and the type of replay combination, and as the prize conditions for each combination, the timing and order of pressing the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c are determined. It is determined in each stop position determination table 1210. If any of the winning combinations has been won, based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the winning combination, if the pressing timing and pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c satisfy the winning condition, the reel control means 1208 The stop positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c are determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination are aligned on the activated line. Even if one of the winning combinations is won, if the pressing timing and the pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c do not satisfy the winning condition, the reel control unit 1208 determines the stop position according to the winning combination. Based on the table 1210, the stop positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c are determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not aligned on the activated line. If no winning combination has been won, the reel control unit 1208 determines, based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the disconnection, the stop positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations are not aligned on the activated line. To determine.

  In this specification, the term “table” simply refers to data in which a correspondence between a first parameter such as a lottery value and a second parameter such as a value indicating an option is defined in a table structure. Instead, such a correspondence is widely included in a case where the correspondence is realized by a program structure for deriving a second parameter from a first parameter. These are also referred to as “selection criteria” as a concept substantially synonymous with “table”. When a table structure is used, a selection criterion of substantially one type may be constituted by a combination of a plurality of structurally divided tables. Shows the number of substantive types of tables, not the number of structured tables.

  The winning determination means 1214 determines that a winning has been achieved when the symbol combinations corresponding to any of the winning combinations are aligned on the activated line, and determines the number of payout medals corresponding to the winning winning combination. The payout unit 1216 adds the number of payout medals determined by the winning determination unit 1214 to the number of stored medals. However, when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, the surplus medals are paid out by the payout device 1164. If the winning combination is a re-playing combination, the same number of medals as the number of inserted medals played in the previous game is set again. The prize determining unit 1214 transmits information on a prize and information on the number of payout medals to the sub control device 1300.

  The special game control means 1218 controls to shift from the normal game to the special game when the special combination is won, and to shift from the special game to the normal game when the condition for ending the special game is satisfied. As the special game, there are an RB game which shifts when the player wins the RB, a BB game which shifts when the player wins the BB, and an MB game which shifts when the player wins the MB. The RB game ends when a predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination stops eight times on the activated line, or when a game result of 12 times is obtained. The BB game ends when the total number of coins acquired by paying out medals when a predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination stops on the activated line exceeds 285. The MB game ends when the total number of coins acquired by paying out medals due to the stop of the predetermined symbol or the predetermined combination on the activated line exceeds 153. As a special control of the special game, the time from the operation of the stop button to the stop of the corresponding reel is reduced during the MB game, and the game start operation is performed even if the RB does not win during the BB game. At the same time as (lever operation), control for shifting to RB internally may be provided.

  The setting change means 1220 determines the game specification corresponding to the set value set by the setting change switch 1168 among the game specifications of the six stages, and changes the winning probability of each role in the role lottery by the role lottery means 1202. In the six-stage game specification, the winning probability is higher as the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6 is larger. Each time the setting change switch 1168 is operated, the setting value is incremented by one such as “Setting 1” → “Setting 2” → “Setting 3” →. The increment is circulated by returning from “setting 6” to “setting 1”. Finally, by operating the start lever 1114, the set value selected at that time is determined, and the setting change is determined.

  The sub control device 1300 includes a pattern storage unit 1302, an effect determination unit 1304, and an effect control unit 1306. The pattern storage unit 1302 stores a plurality of types of effect patterns. In the effect pattern, the effect contents to be displayed on the effect display device 1130 in accordance with the progress of the game, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound pattern output from the speaker 1122, and the like are defined. The effect determination means 1304 transmits information such as information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114, information indicating the press of the stop button 1116, information indicating the result of the winning lottery, information on winning, and information on the number of payout medals from the main control device 1200. Receive. The effect deciding means 1304 stores the result of the winning lottery by the winning lottery means 1202, the winning status, and the game state in response to the operation of the start lever 1114 and the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c and the stop of the reels 1160a to 1160c. One of a plurality of types of effect patterns to be stored is selected. The effect control means 1306 controls the display of the effect display device 1130, the lighting of the effect lamp 1124, and the output from the speaker 1122 according to the effect pattern selected by the effect determination means 1304. The effect control unit 1306 changes the display content on the effect display device 1130, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound output from the speaker 1122, and the like according to the input contents of the effect button 1120 and the cross key 1118. If the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b and the start lever 1114 are newly operated while controlling the effect by the effect pattern, the effect control means 1306 cancels the effect being displayed, and the effect determination means 1304 returns to the new game. The corresponding effect pattern is selected, and the effect control means 1306 starts the effect by the selected effect pattern.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a basic game flow in the slot machine 1010. First, it is assumed that none of the reels 1160a to 1160c has yet been rotated (N in S1010), and that no medals are bet (N in S1012). In this state, when medals are stored as credits (Y in S1014), if one of the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b is pressed (Y in S1016), a bet of the number of medals corresponding to the pressed bet button is made. It is set (S1018). If there is no credit, the process exits the routine of this flow and skips the remaining processes until a medal is inserted (N in S1014). Even when the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b are not depressed in S1016, the process exits the routine of this flow and is skipped until the bet buttons 1112a and 11b are depressed (N in S1016). If a bet has already been placed in S1012, steps S1014 to S1018 are skipped (Y in S1012).

  When the start lever 1114 is operated in a state where a bet is set (Y in S1020), the role lottery means 1202 executes a role lottery and an advantageous game lottery (such as an AT lottery) (S1022), and a winning flag control means 1206. Turns on the flag corresponding to the winning combination in accordance with the result of the combination drawing (S1024), and selects the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the result of the combination drawing (S1025). If 4.1 seconds have not elapsed since the end of the previous game, the game waits (N in S1026), and if it has elapsed (Y in S1026), the reel control means 1208 starts the rotation of the reels 1160a to 1160c ( S1028), exits the routine of this flow. If the start lever 1114 has not been operated in S1020, the process exits the routine of this flow and skips the remaining processes (N in S1020).

  In S1010, if at least one of the reels 1160a to 1160c is rotating (Y in S1010), and if any of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c is pressed (Y in S1030), the state of the flag indicating the winning combination is determined. The stop position of the reel is determined based on the timing of pressing the stop button, the pressing order, and the stop position determination table 1210 (S1032), and the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped (S1034). If the stop button has not been pressed, S1032 and S1034 are skipped (N in S1030). When all the reels 1160a to 1160c are stopped (Y in S1036), the winning of the winning combination is determined based on the stopped position (S1038), and if there is a winning, the medal is determined by the payout number corresponding to the winning combination. Is paid out (S1040). When the payout is completed, the state control process (S1042) relating to the advantageous game is executed, and the transition to the advantageous game section when the transition condition to the advantageous game (AT, etc.) is satisfied, and the termination condition of the advantageous game is satisfied. The control related to the end of the advantageous game section is executed. If all reels are not stopped, S1038, S1040, and S1042 are skipped (N in S1036).

  In the reel stop management processing, a wait time is set, a control command including information indicating that the reel is in a standby state for start of rotation is generated and written in a command buffer, and initial values of various data used for reel acceleration are set to predetermined values. Is stored in the storage area. It is determined whether or not all reels are rotating at a constant speed. If it is determined that the reels are not rotating at a constant speed, it is determined whether or not the rotation of all the reels is abnormal. Again, the initial values of various data used for accelerating the reels are stored in the predetermined storage area, and the confirmation of all reels is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel is rotating at a constant speed, or if it is determined that the rotation is not abnormal, the confirmation of all reels is terminated.

  If it is impossible to store the medals in the payout of medals, hopper payout is executed. In the hopper dispensing process, first, the hopper is driven and waits until the dispensing is detected (a hopper empty error occurs when dispensing is not detected until a predetermined time has elapsed). When the payout is detected, the number of payouts is added, and it is determined whether or not the payout is completed. If the payout is not completed, the payout process is repeated, and if the payout is completed, the driving of the hopper is terminated.

  FIG. 36 is a block diagram schematically showing a hardware configuration of main control device 1200 and sub-control device 1300. Main controller 1200 includes electronic components such as main CPU 1250, main RAM 1252, main ROM 1254, and the like. The main ROM 1254 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling the entire game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 1254 into the main RAM 1252, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 1250. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). A signal indicating insertion of medals, a signal indicating pressing of the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b, a signal indicating pressing of the settlement button 1113, a signal indicating operation of the start lever 1114, a signal indicating pressing of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c, and reels 1160a to 1160a. The signal indicating the position of c and the like are acquired by the main CPU 1250 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 1250 controls driving of external devices such as stepping motors of the reels 1160a to 1160c by various driving circuits (not shown). Also, a command necessary for effect control is transmitted from the main CPU 1250 to the sub-control device 1300 together with the result of the winning combination drawing, winning information, and information indicating the operation of each button or lever.

  The sub control device 1300 includes electronic components such as a sub CPU 1350, a sub RAM 1352, a sub ROM 1354, and an effect display control unit 1360. The sub-ROM 1354 is one of data storage means for holding a sub-control program including effect pattern data in which an effect process is defined, display pattern data in which an effect display process is defined, and the like. This is a hardware configuration that functions as The sub control program including the effect pattern data and the display pattern data is read from the sub ROM 1354 into the sub RAM 1352, and the effect control by the sub control program is executed by the sub CPU 1350. The electronic components are connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown), and are connected by bidirectional communication capable of transmitting and receiving signals to and from each other. For example, when transmitting a command from the sub CPU 1350 to the effect display control unit 1360, the command is transmitted a plurality of times, and the effect display control unit 1360 sends an acknowledgment (ACK) to the sub CPU 1350 as soon as the command is properly received at least once. By replying, communication errors due to noise or the like are avoided. If the reception order of a plurality of commands is different from normal, the effect display control unit 1360 ignores ACK without returning it, and returns only an appropriate command. A signal from an external device such as the effect button 1120 is acquired by the sub CPU 1350 via various interfaces (not shown), and a corresponding command is transmitted to the effect display control unit 1360 according to the reception or the number of receptions of the signal. The sub CPU 1350 drives an external device such as the speaker 1122 by various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and controls the effect by sound output. Further, sub CPU 1350 transmits the display pattern data to effect display control section 1360. The sub CPU 1350 and the effect display control unit 1360 have a hardware configuration that functions as the effect determination unit 1304 and the effect control unit 1306 in FIG. In the base technology, an example will be described in which the sub-control device 1300 includes the effect display control unit 1360. However, the sub-control device 1300 and the effect display control unit 1360 do not need to be integrated as a substrate, and are separated. May be formed as separate substrates connected to each other.

  FIG. 37 is a block diagram schematically showing a hardware configuration of effect display control section 1360. Effect display control section 1360 includes control CPU 1362, control RAM 1364, data ROM 1366, and display control circuit 1370. The data ROM 1366 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data of a three-dimensional image used for effect display in a data compressed state. This is a hardware configuration that functions as the means 1302. The effect image data is an image used for effect display as an effect object indicating a winning determination result or the like, and is, for example, a material image such as a sprite image used for various effects or a moving image used for various effects. The motion data is data in which a motion when a motion effect is added to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing is defined. The object definition data is data in which the shape of a three-dimensional object is defined.

  Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 1350, material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data specified in the display pattern data is read from the data ROM 1366 to the control RAM 1364, and the material data is read. The effect display used is executed by the control CPU 1362. As a result, commands and material data relating to effect display are transmitted from the control CPU 1362 to the display control circuit 1370, and display control is performed by the display control circuit 1370. When a signal indicating the operation of the new bet buttons 1112a and 1112b and the start lever 1114 during the effect display is received, the sub CPU 1350 determines a new effect pattern and transmits a command indicating the new effect display to the control CPU 1362. . The sub CPU 1350 and the display control circuit 1370 have a hardware configuration that functions as the effect determination unit 1304 and the effect control unit 1306 in FIG.

  The display control circuit 1370 includes a decoder 1374, a drawing memory 1376, a drawing circuit 1378, a frame buffer 1380, and a display circuit 1382, each of which is connected via a bus 1372. The bus 1372 in the figure comprehensively shows buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus for convenience.

  Material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data sent from the control CPU 1362 are stored in the drawing memory 1376, and compressed data among the data is decoded by the decoder 1374. The drawing memory 1376 is used as a work area when rendering image data or motion data is decoded by the decoder 1374, or is used as a work area when performing drawing processing or image processing by the drawing circuit 1378 (Video RAM). ).

  The drawing circuit 1378 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 1376 to sequentially execute commands sent from the control CPU 1362 to generate a display image, and uses the generated display image as a frame of a moving image as a frame buffer. 1380. The frame buffer 1380 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing a moving image frame to be output to the effect display device 1130. Note that the frame buffer 1380 and the drawing memory 1376 may be formed of a single VRAM so as to divide the area.

  The display circuit 1382 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 1380 to the effect display device 1130 in the order of storage in the form of video signals. The frame buffer 1380 has, for example, a memory area for two frames, and while the display circuit 1382 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 1378 generates the next display image, The data is stored in the memory area for another frame.

  The slot machine 1010 is supplied with power from a power supply board 1166 functioning as a power supply device. A power switch and a reset switch are connected to the power supply device, and signals from these switches are transmitted to the main CPU 1250. The power switch is a switch that accepts power-on and power-off operations from the power supply to the slot machine 1010. The reset switch is a switch for resetting each circuit mounted on main controller 1200 when an error occurs in slot machine 1010 or the like. Power from the power supply device is supplied to main control device 1200 and sub-control device 1300. On a power supply path from the power supply device to the main control device 1200 and the sub-control device 1300, there is provided a power supply monitoring means for monitoring a supply voltage and detecting a power-off when the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage. The power supply monitoring means determines that the power supply has been cut off when the supply voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage, and outputs a power supply cutoff detection signal to the main CPU 1250 or the sub CPU 1350. Note that the reference voltage value at the time of detecting power-off of main control device 1200 is set to a higher value than the reference voltage value at the time of detecting power-off of sub-control device 1300, and is set earlier than that of sub-control device 1300. Main controller 1200 executes a process (power-off process) programmed to be executed at the time of power failure.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing main program control processing of main controller 1200 in slot machine 1010. In the game control process executed by the main control device 1200, first, a game start process is executed (S1100), a game medal management process is executed (S1102), and the bet number matches a specified number as a start condition, and If the operation of the start lever is received (Y in S1104), the process at the time of lever reception is executed (S1106). If at least one of the start conditions is not satisfied (N in S1104), the process returns to S1102. Subsequent to S1106, a combination determination process is executed (S1108), and whether or not to execute a freeze (effect) as a freeze lottery process and an effect mode during the freeze are determined (S1110). Further, an advantageous game lottery, which is a lottery relating to shifting to the advantageous game section, is executed in accordance with the role lottery result or the current game state (S1112). A reel stop management process such as wait time standby is executed (S1114), and a stop display symbol determination process is executed to determine whether a gaming combination is established (S1116). Next, a game medal payout process is executed (S1118), a game end process is executed (S1120), and the process returns to S1100 to repeat the flow of this drawing.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing in main controller 1200. In this timer interrupt processing, processing such as reading of each game operation signal output in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by a player, detection (confirmation) of a signal level, and transmission of each control command includes: It is performed every fixed time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). First, an interrupt initial process (e.g., saving registers, prohibiting interrupts, etc.) is executed (S1200), and it is determined whether or not power-off is detected. If power-off is detected (Y in S1202), power is turned off. A disconnection process is performed (S1204). In the power-off processing, saving of registers, saving of a stack pointer, saving of an interrupt state, and the like are performed. In addition, the processing of holding information relating to the winning combination determination information and the information relating to the RT gaming state and calculating and storing the checksum stored in a predetermined storage area are performed. If no power interruption has been detected (N in S1202), timer measurement is executed (S1206). The timer measurement is to measure the elapsed time of an arbitrary timer set in the game control process. Next, control of the display lamp (such as updating the display value of the display lamp based on the control data output to the output port) is executed (S1208), and reading of the input port is executed (S1020). In the reading of the input port, the signal level of each game operation signal input to the input port is read and stored, the signal level is determined, and the like.

  Next, the reel drive control (S1212) for controlling the acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, and the like of the rotation of the reels is repeated until all the reels are completed (S1214). Next, a port output process for performing excitation output of a reel, a hopper, a blocker or the like is executed (S1216), and a control command transmission process is executed (S1218). The external end signal data stored in the predetermined storage area is read out and an external end signal is output (S1220), and an interrupt end process (return of a register, interrupt permission, etc.) is executed (S1222), and an interrupt return is performed. I do.

  Another control process executed by main controller 1200 is a main control power-on process. The main control power-on process is a process performed when power supply to the main control device 1200 is started (when the power is turned on), in which a temporary stack pointer is set, a checksum is calculated and checked, and a power return process is performed. Processed to be able to. The stack pointer is restored and an interrupt is activated, and the game is played based on information on the winning combination determination result, information on the RT game state, and the like stored in a predetermined storage area when the power is turned off.

(First embodiment)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration described above. Hereinafter, differences from the base technology will be mainly described, and description of common points will be omitted. Of the elements that make up the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as the elements described in the base technology are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the following description, the process of displaying an effect image on the effect display device 60 will be described as the operation of the effect determination unit 303. However, as described above, in effect, the effect determination unit realized by the sub CPU 310. 303 (sub-main) transmits a command relating to an effect image to be displayed to the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) realized by the control CPU 320, and the effect control means 304 controls the display control circuit 326 to display the effect image. Is displayed on the effect display device 60. Therefore, in the following description, the operation mainly described by the effect determination unit 303 may be expressed mainly by the effect control unit 304 or the display control circuit 346. In the following description, the configuration for displaying an image can be appropriately replaced with a configuration for outputting information indicated by an image by sound.

  The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, like the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology, includes a plurality of starting winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, a plurality of holding lamps, and one large winning opening. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, like the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology, changes the fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 (hereinafter also referred to as “special symbol 2”) to the first special symbol 51 ( (Hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 1”). On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment is different from the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology in that it has a small hitting V function.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first winning / rejecting lottery or the second winning / rejecting lottery is executed, and the result of the lottery determination is determined. When a big hit occurs, a special game in which the big winning opening 20 repeatedly opens is started. On the other hand, when the determination result of the first winning or losing lottery or the second winning or losing lottery is a predetermined result called a small hit, a small hit game in which a large winning opening is opened for a short time is executed. The small hit game is distinguished from the big hit because it has only one unit game repeated a plurality of times in the case of the big hit.

  When a small ball game is executed and a game ball that has entered the special winning opening enters a specific area called a V zone in the special winning opening, the special electric accessory is continuously operated to execute the large hitting game. The special device in which the condition device for activating the accessory continuous operation device is activated to be promoted from the small hit to the big hit and the big winning opening is opened for a long time is executed. A so-called small hit V occurs. In other words, the special game control means 260 determines whether the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the big hit, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 20 during the small hit game is in a specific area inside the big winning opening 20. When a special game is passed, a special game is executed. Therefore, the small hitting game in the first embodiment has substantially the same operation as that of the second type pachinko game in the related art. The difference between the model that adopts the small hit V and the second type of pachinko game is that the small hit V depends on the special symbol stop display mode (so-called single hit type) that triggered the execution of the small hit game. The condition device (continuous actuation device) that operates when a ball enters a specific area can be changed, and the profit obtained by one V winning can be changed.

  When the special game is over, the game shifts to a specific game called a fluctuating time reducing game (hereinafter referred to as "time saving") with a predetermined probability (100% in the first embodiment). The time reduction is continued until a new big hit occurs after the end of the special game or until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number. The time reduction of the first embodiment is a state in which the ease of entering the second starting winning opening is higher than that in the normal state, and corresponds to the easy entering state in the base technology, and is also called an electric chew support. The time savings include (1) shortening of the fluctuation time of the special symbol, (2) probable change of the ordinary symbol, (3) shortening of the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, and (4) extension of the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 90. The ordinary electric accessory 90 is a ball entry change mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of game balls into the second starting port 12 changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.

  Further, as will be described later, the probability of being determined to be a small hit is set to be high in the success / failure lottery triggered by a ball entering the second starting port 12. Therefore, a small hit is likely to occur during a short working time when the ease of entering the second starting port 12 increases, and the possibility of the small hit V also increases. The big hit, which is a big hit compared with the small hit V, and the special game is started when the symbol change is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the big hit is also referred to as a "symbol big hit" below. In the normal game in the normal state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to enter the second starting port 12 except for a chance effect (normal hit of the first symbol) described later. The ball is hit, and the symbol big hit of Toku-zu 1 is acquired, and the time is shifted. Then, in the time saving, the player enters the second starting port 12 to obtain a small hit V or a symbol big hit, and after the end of the special game, the time saving continues, thereby aiming at the continuous small hit V and the symbol big hit. Becomes As in the first embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine adopting the small hit V, when the setting function is installed, the big hit that develops from the small hit that is not affected by the set value is determined as the main game purpose in the specific game. As a result, it is possible to suppress a difference in the setting of the playability during the specific game, as compared with a specific game (probable change state) in a model having a probability change function related to the winning or losing of a special symbol such as the base technology. Specifically, in the case of a model that employs a small hit V (small hit probability of 1/100) when performing a specific game that continues for 100 times, the possibility of acquiring a large hit from a small hit during a specific game is approximately Although it is 63%, in the case of a probable changer (probability during change: setting 1 = 1/100, setting 6 = 1/80) as in the base technology, the probability of a big hit during the probability change is 63% (setting 1) to It changes greatly to 71% (setting 6).

  FIG. 40 shows a main game flow of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. As described above, during normal times (during a normal game in a normal state), the player enters the first starting port 11 and aims at winning a symbol big hit according to the special figure 1. The symbol jackpot of the special figure 1 can be said to be a so-called initial hit, and includes a 15R jackpot where nine time savings are given, a 4R jackpot where nine time savings are given, and a 4R jackpot where one time saving is given. Any of these multiple types of jackpots is assigned based on the type of the jackpot symbol.

  Nine times of time saving are given when the special game ends, the game shifts to the normal game in the time saving state, and when the time saving state is a big hit (including both the symbol big hit and the small hit V), or the normal game This means that the process ends when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed nine times. In addition, when one time saving is given, the game shifts to the normal game in the time saving state after the end of the special game, and if the time saving state has a big hit or the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the normal game is executed once. It means to end when it is done. Note that the time reduction termination conditions described here are described assuming that a desirable game for obtaining payouts is performed in the design of the gaming machine, and detailed termination conditions will be described later.

  In the case of a big hit in which nine time savings are given, the game is shifted to the normal game in the time saving state after the end of the special game, and while the change of the special figure 2 is executed nine times, and the symbol change of the remaining 4 pieces at the end of the special game During the execution of (typically, four changes in FIG. 2), a rush effect is displayed. In addition, in the case of a big hit in which one time saving is given, the game is shifted to the normal game in the time saving state after the end of the special game, while the change of the special figure 2 is executed once and the four reserves existing at the time of the end. While the symbol variation (typically, four variations of the special figure 2) is executed, a chance effect is displayed. If the symbol change during the working hours and the symbol change for four holdings do not generate a big hit, the process returns to the normal time.

  In the symbol fluctuation during the time reduction or the four symbol fluctuations after the end of the time reduction, the small hit V (special figure 2 small hit V) and the special figure triggered by the fact that the fluctuation result of the special figure 2 becomes a small hit Two design big hits or special figure one design big hits may occur. The special figure 2 small hit V is distributed to a 15R big hit to which 9 time savings are given, a 10R big hit to which 9 time savings are given, or a 5R big hit to which 9 time savings are given. The special figure 2 symbol big hit is a 5R big hit to which 9 time savings are given. The special figure 1 symbol big hit is distributed to either a 15R big hit where 9 time savings are given or a 4R big hit where 9 time savings are given. When these big hits are completed, the game returns to the normal game (rush effect) in the time saving state, and the aim is to acquire the big hit again by the symbol change during the time saving or the four symbol changes after the end of the time saving.

  In the normal game in the normal state, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment can open the normal electric accessory 90 for a long time in response to the hit of the normal symbol. Then, the chance effect (general power opening effect) is displayed while the normal electric accessory 90 is open and during the change of the design of the special figure 2 held during that time. In the fluctuating effect related to the suspension of the special figure 2 generated during the normal game in the normal state, since it is a great chance of acquiring the small hit V, the special effect that looks different from the fluctuation effect of the special figure 1 executed in the same state Is to execute. The special figure 2 small hit V, the special figure 2 symbol big hit, or the special figure 1 symbol big hit may occur during the special figure 2 reservation symbol change.

  FIG. 41 shows the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. The first starting port 11 is provided at the lower center of the game area 81 and below the center decoration 64. The first working port 31 is provided at a position above the first starting port 11. The first starting port 11 and the first operating port 31 allow a game ball fired at the first strength (relatively weak strength in the first embodiment, in other words, left-handed) to enter or to enter easily. Position. On the other hand, the second starting port 12, the special winning port 20, and the second operating port 32 are games fired at an intensity different from the first intensity (in the first embodiment, relatively high intensity, in other words, right-handed). The ball is provided at a position where the ball can enter or can easily enter the ball. In the first embodiment, a left-hit game ball is prevented from entering the second starting port 12, the special winning opening 20, and the second operating port 32, and a right-hit game ball is set to the first starting port 11. A game nail or a windmill is arranged in the game area 81 so that the ball does not enter the first operating port 31, and a flow path of the game ball is set.

  Inside the special winning opening 20, there is provided a specific area in which a small hit development jackpot occurs when a game ball passes, and the specific area pass detection device 504 detects when a game ball passes through the specific area. Detect that. The specific area opening / closing solenoid 506 controls a switching member that switches the state of the specific area between a closed state in which game balls cannot pass and an open state in which game balls can pass. The specific area opening / closing solenoid 506 controls the switching member according to the control of the opening / closing control unit 275 so that the specific area is opened when the result of the success / failure lottery (the result of the success / failure determination) is a small hit. Upon detecting a ball entering a specific area, a decision is made to shift to a special game. If the ball has not been detected in the specific area, the game returns to the normal game after the end of the small hit game.

  In the special game according to the first embodiment, the first special game (symbol big hit) executed when the symbol at the time of the stop becomes a big hit and the small hit after the symbol at the time of the stop becomes the small hit There is a second special game (small hit V) that is executed upon developing into a big hit. The first special game is the same as the special game shown in the base technology, that is, triggered by a symbol big hit. The second special game is a special game associated with the operation of the condition device and the operation of the continuous accessory actuation device, triggered by a game ball passing through a specific area during a small hit game (also referred to as “V winning”). It is.

  At a lower right position outside the game area 81, a state display lamp 502 for indicating a game state of the gaming machine 500 is provided. The status display lamp 502 is composed of, for example, two lamps. The first lamp indicates whether or not the first lamp is in a time-saving state (in this embodiment, it is accompanied by a state in which an ordinary electric accessory easily enters a ball). The ramp indicates whether or not the game state in which the player should make a right strike (usually an easy-to-enter state of the electrically-powered accessory or the operating state of the specially-powered accessory). The first lamp is turned on when the normal game is in the time reduction state, and is turned off when the normal game is in the normal state. The second lamp is turned on in a gaming state in which a right-handed game is required, that is, in a time-saving state, a small hitting gaming state, or a special gaming state, and is turned off in a normal state. Therefore, the second lamp of the state display lamp 502 functions as a so-called right-handed indicator light, and indicates whether or not the game state in which a right-handed game should be performed in a certain display mode.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the probability of the symbol big hit in the special figure 1 and the probability of the symbol big hit in the special figure 2 are both 1/319. Since the pachinko gaming machine 500 does not have the special symbol probability changing function, the symbol jackpot probability does not change, and the lottery is always performed at a constant probability for each probability determined by the set value. The small hit probability of Toku-zu 1 is 0, and the small hit probability of Toku-zu 2 is 1/10. As a modification, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 may be larger than 0 (for example, 1/500), but is set to a value smaller than at least the small hit probability of the special figure 2.

  In the small hitting game, the opening / closing control means 275 opens the special winning opening 20 for a predetermined time (for example, 1.6 seconds) of 1.8 seconds or less, and in the meantime, the specific area inside the special winning opening 20 is also opened. Control so that The special winning opening 20 preferably employs a slide attacker type (a type in which a game ball can roll on a cover member of the special winning opening and can enter when the cover member is opened). The flow path in the upper part of the large winning opening 20 or in the vicinity of the large winning opening 20 is formed, for example, in a zigzag shape so that a plurality of game balls stay near the entrance (a lid portion or the like) of the large winning opening 20. Further, the opening pattern of the special winning opening 20 is such that the opening of 0.124 seconds is repeated 13 times with a predetermined closing time therebetween, and even if the launch of the player is delayed, the game ball is inserted. It is preferable to design so that Thereby, when the special winning opening 20 is opened for a short time in the small hitting game, it is possible to generate a ball into the special winning opening 20 and a small hit V with a high probability. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment is configured so that a small hit V can be obtained when a small hit occurs.

  FIG. 42 shows the details of the jackpot in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. The symbol jackpot of Toku-zu 1 includes a 15R jackpot of 9 time savings, a 4R jackpot of 9 time savings, and a 4R jackpot of 1 time saving, and the distribution probability is 1%, 49%, and 50%. It should be noted that one 4R big hit during the time reduction is the same control as a 4R big hit with 9 time savings. Therefore, in the big hit during the time reduction, nine time reductions are all given. The symbol jackpot in Toku-zu 2 is a 5R jackpot with nine time savings. The small hit V in Tokujin 2 includes a 15R big hit with 9 time savings, a 10R big hit with 9 time savings, and a 5R big hit with 9 time savings, and the distribution probability is 60%, 10%, and 30%. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of time savings is set to nine. However, the lottery with a small hitting probability of 1/10 can be executed nine times. It is about 61%, but as a premier hit, a small hit V and a big hit with a time reduction of 100 are provided to substantially guarantee the next continuation (about 99.9% probability that the next small A game state that gives the player a sense of security that the player can win a hit may be included, including a case where a hit can be obtained.

1. Configuration related to time reduction and open lottery (normal symbol lottery):
As a result of the open lottery, three types, that is, out of order, first hit, and second hit are provided. The first hit is a hit involving the normal electric accessory 90 being opened for a long time, and the winning probability in the normal state is about 1/590 (special symbol fluctuation conversion). The second hit is a hit involving a short-time opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and the winning probability in the normal state is about 3/590. In the time saving state, the winning probability for the first is about 10/11 and the winning probability for the second is 0.

  In the normal game in the normal state, the opening / closing control means 275 sets a plurality of game balls when the open lottery becomes the first hit (winning probability 1/590) and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the first hit. The normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a predetermined time (hereinafter, also referred to as a “long opening time”) that is longer than the time interval at which the is fired, in other words, it is possible or easy to enter the second starting port 12. The normal electric accessory 90 is controlled to the open state so that Here, a time interval (shortest time interval) at which two game balls are continuously fired may be 0.6 seconds to 0.8 seconds. The long open time is less than 6 seconds and is a value equal to or longer than the time interval at which the maximum number of game balls to be held (four in the first embodiment) of the special figure 2 (second winning / losing lottery value) is fired. You may. Further, the long open time may be a value that is equal to or longer than the time that is assumed to be required from the start of the launch of the game ball to the increase of the special figure 2 from 0 to 4. The long open time in the first embodiment is 5.9 seconds.

  The opening / closing control unit 275 determines whether the open lottery is the first hit (the winning probability is 10/11) and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the first hit in the normal game in the time saving state. During the opening time, the ordinary electric accessory 90 is opened. It should be noted that the long opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the normal state and the long opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the time reduction state may be different, but in each case, a plurality (preferably four) of the games are played. It is set to a value equal to or longer than the time interval at which the ball is fired. Thus, in the normal game in the normal state, by opening the normal electric accessory 90 for a long time in accordance with the first hit of the normal symbol, it is possible to provide the player with a chance to store a plurality of special figure 2 holds even in the normal state. That is, it is possible to provide the player with a chance of acquiring a small hit V a plurality of times. For example, in the game flow shown in FIG. 26, a route can be provided that shifts from a normal time to a state of extended play through a normal symbol hit.

  When the result of the open lottery is the second hit, the open time ("short open time") of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is shorter than the long open time, and the maximum ball entry into the second opening 12 is maximum. May be set to one or two possible times. In addition, the short opening time may be set to a time when it is substantially difficult to enter the second starting port 12.

  The condition for terminating the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is that the ordinary electric accessory 90 is opened for a predetermined time, or the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 is equal to the special drawing 2 (here, the second winning / rejecting lottery value). That is, the upper limit value (4 pieces in the first embodiment) of the reserved number has been reached. The opening / closing control means 275 (1) the elapsed time from controlling the ordinary electric accessory 90 to the open state reaches the long opening time (in the case of the first hit) or the short opening time (in the case of the second hit). If at least one of the following and (2) the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 has reached four is satisfied, the ordinary electric accessory 90 is controlled to the closed state. In other words, the state of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is switched so that the ball cannot enter the second starting port 12 (difficult as a modification).

  The long opening of the normal electric accessory 90 in the normal game that does not go through the jackpot (time saving) is an exceptional game flow (probability 1/590). According to the above-mentioned operation end condition, it is possible to suppress an excessive generation of the small hit V in the normal game which does not go through the big hit (time saving) which is an exceptional game flow, and it is easy to stabilize the payout rate within the design range. . Further, when the normal electric accessory 90 is opened in the normal state, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is prevented from exceeding the assumed value of four, and the payout rate based on the four times fluctuation of the special figure 2 is assumed. Is easily realized.

  The conditions for terminating time savings are (1) that a big hit or a small hit has occurred, and (2) the number of changes in Toku-zu 2 is 9 (in the case of 9 time savings) or 1 time (in the case of 1 time savings). (3) The number of fluctuations of Toku-zu 1 has reached 7 times, (4) The total number of fluctuations of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is 15 (in the case of 9 time savings) or 7 (In the case of one time saving is granted), the condition is satisfied when any of the conditions is satisfied. The specific game control means 270 shifts the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the time reduction, and individually counts the number of times of the change of the special figure 1 and the number of the changes of the special figure 2 during the time reduction. The specific game control means 270 ends the time saving when the above-mentioned termination condition is satisfied. When any of the above (2), (3), and (4) is established, the specific game control means 270 returns the game state of the normal game to the normal state.

  As described above, by setting each of the number of times of the change in Toku-zu 1 and the number of times of the change in Toku-zu 2 as the end condition of the time saving, the value of one time saving can be secured. That is, by the time the variation of the special figure 1 reaches seven times, it is possible to expect the ball to enter the long opening second starting port 12, and if the ball enters the second starting port 12, the special figure 1 The special figure 2 fluctuates preferentially, and a small hit (and a small hit V) can be acquired with a high probability. The number of times the special figure 1 fluctuates seven times in the time saving end condition is the upper limit (four) of the reserved number of the special figure 1 that may exist at the end of the special game, and the first start that may occur when the player left-handed by mistake. This is the total of insurance (three) for the ball entering the mouth 11.

  As will be described later, the change of the special figure 1 during the time reduction is only a super shortened change, and therefore the number of insurances is increased in the first embodiment. As a modified example, the number of insurances may be reduced (for example, one) if the fluctuation of the special map 1 during the time reduction is longer.

  The specific game control means 270, when the end condition of the time saving is satisfied due to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation (in other words, at the end of the fluctuation time). The time saving is ended, and the gaming state is returned to the normal state.

  Here, in one symbol variation time (that is, one variation time of the special figure 2) triggered by the ball entering the second starting port 12 in the time reduction, open lottery (in other words, ordinary symbol lottery) is continuous. Is set to a value equal to or longer than the time at which the hit of the normal symbol can occur at least twice when executed. In other words, the second variation pattern determination means 232 selects, as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 during the time reduction, a variation pattern in which the variation time is longer than the time at which the hit of the ordinary symbol can occur at least twice. For example, the variation pattern table is configured such that a variation pattern in which the variation time is equal to or greater than the time during which the hit of a normal symbol can occur at least twice is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 during the time reduction. Is also good.

  As described in the base technology, for example, the single symbol fluctuation time in the time reduction may be 2 seconds. In this case, the time during which the hit of the normal symbol can occur at least twice is about 10 seconds (two fluctuation times of the normal symbol + one operation time of the normal electric accessory). In the first embodiment, one variation time of the special figure 2 in the time saving is set to a predetermined time of 10 seconds or more. As a modified example, one change time of the special figure 2 may be set to a time longer than the long open time (5.9 seconds in the first embodiment) when the symbol is the first hit.

  Here, in the case of the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal state, the special figure 2 fluctuates up to four times. This is because when the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 reaches the upper limit value (four) of the reserved number of the special figure 2, the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 ends. On the other hand, in the normal game after the end of the 4R big hit in one time saving, the special figure 2 fluctuates up to five times in one time saving and four times after the end of the time saving. The ordinary electric accessory 90 which is opened by the first hit of the ordinary symbol during the working hours is closed once the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 reaches the upper limit (four) of the reserved number of the special figure 2. . However, the fluctuating time of the special figure 2 is longer than the time that the hit of the normal symbol can occur two or more times, so that the first hit of the second normal symbol occurs and the normal electric accessory 90 is opened, This is because it is possible to further enter the ball into the second starting port 12 (typically, the special figure 2 is increased by one).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the chance via the big hit given once per time is more advantageous to the player than the chance based on the normal symbol hit at the normal time. Even if the time saving is the minimum one time, by increasing the possibility of obtaining the small hit V than the normal symbol hit at the normal time, it is possible to raise the consciousness of the player trying to obtain the big hit, , The player who has won the jackpot can be rewarded.

  The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252, when the time reduction is ended at the time of the stop display of the special symbol change in which the winning or losing lottery result is off, the special symbol stopped and displayed is a predetermined special figure. Increase the special symbol fixing time when the fixed display is performed for the fixed time only. In other words, the next symbol change based on the held winning / rejecting lottery value (typically, the second winning / rejecting lottery value) is not started until the special figure fixed time set particularly long from the end of the time reduction period. The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 determine whether or not it is the fixed display timing of the special symbol (1) that the specific game control means 270 has finished the time saving (big hit symbol, small hit (Excluding the case where the time saving ends due to the stop of the hit symbol). As a modified example, (2) the determination may be made by counting the number of times the special symbol (special figure 2) changes during the working hours. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the time saving termination condition is independently determined for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 may be changed in a normal state. More preferred.

  The special figure fixed time at the end of the time reduction when the result of the lottery is out of order in the first embodiment is 6 seconds. Therefore, even if the ordinary symbol hits immediately before the end of the working hours, the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (5.9 seconds) ends before the elapse of the special figure fixed time. As a result, the suspension of the special figure 2 increases more than expected (as a situation, when the special figure fixed time of 6 seconds does not exist, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 starts during the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, the special figure 2 (1), the unintended fifth variation of the special figure 2 becomes possible after the reduction of time, that is, the occurrence of the small hit V exceeding the design range can be suppressed. .

  The effect determination means 303 executes the preliminary lottery when the result of the open lottery is out of order or the second hit, and according to the result of the preliminary lottery, the first hit occurs and a chance state (the length of the ordinary electric auditors character 90). A notice effect (also referred to as a “gase notice effect”) having a content expected to enter the “open” state is displayed. For example, when the result of the open lottery is out of order or the second hit, the effect determination means 303 may display the gaseous notice effect at a predetermined probability. In the first embodiment, the above-mentioned gaseous notice effect is not displayed based on the result of the lottery of the special map.

  The effect deciding means 303, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the first hit (long open) during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the normal game in the normal state, the effect corresponding to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 ( A power opening effect (corresponding to a later-described pending charge effect) is displayed in a manner according to the execution state of the decorative effect 61 (fluctuating effect, etc.). The public power opening effect includes a notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “entry effect”) having a content suggesting entry into the chance state. In addition, the open-pull production effect includes a notice effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “right-hand navigation”) that prompts a right-handed player. The right-handed navigation may be a content that prompts to fire a game ball in order to enter a ball into the second starting port 12 or a content that prompts to reserve the special map 2. Here, if the ordinary electric accessory is activated immediately after the stop display of the ordinary symbol, even if the player starts right-handed by watching "right-handed navigator", there is a possibility that the hold may not be sufficiently stored. , Set a longer time, such as the fixed time for the normal design until the normal electric accessory is opened after the stop display, and the demonstration time for starting the operation of the normal electric accessory, and use that time to perform "right-hand navigation". It is preferable to produce an effect. It is assumed that the start timing of the opening of the electric power opening effect is that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the first hit. On the other hand, since it is difficult to enter the game ball, it may be possible to execute the game from a predetermined timing before the stop display (for example, the remaining about 5 seconds of the normal symbol fluctuation time when the ordinary symbol becomes the first hit) At the timing described above, a normal symbol winning effect which is a success pattern with respect to the above-mentioned gaseous notice effect is executed, and a right-handed guiding effect for allowing the player to understand the situation of right-handing is performed in the remaining 5 seconds.

  If the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the normal state (during non-time-saving game) is during the non-reach state or the normal reach state, the effect determining means 303 rushes together with the display of the fluctuation effect (for example, superimposes on the fluctuation effect). The effect may be displayed, and the right-hand navigation may be displayed in a relatively large size. On the other hand, if the fluctuation of the special map 1 is during the super reach, the rush effect may not be displayed, and the right-handed navigation may be displayed in a relatively small size. That is, the effect deciding means 303 may display the reach not established or the normal reach <Public opening effect <super reach priority. In addition, the first hit of the normal symbol can be established even while the special symbol is not changed in the normal state. Therefore, even if the fluctuating effect is not being displayed, the full power opening effect can be displayed. The display priority may be such that, in the rendering process for the effect display device 60, the one displayed superimposed on the foreground is treated as a high priority, the one with a large effect display area is treated as a high priority, Any display mode, such as a composite, may be used as long as the display mode is intended to make the player visually recognize preferentially.

2. Configurations related to multiple variation pattern modes:
FIG. 43 shows a plurality of types of variation pattern modes. The pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the first embodiment includes a plurality of types of variation pattern modes in which the tendency of selecting the variation patterns in the special figures 1 and 2 differs. In the first embodiment, the variation patterns of the special figures 1 and 2 are determined with reference to different variation pattern tables for each variation pattern mode. Hereinafter, the variation pattern table referred to in the mode N is referred to as a mode N table.

  The main board 200 of the first embodiment stores a mode 0 table to a mode 7 table. The first variation pattern determining means 231 selects one of the mode 0 table and the mode 2 table according to the game state, and determines the variation pattern of the special figure 1 with reference to the selected variation pattern table. The second variation pattern determination means 232 selects one of the mode 0 table, the mode 3 table to the mode 7 table according to the game state, and determines the variation pattern of the special figure 2 with reference to the selected variation pattern table. . In other words, after the end of the special game, the mode state of the fluctuation pattern table of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is switched individually according to the number of times of each change. In this manner, the time saving termination conditions provided for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are referred to, particularly, at a timing when there is an acceptance for giving a special effect such as the final change of the time saving game of the special figure 2. It is possible to solve the problem that the table to be shifted is shifted due to the execution of the change in Toku-zu.

  The first variation pattern determination means 231 selects a variation pattern by referring to the mode 1 table for the seven variations of the special figure 1 after the 4R big hit (after the end of the special game) of one time reduction, and then the mode 0 table is The variation pattern of Toku-zu 1 is selected with reference to FIG. Further, in the case of a big hit with nine time savings (15R, 10R, 5R, 4R), the first fluctuation pattern determination means 231 refers to the fluctuation pattern by referring to the mode 2 table for the seven fluctuations in Toku-zu 1 after the end of the special game. Is selected, and then the variation pattern of the special figure 1 is selected with reference to the mode 0 table. The seven fluctuations in Toku-zu 1 after the end of the special game correspond to the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 1 which is a time saving end condition. Both the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table define a variation pattern of a super shortened variation (about 3 seconds in the first embodiment). In other words, both the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table are set so that the ultra-short variation is selected.

  When the first variation pattern determination means 231 selects the mode 1 or mode 2 variation pattern, the effect determination means 303 displays an effect indicating that the rush effect (time reduction game effect mode) is being prepared. Is also good. The effect determination unit 303 may select a variable effect pattern (and a notice effect pattern, the same applies hereinafter) for displaying a dummy round effect, and display a dummy round effect. The dummy round effect may be content that makes it appear as if a special game is currently being played or content that makes it appear as if the last round of the special game is continuing. In the case where the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table is a hit, it is possible to select “hit information effect fluctuation (10 seconds)” or the like other than “ultra shortened fluctuation”. It is preferable that the decorative design display on the effect display device 60 relating to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 selected by the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table is performed so as to be inconspicuous at the corners of the display area. When the fluctuation of the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table is the fifth time or the like, there is a possibility that the player may have left-handed without understanding the playability, so a dedicated right-handed guidance effect is displayed. It may be something.

  As a modification, at least one of mode 1 and mode 2 may not be provided. When the mode 1 and the mode 2 are provided, when the left-handed operation is performed when the extended suite is completed due to the change in the special figure 2 (except when the time saving is ended due to the seven times change in the special figure 1), the change in the special figure 1 is changed. This is because there is a possibility that a super-shortened fluctuation will occur. Further, as another modified example, when the mode 1 and the mode 2 are provided, a special effect corresponding to the super-shortened variation of the special figure 1 is provided, and the effect determination unit 303 determines the special figure 1 variation after the end of the extended-villa state. The exclusive effect may be displayed.

  The second variation pattern determination means 232 selects the variation pattern of the special figure 2 by referring to the mode 3 table at the first variation of the special figure 2 after one time saving 4R hit, and then refers to the mode 0 table. Then, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 is selected. Since the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the normal state is a chance to acquire the small hit V, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 in the mode 0 is a fluctuation pattern for producing a chance. When a variation pattern for a chance effect is selected by the second variation pattern determining unit 232, the effect determination unit 303 selects a variation effect pattern for displaying a chance effect, and displays a chance effect.

  In addition, the mode 3 table is set so that a variation pattern for a chance effect is selected. The chance effect includes a hold charge effect. The hold charge effect is an effect that prompts the user to save the hold of the special map 2. The hold charge effect may be (1) a content that prompts the player to fire a game ball aiming at the second starting port 12, (2) a content that prompts a right-handed shot, or (3) a right-handed shot. If not, the content may indicate that it is disadvantageous. When a variation pattern for a chance effect is selected by the second variation pattern determining unit 232, the effect determination unit 303 selects a variation effect pattern for displaying a chance effect, and creates a chance effect (a reserved charge effect as a special figure variation effect). Display).

  The variation pattern of the mode 3 table is such that the game ball is newly fired in the working hours, passed through the operating port, opened by lottery, ordinary symbol variation, ordinary symbol hit, and variation time longer than the time required to open the ordinary electric accessory 90. Is specified. Here, when there is an error in the open lottery, it is preferable that a variation time equal to or longer than the above-mentioned open lottery and the normal symbol change be made two or more fluctuations as insurance. The reason for designing in this manner is that the operation termination condition of the ordinary electric accessory 90 includes “when there are four balls (special figure 2 upper limit of reservable number) of game balls”, and the mode 3 This is because, unless the ordinary electric accessory 90 is operated at least once while the table is being changed, four reservations of the special figure 2 cannot be stored. If the fluctuation in the mode 3 table is a small hit or a big hit, the time saving game state is maintained even after the special game, so that the effect of notifying the hit immediately is shorter than the time as described above. It may include what is executed.

  The second variation pattern determining means 232, in the case of a big hit with nine time savings, (1) refers to the mode 4 table once, (2) refers to the mode 5 table once, (3) refers to the mode 6 table seven times, (4) Referring to the mode 7 table four times, select a variation pattern corresponding to 13 variations of the special figure 2 for four reservations during and after the end of the time reduction.

  The mode 4 table defines a variation pattern for the demonstration of the big hit end demonstration as a variation pattern of the first variation of the special figure 2 in the time reduction. When the variation pattern for the big hit end demonstration effect is selected by the second variation pattern determining means 232, the effect determination means 303 selects a variable effect pattern for displaying the big hit end demonstration, and displays the big hit end demonstration effect. The end of the jackpot demonstration is a content that indicates the end of the jackpot (such as the current number of consecutive villas and the total number of acquired balls), a content that indicates that time has been reduced, a content that prompts a right-hand, and a rush production mode selection screen (normal Character type such as a type, a large number of advance notices, and a single announcement type). The reason why the big hit end demonstration effect is displayed in the first time fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the time reduction is to promote right-handing and save the special figure 2 reservation. As another effect, it is easy to hide the special figure 1 change executed before the special figure 2 change, and it is easy to shorten the time from the end of the big hit to the start of the special figure 2 change as seen from the player.

  The effect deciding means 303 receives a command (not information including the fluctuation pattern of the mode 4 table) for instructing execution of the big hit end demo from the main board 200, and produces a round effect (for example, an effect of the last round of a special game). May be continued. In this case, if the player stops firing the game ball in the final round, special figure 2 reservation does not occur, and there is a possibility that the game will not shift to the end demonstration (special figure 2 variable production using the mode 4 table) forever. Therefore, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception of the command instructing the execution of the big hit end demonstration, the effect determination means 303 performs an effect of prompting a right-handed operation, in other words, an effect of prompting a shot aimed at the second starting port 12. May be displayed. In particular, it is the first hit (big hit during non-working hours), and when shifting to the game state of 9 time savings corresponding to the rush production, it is often the case that the special figure 2 is not held, so only the first hit The end demonstration effect may be executable during the actual jackpot end demonstration time of the main board 200, in which case the mode 4 table is omitted and the number of mode 6 tables is increased by one. In addition, when the fluctuation in the mode 4 table is a big hit or a small hit, it is changed to (or in addition to) the big hit end demonstration, and the number of rounds (the number of rounds) added to the number of rounds (number of balls) of the preceding special game is additionally obtained. The number of balls may be notified, and an effect of notifying an effect in which two big hits and small hits are continuous may be provided. In addition, at the time of the start demonstration of the big hit and the small hit, by performing an effect that informs that the hit is also included in the hold in advance, it is possible to change the hit change of the mode 4 table from the end demo effect without a sense of incongruity. However, at that time, in the production of the start demonstration, the notification type of the hit type can be executed when the actual change of the subsequent hit is executed by leaving the subsequent hit type as non-notification. Even during a big hit, it is not possible to know how many payouts are to be added, and it is possible to inflate a sense of expectation and make the player wait.

  The mode 5 table to the mode 7 table may include a plurality of types of productions (first production production, second production production, third production production, ..., normal production, etc.), and the selection probability of each production. May be set in a table in which different values are set. By dividing the variation pattern table, the appearance frequency of the effect can be changed, and, for example, it is easy to avoid that the extended state is ended without any stir effect. As a modified example, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 may be determined from one fluctuation pattern table for the second fluctuation after the nine time savings are applied to the four fluctuations after the time saving missing. When the fluctuation time of the mode 5 is longer than the fluctuation time of the mode 6, the order of the mode 5 and the mode 6 is switched in order to secure a longer fluctuation time of the final fluctuation in the time saving and to store the reservation of the special figure 2 to the upper limit. You may.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, a variation pattern table dedicated to final variation for notifying a player of a payout at a time-saving game end timing which is often seen in a general pachinko gaming machine is not provided. The final fluctuation in this embodiment is a fluctuation in which the special figure 2 reservation after the end of the time reduction becomes 0 (mainly the fourth fluctuation after the end of the time reduction), and is typically the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the extended state. . The reason is that the small hit probability in Toku-zu 2 is a high probability of 1/10, so that it is better not to make a difference from other fluctuations during the rush. In addition, if a fluctuation pattern table dedicated to the display of payouts is provided, the irregular pattern such as a case where the time reduction is ended due to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 or a case where only three special figures 2 are reserved at the time of the end of the time reduction are usually used. During the special figure 2 fluctuation accompanying the normal symbol hit at the time, there is a possibility that a ball-out notification effect is displayed (original chance effect). In order to avoid this, it is preferable not to provide a variation pattern table dedicated to betting announcement.

  Here, the configuration of the payout notification will be described. The effect deciding means 303 determines whether (1) the change of the special symbol, which is the trigger for the end of the working hours, ends as a result of deviation, or (2) the second winning / rejecting lottery value remaining after the end of the working hours (that is, the special figure 2 is reserved). In the case where the fluctuation based on is ended as a result of departure, the effect relating to the payout until that time (hereinafter referred to as “the payout notification effect”) is displayed for a predetermined time. The display time of the ball announcement effect may be, for example, 5 seconds. The above (1) and (2) are the cases where the effect state to be controlled by the effect determination means 303 returns from the time saving state (rush effect) to the normal state. The above (1) is a case where the reservation of the special figure 2 does not exist at the time when the final change of the time saving is completed. If the fluctuation of the above (1) or (2) becomes a big hit (including a small hit V), the payout announcement effect is not executed until the next time-saving end.

  The announcement of the ball announcement is as follows: (1) the ball during the special game, (2) the ball during the small hit game, (3) the ball during the working hours (prize by the winning opening such as the special figure 2 starting port and the general winning opening). (Ball), the content that reports only (1), the content that reports (1) + (2), the content that reports (1) + (3), or (1) + (2) + (3) The content to be notified may be used. The notified payout may be the total payout in this extended holiday period when one or more special games are continuously executed with one or more time savings therebetween. 26. In other words, the announced payout is the total of the payouts in the initial hit and the extended play state in FIG. 26, in other words, the payout of the payout from the occurrence of the initial hit in the normal time to the return to the normal time through the extended play state in the normal time. It may be a sum.

  In addition, the payout may be the number of game balls paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 500 (the number of award balls), and the number of outgoing game balls is subtracted from the number of game balls paid out. It may be a number (so-called net increase number). The effect determination means 303 may acquire the number of paid-out game balls from the payout control board 155, and may acquire the number of out-balls from the out-detection device 39 to count the number of outgoing balls.

  If the special symbol (that is, special figure 1) indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port 11 is changing, the effect determination means 303 pays out the ball in a manner that the visibility is higher than the variable effect. Display the notification effect. More specifically, the effect determination means 303 may temporarily hide the fluctuating screen of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation except during the stop display of the decorative pattern 61, and may display a ball announcement notification effect. . Further, the effect determination means 303 may display the ball announcement effect in a region different from the change display region (stop display region) of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the special figure 1 change. Further, the effect determination means 303 may display the variation of the special figure 1 on a screen smaller than usual (e.g., a wipe) or a screen smaller than the display screen of the appearance notification effect when displaying the ball announcement effect. Good.

  According to this aspect, the fluctuation effect relating to the special figure 2 having a relatively high probability of a small hit is displayed without hindrance by the ball appearance notification effect, and the time-saving effect mode (rush effect) ends according to various situations. In such a case, it is possible to notify the payout at a suitable timing and mode. The effect determination means 303 determines whether (1) both the special figure 1 change and the special figure 2 change have not been executed for a predetermined period of time or (2) if the change of the special figure 1 has started It is also possible to determine the timing of the ball-out notification (except when 10 minutes or more have elapsed after the end of the rush effect) and display the ball-out notification effect.

3. Configuration related to chance production:
The effect deciding means 303 is performing the special figure 2 fluctuation when the fluctuation pattern mode of the special figure 2 is the mode 0 (in other words, when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern of the mode 0 is selected by the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232). , Display a chance effect. The chance effect is displayed when (1) the ordinary symbol is the first hit in the normal state of FIG. 26 and the special figure 2 is reserved. In addition, (2) displayed after a time saving one time 4R big hit and during the remaining reservation (special figure 2 reservation) digestion after the time saving is completed. In each case, the four fluctuations in Tokujin 2 are assumed.

  Note that, in the above (1) and (2), after the 9 hits of time saving, and when the remaining holding after the saving of the time saving is completed (holding in FIG. 2), the game state of the main board 200 is the same (normal state). ), But because the variation pattern mode is different (different variation patterns are selected from different variation pattern tables), the former and the latter display different effects. The former is a chance production, and the latter is a rush production.

  The effect deciding means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the above-mentioned reserved charge effect when the normal symbol is the first hit (long open) in the normal state. The effect deciding means 303 may display the pending charge effect during the time when the normal electric accessory 90 is controlled to the open state. The hold charge effect may include an effect of notifying the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 (a normal electric release effect). Further, the hold charge effect may include an effect (chance entry effect) of a content for giving a notice of entry to the chance effect.

  The hold charge effect and the chance entry effect have a higher priority among the image effects displayed by the effect determiner 303 (for example, an error display, a right-handed display, a decorative pattern at the time of a stop display, a display of the number of held players, and the like). The priority is set lower than the information necessary for the game, and the priority is set higher than other notice effects that are changing). This is because, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the presence or absence of the small hit V has a great influence on the payout, and it is important to accumulate the special figure 2 reservation for the small hit V. However, if a special accessory (herein referred to as a “special accessory”) having a high probability of a big hit (for example, about 70%) is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 500 when operated in a specific mode, the special accessory May be executed in preference to the hold charge effect and the chance entry effect. In addition, during the display of the pending charge effect and the entry of the chance, the effect of activating an accessory other than the special accessory (an accessory having a lower jackpot expectation than the special accessory) may be canceled.

  If the special figure 2 change is started during the display of the hold charge effect in the normal state, the effect determination means 303 changes the change of the special figure 2 after the display of the hold charge effect ends (after the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 90 ends). The variable display of the corresponding decorative pattern 61 is started. In this case, the effect determination means 303 may start the change of the decorative pattern 61 based on the variable effect pattern corresponding to the change pattern of the special figure 2 from the middle. Also, during the hold charge effect display, the effect determination means 303 may cause the variation display of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the special figure 1 change to be displayed smaller than usual in an area different from the display area of the hold charge effect, It may be displayed in an area smaller than the display area of the charge effect (such as a wipe display).

  As described with reference to FIG. 43, during the time reduction after the end of one time reduction of the 4R big hit, the reserved charge effect is displayed at the first change of the special figure 2. The effect deciding means 303 does not display the effect related to the deviation change of the special figure 1 during the time reduction (the small decorative pattern 61 is displayed in order to be able to identify that the change is in progress). This is because the special figure 1 fluctuation during the working hours is fixed at 3 seconds for the purpose of immediate digestion, and important contents directly related to the payout are not displayed.

  The effect deciding means 303 reserves both in the case where the normal symbol becomes the first hit (long open) in the normal state, during the time saving after the end of one time saving 4R big hit, and in the case of the first variation of the special figure 2 Display the charge effect. However, there is a difference in that the former is an effect during the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and the latter is an effect while the special figure 2 is changing. Since the special figure 1 may fluctuate in various patterns while the normal electric accessory 90 is open, the effect determination unit 303 displays the pending charge effect and also causes the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (including the deviation fluctuation). The corresponding fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern 61 is displayed smaller than the pending charge effect (eg, wipe display).

  The display priority of the hold charge effect in the normal state is set according to the state of the variable effect of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the special figure 1 change. For example, if the variation pattern of special figure 1 does not have a high degree of importance such as super reach, the effect determination means 303 displays the hold charge effect in a relatively high visibility mode, and the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61. May be displayed in a mode with relatively low visibility. The aspect with high visibility is that the display size is large, the color is conspicuous (brightness, high saturation, etc.), an effect is added, or the effect is drawn in front of other effects. May be included. In the case where the variation pattern of the special figure 1 has a high degree of importance such as super reach, the display priority is reversed and the hold charge effect is displayed small (such as simply reduced) in a corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. Instead, the form may be changed, for example, by simplifying the display), or the super reach effect corresponding to the special figure 1 change may be displayed large.

  The effect deciding means 303 reserves both in the case where the normal symbol becomes the first hit (long open) in the normal state, during the time saving after the end of one time saving 4R big hit, and in the case of the first variation of the special figure 2 A charge effect is displayed, and after the hold charge effect is completed, a chance effect is displayed as a variable effect of the special figure 2. The effect deciding means 303 basically advances the chance effect based on the player's button operation, but a special effect is also provided when the button is not operated. For example, when the player operates a button, the chance effect develops into a reach effect via a plurality of notices such as notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, and the like. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the button, the chance effect develops into a reach effect via a plurality of notices such as notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, notice 4, etc. This is a special effect at the time of operation, and is not displayed at the time of button operation. The effect determination means 303 may perform the effect lottery of the notice 4 when there is no operation after the expiration of the validity period of the button, or the effect to be executed when the button operation is performed at the start of the change and when the button operation is not performed. As a specification to do so, a suggestion effect (for example, display of a special button image or display of a mini-character icon) in which the notice 4 appears without operation may be executed during the button valid period.

  The effect deciding means 303 displays the hold charge effect in both the case where the normal symbol becomes the first hit (long open) in the normal state and the case of the first variation of the special figure 2 during the time reduction, but the hold charge effect is displayed. With respect to the suspension of the special figure 2 that occurs during the display of the effect, it is detected (so-called look-ahead) whether or not a hit or a miss has occurred based on the preliminary determination information (priority determination information in the first embodiment). In the normal state, the effect determination means 303 pre-reads the presence or absence of a symbol big hit and a small hit, while in the time reduction state, it pre-reads only the presence or absence of a small hit. This is because the symbol big hit of the special figure 2 in the time saving state has a lower profit than the small hit V.

  As described in the base technology, the effect determination unit 303 displays a hold lamp image indicating the number of holds in the special figure 1 and the number of holds in the special figure 2 in the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 60. The effect deciding means 303 displays the above-mentioned prefetch result as a pending change. For example, as a result of pre-reading, when a certain special figure 2 reservation is a small hit (or a symbol big hit), the effect determination means 303 changes the holding lamp image corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation from the normal mode to the small hit (or the symbol big hit). ). For example, when the hold lamp image indicates a present box, the shape and color of the present box may be changed.

  The effect determination unit 303 may further execute prefetching of the special figure 1 reservation. The effect determination means 303 cancels the pre-reading result and the pre-reading effect that have been executed so far when the first hit of the ordinary symbol occurs during the execution of the pre-reading of the special figure 1 reservation, and the reserved charge effect. May be displayed. As an exception, a look-ahead effect that changes the lottery mode of the variable effect pattern, such as a shift of an effect zone that changes the effect tendency (type of appearing character, world view, etc.), may be executed as it is.

  In addition, even if a symbol jackpot is detected in the look-ahead of the special figure 1 hold, if the change of the other hold before the jackpot hold becomes a big hit, the effect determination means 303 will Do not execute the effect to notify the big hit. When the small hit V occurs from the first hit of the ordinary symbol in the state where the big hit of the special figure 1 is determined, the special figure 1 big hit is digested without saving the special figure 2 holding during the time saving and the number of times of saving time is reset. Because it becomes possible. This is because, for example, a strategy that changes from one time reduction to nine times to increase the possibility of a new small hit V occurs.

4. Configuration related to the state of the casino:
The extended-village state is a mode in which the state directly shifts at 50% of the special figure one big hit at normal time, and shifts directly at the small hit V after the first normal pattern first hit at normal time. Typically, nine time savings + four remaining holdings are executed during the time savings in the extended-villa state, and a special figure 2 lottery with a small hit probability of 1/10 is executed a total of thirteen times. The probability of acquiring a small hit or a big hit during nine working hours is about 61%, and the probability of obtaining a small hit or a big hit with four remaining reservations is about 34%. It is about 75%.

  The effect deciding means 303 displays the big hit end demonstration and the hold charge effect (right-hand navigation) according to the change pattern of the mode 4 at the time of the first change of the special figure 2 in the shortened working hours in the extended holiday state. The effect determining means 303 executes the change of the special figure 1 before the first change of the special figure 2 in the time reduction of the extended holiday state (when the special figure 2 is set to 0), and when the special figure 1 is a big hit, During the final round effect of the game (or during the end demonstration effect), a predetermined accessory (special accessory or the like) may be operated to output an effect that makes it appear as if the big hit has been extended. As another mode, the effect determination means 303 determines whether the special game has been extended with the appearance of the special game, such as temporarily suspending the round effect of the special game and rewinding and playing the special game during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 which is a big hit. You may look like. A similar effect can be executed even when the special figure 2 fluctuation in the mode 4 table is a small hit or a big hit.

  The effect deciding means 303 displays a rush effect as a variable effect of the special figure 2 during the working hours in the extended holiday state. The rush production is designed on the assumption that a maximum of (4) special figure 2 reservations will remain at the end of the working hours. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the expectation of the small hit V is high even in the remaining reservation after the end of the time reduction (the probability of the small hit is 1/10). Therefore, it is important that four special figure 2 reservations are accumulated at the end of the time reduction. . For this reason, the effect determination unit 303 displays the pending charge effect even in the last (ninth) special figure 2 change in the time saving in the extended holiday state.

  The hold charge effect in the special time change of the special figure 2 of the time saving is a content that urges the firing of the game ball aiming at the second starting port 12, similarly to the charge effect of the reserve charge in the first change of the special time figure 2 of the time reduction. The effect deciding means 303 may display the reserved charge effect in the last change of the special figure 2 of the time reduction in a manner superimposed on the corner of the change effect of the decorative pattern 61. In the first embodiment, since the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the time reduction is 10 seconds or more, it is sufficient to display only the final fluctuation (separately for the first fluctuation) and the reserved charge effect. In the case of adopting a specification in which two fluctuations can be selected, a reserved charge effect may be displayed from the seventh fluctuation or the eighth fluctuation.

  It is assumed that a player who is accustomed to a type 1 gaming machine having no small hit V is likely to easily stop during long-term fluctuations in time savings. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to obtain a very large profit of the small hit V.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the symbol fixed time is set to be long for the final change (ninth change) of the special figure 2 in the time reduction. The symbol fixed time is a time during which the stop display of the special symbol is stopped after the change is stopped, and is a time for delaying the start of the next symbol change based on the held lottery value. The symbol fixed time of the final change of the special figure 2 in the time reduction is set to be equal to or longer than the opening time (6 seconds) of the ordinary electric accessory 90 accompanying the first hit of the ordinary symbol, and is set to 6 seconds in the first embodiment. The symbol fixing time at another time point may be shorter than the symbol fixing time of the final variation of the special figure 2 in the time reduction, and may be, for example, 1 second or 0.5 second.

  On the other hand, as described above, the specific game control means 270 determines whether the special figure 2 changes when the time saving end condition is satisfied, and in this case, when the number of changes in the special figure 2 reaches nine, The time saving is ended at the time of stop display of 2. In other words, the time reduction is ended before the shift to the symbol fixed time. Therefore, even when the normal symbol is the first hit immediately before the end of the time saving, the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 ends within the symbol fixed time. In the special symbol fixed time, since the time saving state has ended, the probability of the first hit even if the symbol starts to change anew is rarely 1/590. This prevents the special figure 2 reservation of +1 from occurring for the four special figure 2 reservations at the end of the working hours. This is because the occurrence of a +1 special figure 2 reservation is not preferable in that the possibility of occurrence of small hits is higher than designed, and is not preferable because a chance effect is displayed immediately after the rush effect. In addition, after the end of the working hours, if the normal symbol is the first hit at 1/590, the hold charge effect, which is the open power opening effect, may be executed as in the normal case. In such a case, In the case where the change of the special figure 2 which occurs after the four changes for the rush effect is a change of the mode 0 table, the chance effect is executed continuously after the rush effect. Although the effect data increases, if it is possible to provide a variable effect pattern for the rush effect even for the change pattern of the mode 0 table, the effect determining means 303 determines the continuity with the rush effect. May be determined, and control may be performed so that the rush effect is continued even when the mode 0 table changes.

  The rush effect of the first embodiment is displayed in the same manner before and after the end of the working hours. For example, in each case of the fluctuation pattern of mode 6 and the fluctuation pattern of mode 7, the effect determination means 303 selects the fluctuation effect pattern corresponding to the rush effect of the same or similar content, Display a rush effect with the same or similar content. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly recognize that the player is in the middle of the working hours (in a state where right-handing is advantageous) despite the end of the working hours (in a state where left-handing is advantageous).

  The effect determination unit 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display an image (referred to as a “right-hand recommended image”) that prompts the player to make a right-hand during the time reduction. The effect determining means 303 starts from the 10th variation of the special figure 2 during the rush production (that is, the first variation of the special figure 2 after the end of the working hours) or the design after the 9th variation of the special figure 2 during the rush production. From the fixed time, an image (referred to as a “left-turn recommended image”) having a content that prompts the player to make a left-turn may be displayed instead of the right-turn recommendation image.

  However, since the effects are the same before and after the end of the working hours, it is possible to confuse the player if the left-handed action is strongly recommended. Therefore, it is not desirable to store the special map 1 reservation in advance. Therefore, the effect deciding means 303 may display the left-turn recommended image smaller than the right-turn recommended image so as to be less noticeable. Further, the effect determination unit 303 may display the left-handed recommended image instantaneously or for a short time, or may display it temporarily or every predetermined time.

  Further, the effect determination means 303 hides the right-handed recommended image from the tenth change of the special figure 2 during the rush effect or from the symbol fixed time after the ninth change of the special figure 2 during the rush effect. The left-handed recommended image may not be displayed. In this case, it may be recommended that only the lighting state of the status display lamp 502 be left-handed. In addition, it is desirable to start the display of the left-handed recommended image conspicuously in the production at the same time as the appearance announcement effect or after the appearance announcement effect. At this time, when the variation of the special figure 1 is being executed, it is preferable to display the left-turning recommended image in accordance with the timing at which the decorative symbol does not overlap with the timing at which the decorative symbol stops in order to notify the game result. .

  The variable production pattern for the rush production can include (1) pseudo fluctuation production 4 to 8 times (minimum 4 times), (2) notice production, and (3) reach production (only some fluctuation production patterns). , (1), (1) + (2), or (1) + (2) + (3), the fluctuation effect corresponding to one fluctuation of the special figure 2 ends. In general, in the small hit high probability design (special figure 2) in the small hit V specification, only the pre-read information on the success or failure can be notified in advance. Further, with respect to the held lottery value, the symbol and the variation pattern are unknown until the symbol variation based on the lottery value is executed. On the other hand, a player is accustomed to a continuous look-ahead effect including a pattern and a fluctuation pattern in a conventional model, and may feel uncomfortable without such a look-ahead effect. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the degree of expectation is displayed by a pseudo look-ahead effect during a pseudo-change effect that is similar in appearance to the look-ahead effect of the conventional model. In the pseudo fluctuation effect, the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 61 is stopped (temporarily stopped) for a time (for example, 0.5 seconds) less than a predetermined reference value, and then the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern 61 is restarted. Although it is a change of times, it is a content that makes it seem as if the change has been made a plurality of times. With the temporary suspension or re-fluctuation of the pseudo-fluctuation, a (2) notice effect and (3) a pseudo-look-ahead effect that suggests the execution expectation and execution contents of the reach effect are performed. As an example of the pseudo-read-ahead effect, a combination of decorative patterns categorized into similar types (colors, forms, characters, and the like) is a chance read-ahead that temporarily pauses continuously, an effect pattern displayed around the screen is a temporary stop, There is an effect step-up look-ahead that transitions to one with a high degree of expectation every time a re-change occurs.

  The effect determination means 303 responds to a change in the immediately preceding special figure 2 in accordance with prior lottery determination information of a lottery value corresponding to the next symbol change, as a prefetch effect in the original meaning affecting the next symbol change. A zone shift symbol stop look-ahead effect may be displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol change effect. The zone shift symbol stop look-ahead effect is a content for giving a notice that the next symbol change will be displayed in the high expectation effect mode. In addition, when the success or failure of the next change is a small hit or a departure of the special figure 2 (running a gas), the effect determination means 303 displays a zone shift symbol stop look-ahead effect with the current change. When the success or failure of the change is the symbol big hit of the special figure 2, the zone shift symbol stop look-ahead effect need not be executed in the current change (because the profit is low). Also, even if the next variation is a small hit, if the current variation evolves to (3) the reach effect, the result of the variation (decoration pattern stop mode) is focused on, so that the zone The look-ahead effect using the transition symbol may be excluded from the lottery. For this reason, in this pre-reading effect, control is performed so as to determine whether or not the next suspension is performed every time the change in the special figure 2 is started, and to execute the pre-reading lottery in accordance with the type of the change pattern of the change to be started. Conversely, if the final stop symbol of the change is a zone shift symbol regardless of the reach change, a method of notifying that the next change will be hit may be adopted.

  The effect determination unit 303 hides the hold lamp image during the rush effect. This is because if the number of reserved items is reported by the reserved lamp image, the significance of the pseudo fluctuation effect is lost. On the other hand, the effect determination means 303 displays the number of remaining fluctuations of the special figure 2 during the rush effect (during time reduction). For example, in the second variation of the special figure 2 (the first variation of the rush effect start) in the time saving, the remaining variation number of the special figure 2 is eight, so that “8 + extra” is displayed, and the special figure 2 is displayed. The second variation is displayed as "7 + extra". “Extra” indicates a change due to the remaining suspension of the special figure 2 after the end of the working hours. In addition, the effect determination means 303, when the suspension of the special figure 2 digested after the end of the working hours actually occurs, for example, when the holding 4 occurs after the sixth fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the working hours, May be displayed. The display of the number of remaining fluctuations may be a number including the current fluctuation, or may be the number of fluctuations until the end of the working hours excluding the current fluctuation. In addition, the remaining number display may not be directly expressed as “the remaining N times”, but may be a long-distance expression such as “the Nth day / 8th day + extra”. At this time, time elapses such as day N (morning), day N (day), day N (night), day N AM 10:00, day N PM 2:00, day N PM 8:00, and the like. Along with the display, the display may be divided into the above-mentioned (1) pseudo fluctuation period, (2) notice effect period, and (3) reach effect period. Furthermore, the part of the time (and the part of the hour) described in the above 12 hour notation is advanced for each pseudo variation, and the degree of expectation in the case where the alignment is “Nth day PM5: 55” at a certain timing is obtained. Or a method of notifying that the hit is high or the hit is determined.

5. Configuration related to the game waiting demonstration:
The effect determination unit 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display an image of a predetermined game standby demonstration when the change of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not performed for a predetermined standby demonstration transition time. The game standby demonstration may be a moving image showing a theme, a motif, a story, an outline, and the like in the production of the pachinko gaming machine 500.

  The standby demo shift time is set longer than the longest fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol when the ordinary figure holding means 242 holds the ordinary figure lottery value up to the upper limit. In the first embodiment, the upper limit of the holding number of the regular drawing lottery value is four, and the longest variation time (in the normal state) of one variation in the case where the symbol is usually out or the second hit is 10 seconds. The maximum time of one change in the case of a hit is 15 seconds (in a normal state). In this case, the normal symbol lottery value is held up to the upper limit, and the longest time at which the first hit (long open) of the ordinary symbol is notified latest at the time when the special symbol is not changed is executed. Is 45 seconds (10 seconds × 3 holds + 15 seconds × 1 hold). Therefore, the standby demo transition time is set longer than 45 seconds, for example, set to 60 seconds.

  As described above, in the normal game in the normal state, when the ordinary electric accessory 90 is opened for a long time in accordance with the first hit of the ordinary symbol, the effect determination means 303 determines whether the game ball aimed at the second starting port 12 is to be opened. Display a pending charge effect that prompts for firing. By setting the standby demo transition time to be longer than the longest fluctuating time of the ordinary symbol when the ordinary figure lottery value is held up to the upper limit, the ordinary symbol becomes the first hit during the display of the game standby demonstration and the ordinary electric It is possible to prevent the accessory 90 from being opened for a long time, in other words, it is possible to avoid displaying the hold charge effect during the display of the game standby demonstration. This makes it easier to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to acquire the small hit V without noticing the hold charge effect. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the first hit of the ordinary symbol has a great effect on the gaming performance, it is preferable to treat the variable display of the ordinary symbol as a state in which the game is progressing. It is possible to prevent the state of progress of the game based on the fluctuation display from being erroneously recognized as being non-game by the display of the game standby demonstration.

  As a modified example, the effect determination means 303 determines that the entry of the game ball into any of the plurality of winning openings or the entrances provided in the game area 81 has not detected the standby demo transition time, and If the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not changing, an image of the game standby demonstration may be displayed. The plurality of winning openings or entrances include a first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, a large winning opening 20, a first operating opening 31, a second operating opening 32, and a general winning opening 33. The presence or absence of a ball may be detected by a sensor (the first start winning detection device 16, the second start winning detection device 17, or the like) provided at each of the winning opening and the opening. This modified example also has the same effect as the above embodiment.

  As another modification, the pachinko gaming machine 500 is provided with the first starting port 11 and the first operating port 31 vertically close to each other, and the gaming balls passing through the first operating port 31 are almost certainly (or 100%). The game area 81 (a game nail, a windmill, or the like) may be configured to enter the first starting port 11. Further, the game area 81 may be configured such that the game balls entering the first starting port 11 are limited to the game balls passing through the first operation port 31.

in this case,
The standby demo transition time may be set so that the average fluctuation time for the four special symbols (in this case, special figure 1) to be held + the standby demo transition time> the maximum fluctuation time of the normal symbol four reserved symbols. For example, if the maximum fluctuation time of four holdings of ordinary symbols is 45 seconds and the average fluctuation time for digesting four holdings of special symbols is 20 seconds, the standby demo transition time is longer than 25 seconds (for example, 30 seconds, etc.). ) May be set. In this modification, the same effect as in the above embodiment can be obtained.

  The present invention has been described based on the first embodiment. The first embodiment is an exemplification, and it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. Hereinafter, modified examples will be described.

  Modification 1 will be described. As described in part also in the first embodiment, the effect determination means 303 displays the hold charge effect when the normal electric accessory 90 is opened with the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state. You may. Then, during the display of the hold charge effect, the effect determination unit 303 may reduce (wipe) the variable effect of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the change of the special figure 1. For example, the fluctuation effect of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 may be displayed in a smaller size than the reserved charge effect. Further, the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 may be displayed in a size smaller than the display size when the hold charge effect is not executed.

  Similarly to the first embodiment, the variation time of the special figure 1 in the normal game during the working hours is shorter than the average variation time of the special figure 1 in the normal game in the normal state (3 seconds in the first embodiment). ). In the first modification, the effect determination unit 303 continuously displays the big hit end demonstration and the pending charge effect from the end of the last round in the special game to the end of the first change of the special figure 2 in the time reduction. The effect deciding means 303 does not display the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the change of the special figure 1 while displaying the pending charge effect in the normal game during the time reduction.

  During the working hours, the effect deciding means 303 hides the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and only displays the simple pattern (smaller than the normal decorative symbol 61) as a result of the fluctuating effect. Symbol). Alternatively, only the result of hit or miss may be indicated by a simple symbol. In addition, when the symbol big hit of special figure 1 occurs during working hours, the effect determination means 303 may notify the symbol big hit by the operation of the special accessory described in the first embodiment.

  As described above, the effect determining means 303 of the first modification reduces the visibility of the fluctuating effect of the special figure 1 during the working hours by further lowering the visibility than during the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 accompanying the first normal symbol hit in the normal time. Display. As described above, when the importance of the variable effect in the special figure 1 is relatively low, the variable effect is displayed in an inconspicuous mode or is not displayed, so that the player can obtain profits such as a hold charge effect. Can be presented with emphasis on other productions that are more important to obtain.

  Modification 2 relating to the second starting port 12 will be described. FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the starting port unit 510. FIG. The starting port unit 510 is a component in which the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, and the plurality of general winning ports 33 are integrated. The starting port unit 510 is provided below the center decoration 64. That is, the second starting port 12 of the present modification is provided at the lower center of the game area 81. FIG. 45 is a top view of the starting port unit 510, and the lower side is the front.

  FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of the starting port unit 510, specifically, a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. The left-hit channel 512 is a flow channel that guides the left-hit game ball to the left-out port 514. The right-handed flow channel 516 is a flow channel that guides the right-hit game ball to the right out port 518. Game nails, windmills, and the like in the game area 81 are set so that the game balls are right-handed, in other words, only the game balls flowing through the right flow path of the center decoration 64 can flow into the right-hand flow path 516. .

  The slide plate 520 normally functions as the electric accessory 90, and in this modification, functions as a guide member that guides the game ball that has flowed into the right-handed flow channel 516 to the second starting port 12. When the slide plate 520 is retracted, the game ball (game ball 524 in FIG. 46) flows from the right striking channel 516 to the right out port 518 and does not flow into the second starting port 12. The blocking member 522 is interlocked with the slide plate 520 and protrudes so as to close the entrance of the second starting port 12 when the slide plate 520 is in the retracted state. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent a ball from entering the second starting port 12. When the slide plate 520 is in the protruding state, the blocking member 522 is in the retracted state, and opens the entrance of the second starting port 12.

  When a normal symbol hits, the opening / closing control means 275 of the first embodiment controls the ordinary electric accessory 90 to an open state, but the opening / closing control means 275 of the present modification sets the slide plate 520 to a protruding state. At the same time, the blocking member 522 is controlled to the retracted state. As a result, the entrance of the right out port 518 is closed, the entrance of the second starting port 12 is opened, and the game ball that has rolled in the right-handed flow channel 516 flows into the second starting port 12. According to the starting port unit 510, it is possible to normally enter the second starting port 12 at the time of hitting a symbol, while reliably preventing the ball from entering the second starting port 12 in other situations.

  Modification 3 will be described. The effect deciding means 303 does not perform the hold charge effect (the normal power release effect) when the normal symbol becomes the first hit (long opening) during the change of the hit of the special figure 1 (typically at the time of the first hit). It may be displayed. This is for displaying the reserved charge effect in the special figure 2 fluctuation during the working hours after the end of the big hit. If Tokuzu 2 reservation is saved first, Tokuzu 2 preferential digestion, the Tokuzu 1 reservation is likely to remain at the end of the extended-villa state, but at the end of the extended-village state, it will display a ball announcement notification effect. This is because it is better not to execute the variation shown in FIG. According to this configuration, the first hit of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed during the change of the special figure 1, and the special big hit of the special figure 1 is determined when the reserved charge effect is not displayed. In addition, at normal time immediately after the end of the extended-village state, if the pre-reading of Toku-zu 1 reservation is prohibited, it is difficult to display an important effect related to the fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 during the ball appearance information production. A hold charge effect may be displayed during a hit change, and the special figure 2 hold may be stored. Also, the timing when the normal symbol becomes the first hit is not fluctuating in the special figure 1 but is a notice of hit determination in the pre-reading of the special figure 1 (for example, a premium hold display, and the number of times reduced after the big hit is indefinite). May be provided even when the execution of is performed. In this way, before the hit determination reservation of Special Figure 1 is consumed, when the shift from the small hit or the big hit of Special Figure 2 to the rush state is performed, the hit of Special Figure 1 is reduced to nine times per hour. This is because

  Modification 4 will be described. When the extended holiday state (time savings + 4 reservations) ends in an irregular manner, specifically, when the time savings are ended by the seven times fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 or the suspension of Toku-zu 2 at the end of the time savings is 3 In the case where the number is less than or equal to the number, the fluctuation pattern mode of the special figure 2 in the normal state can be used for the rush effect (mode 3 to mode 7). In this case, when the first hit of the normal symbol occurs at the normal time, a fluctuation pattern for a rush effect or a fluctuation pattern for a hold charge effect is selected in the subsequent special figure 2 fluctuation, and an effect not intended in the design is displayed. Could be done.

  In order to cope with this, the effect determination means 303 determines that the special figure 1 has changed by a predetermined number of times after the shift to the time saving or after the end of the time saving (for example, after the shift of the special figure 1 has been changed 10 times after the shift to the time saving), and the rush is performed in the normal game in the normal state. When a variation pattern for an effect is selected, a variation effect pattern for a chance effect may be selected as an alternative, and a chance effect may be displayed. Alternatively, under the above circumstances, the effect determination means 303 may display a rush effect and display the effect and display of the irregular effect by a telop or the like.

  Modification 5 will be described. As described above, the time-saving game may end in any of the fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and for example, when the fluctuation pattern table of the special figure 2 is in the mode 6 selection state, If the time-saving game ends based on the change, and if the time-saving game ends based on the change of the special figure 2 when the special figure 1 is in the mode 2, the small hit is won and the ball enters the specific area. If not, control may be performed so that the mode of the fluctuation pattern table in the special figures 1 and 2 is set to “0”. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the rush effect pattern from being selected in the special figure 2 suspension generated from the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal state.

  Modification 6 will be described. In the rush effect of the first embodiment, since the time change is fixed at 9 fluctuations and one fluctuation is relatively long (10 seconds or more), it is supposed that the player performs a stop (shooting stop). Therefore, in the modified example, the number of working hours in the extended-villa state is made indefinite (for example, one of three types, one, three, five, nine, or thirteen is determined according to the design), and one variation is compared. A short time (about 5 seconds) may be used. As described above, when the stop is performed, the stop can be suppressed by setting the specification with the risk that the special figure 2 cannot be reserved.

  Modification 7 will be described. You may be comprised so that it may be easy to produce the 5th change of the special figure 2 after the end of working hours. For example, (1) the opening end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 90 may be set to the reserved upper limit number + N (N is a positive integer) in FIG. Also, (2) the symbol fixing time at the end of the time reduction may be set to the same length as the normal time or a shorter time than the normal time. In addition, (3) the ball entry sensor (second starting winning detection device 17) of the second starting port 12 is disposed at a deep position away from the entrance of the second starting port 12, and the fourth time in the special figure 2 after the time saving is completed. After the end of the fluctuation and after the end of the fixed time (after the start of the next fluctuation), a new special figure 2 reservation may easily occur. Further, the above (1) to (3) may be combined. Note that, in the case of the configuration of Modification Example 4, instead of the preferential digestion of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be drawn in parallel, or the lottery may be performed in the order of winning.

  Modification 8 will be described. The effect determining means 303 detects the presence of another small hit in the remaining hold by pre-reading at the time of the symbol change winning the small hit (at the time of the small hit V change, hereinafter referred to as “this change”). The big hit effect (for example, special game effect) of the small hit V may be displayed with a special big hit effect different from the normal big hit effect. The special jackpot effect may include a content for notifying that it has been determined that two 15R jackpots will occur. When the modification 7 is adopted, the small hit V in the special drawing 2 may be only the 15R big hit.

  Also, when the small hit V in the special map 2 is distributed to a plurality of types of big hits as in the first embodiment, the fact that the small hit V due to the fluctuation this time is the maximum profit is notified by the big hit effect, and after the big hit ends. Alternatively, a continuous effect that makes it appear as if the big hit is continuing may be displayed, and a big hit effect that makes it look like an extra hit at the next small hit V may be displayed. In this case, the number of rounds of the next small hit V (additional amount per extra) is unknown at the time of the previous small hit V and cannot be reported. May be notified of the additional amount (number of rounds) per extra at the start of the symbol change related to the small hit V.

  Modification 9 will be described. Here, a specific example of the effect will be described. 47 (a) and (b) of FIG. 47 show a chance effect in normal time (an effect which is displayed in a normal game in a normal state with a long opening of a normal symbol, and can also be called a full power opening effect, a rush effect, and a hold charge effect). )). FIG. 47A shows a mode of the chance effect 530 in a case where the variable effect of the special figure 1 is not a predetermined content having a high degree of expectation, such as super reach. In the chance effect 530 of FIG. 47 (a), a content for prompting a right-hand drive and a special figure 2 reserved image 532 indicating the number of reserved figures (two in the figure) of the special figure 2 are displayed in a large size in the center of the screen. On the other hand, the fluctuation effect 536 of the special figure 1 that has been largely displayed in the center of the screen before the display of the chance effect 530 is reduced and displayed on the wipe 534 which is a small area at the corner of the screen. In addition, even in a situation in which the fluctuation effect of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is not executed, the normal standby screen is wiped and displayed, and even if the fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 and the fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 are started, a chance effect is produced. Until the end, the floating effect is displayed on the wipe screen as it is.

  FIG. 47B shows a display mode of the chance effect 530 in a case where the variable effect of the special figure 1 has a predetermined content with a high degree of expectation, such as super reach. In the figure, a super-reach variation effect 536 including a super-reach object 538 such as a battle image of a character is displayed large in the center of the screen. On the other hand, the chance effect 530 is displayed small on the wipe 534 in the corner of the screen. FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b) show the proper use of the chance effect at the normal time, and the timing of the determination of the proper use is selectively used in the manner of the variable effect executed at the start timing of the chance effect. For example, in the fluctuation in which the variable effect of Tokuzu 1 becomes super reach, before the shift to the super reach, the variable effect is executed with the wipe display shown in FIG. 47A, and the wipe screen is displayed on the wipe screen even after the shift to the super reach. (The return to the super reach screen at the end of the chance effect, that is, at the end of the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 90). The present invention is not limited to this example, and the specification may be changed from the state of FIG. 47A to the state of FIG. In addition, it is possible to change the mode of the chance production depending on whether or not a high expectation pattern such as super reach is selected as the variation production pattern of the special figure 1, but if configured as such, The specification is such that the transition to the high expected performance can be detected first immediately after the start of the fluctuation before the shift to the super reach.

  FIG. 48 shows an example of a chance effect during a time-saving game (for example, an effect displayed when the fluctuation pattern mode is mode 3, which can also be called a hold charge effect). Also in the chance effect 530 during the time-saving game, the content for urging the player to right-hand and the special figure 2 reserved image 532 are displayed. On the other hand, as described in the first embodiment, during the time reduction game, the fluctuation effect of the special figure 1 is not displayed, and the chance effect appears as the fluctuation effect of the first time reduction game of the special figure 2 in the specification. I have. Therefore, it differs from the normal chance production in that the floating production 536 is not displayed by the wipe 534. The reason why a chance production is given as a variation production of Tokuzu 2 is that, especially in the case of one time reduction, if a variation production that only informs the pass / fail is executed, four games are held. Cannot fully understand the game, which may disadvantage the player. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation production in the case where the first fluctuation of the time saving of the special map 2 is a hit, the chance production may be not executed, or the production for the notification of success or failure may be performed after the chance production. You may.

(Second embodiment)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. In particular, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has a feature related to the control or effect around the small hit and big hit in addition to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. The following description focuses on differences from the base technology and the first embodiment, and a description of common points is omitted. Further, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the base technology and the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  An outline of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has the following five main features.

Features 1. Payouts in small hit games:
Conventional machines equipped with a small jackpot development jackpot use two winning jackpots for obtaining a V having a specific area, and winning jackpots for acquiring a large number of coins. Since the opening of the special winning opening for V acquisition and the opening of the special winning opening for winning balls are due to the operation of different special electric auditors, the number of prize balls and the number of balls (specified count) in the special winning opening for V acquisition Number) is configured to be small, the small hit game is ended early, and the big hit game is shifted early. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 (small jackpot development jackpot equipped machine) of the second embodiment, the number of special electric accessory (large winning prize) is one. By opening the big winning opening at most 15 times in the small hit game, many prize balls can be obtained in the small hit game, and new gaming properties and amusement are realized.

Features 2. Small hit game production:
After the V prize in the small hit game (that is, after acquiring the right of the big hit), performing an effect for causing the player to understand the possibility of obtaining the winning ball of the small hit game (ie, the first round of the small hit development big hit). Prompts the player to fire.

Features 3. Production of small hits and big hits:
From the first round of the small hit development big hit (that is, the small hit game), it is expected that a prize ball corresponding to one round of the big hit is expected to be obtained. , The display of “one round” is started in order to notify that a prize ball equivalent to one round during the big hit can be obtained.

Features 4. Production at the start of the big hit in the small hit development big hit:
Between the first round (small hit game) and the second round (first unit game of special game) in the small hit development big hit, an effect indicating the magnitude of the profit that the player can obtain is executed.

Features5. Small hit look-ahead:
By reading the reservation of the small hits in advance, the fact that the next small hit development big hit can be acquired in a short time is notified before the current small hit development big hit ends.

Hereinafter, the above five features will be sequentially described.
<Feature 1. Outcome acquisition in small hit games>
FIG. 49 shows the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment. The second starting port 12 has an ordinary electric accessory 90 that is a ball-entering variation mechanism that can be displaced so that the ball entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state. The ordinary electric accessory 90 is also called a so-called electric tulip (electric tuy), and various shapes and specifications can be applied. The ordinary electric accessory 90 may be of a sliding type (for example, a specification in which a sliding member advances forward or retracts backward to facilitate entering a ball), a tulip type, or a tongue type.

  The special game control means 260 activates the special electric accessory 556 at the start of each unit game in the special game. The special game control means 260 controls the opening / closing control means 275 to control the specific area opening / closing solenoid 506 to open the special winning opening 20 a predetermined number of times. The small hitting game control means 265 activates the special electric accessory 556 once at the start of the small hitting game. The small hitting game control means 265 controls the opening / closing control means 275 to control the specific area opening / closing solenoid 506 to open the large winning opening 20 a plurality of times during one small hitting game.

  The special winning opening 20 includes an opening / closing member (slide plate 540 described later) for switching between the open state and the closed state of the special winning opening 20. When the special winning opening 20 is in the closed state, the game ball rolls on the opening / closing member. FIG. 50 is an external perspective view schematically showing the configuration of the special winning opening 20. As shown in FIG. The slide plate 540 can be said to be an opening / closing door of the special winning opening 20. The slide plate 540 has a closed state covering the big winning opening 20 (box-shaped member 542) as shown in FIG. 50 (a), and an open state retracted to the back as shown in FIG. 50 (b). Displaceable between them. When the slide plate 540 is closed, the special winning opening 20 is also closed, and when the slide plate 540 is open, the special winning opening 20 is also open.

  The figure shows an example of a configuration for reducing the momentum (rolling speed) of a game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 of the special winning opening 20. The slide plate 540 provided on the upper surface of the special winning opening 20 is provided so as to be slightly inclined to the left with respect to the horizontal direction. As a result, the game balls rolling on the slide plate 540 tend to accelerate as they are, and even if the slide plate 540 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the game balls cannot be guided well into the box-shaped member 542. There is a fear.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by moving the game balls rolling on the slide plate 540 in a zigzag manner, the moving distance of the game balls is increased, and the momentum of the game balls rolling on the slide plate 540 is reduced. In this way, the residence time of the game ball on the slide plate 540 is increased. As a result, even when the special winning opening 20 repeatedly opens for a short period of time, the game ball stays on the slide plate 540 for a long time, and the game ball enters during the short opening. Make it more likely.

  FIG. 50A shows the special winning opening 20 when the slide plate 540 is in the closed state. As shown in the drawing, within a range in which the game ball rolls on the slide plate 540, a plurality of protrusions 546a are provided on the game board side, and a plurality of protrusions are provided on the transparent plate side facing the game board. 546b is provided. The plurality of protrusions 546a on the game board side and the plurality of protrusions 546b on the transparent plate side are alternately arranged along the flow path on the slide plate 540. The plurality of projections 546b on the transparent plate side are attached to a transparent transparent plate 544 extending upward from the box-shaped member 542. By not directly fixing the plurality of protrusions 546b to the transparent plate 103 covering the front side of the game board 80, the protrusions 516b are exposed to the outside when the transparent plate 103 is opened for the purpose of maintenance of the gaming machine or the like. Can be prevented from becoming easily damaged. In addition, by configuring the transparent plate 544 with a transparent member, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game ball entering the special winning opening 20 from being impaired. In the modification, a protrusion or a recess for forming a zigzag flow path may be formed on the slide plate 540.

  By providing the plurality of protrusions 546a and 546b alternately on the slide plate 540, the game balls can be made to progress in a zigzag manner so that the momentum of the game balls tends to decelerate. For example, game balls are continuously fired by right-handing toward the special winning opening 20 (for example, one ball is fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds), roll on the slide plate 540, and fall to the left of the special winning opening 20. In the case where the speed is decelerated so as to require a time of 2 to 3 seconds, about 3 to 5 game balls are always present on the slide plate 540. As a result, even when the slide plate 540 is opened for a short time, a plurality of game balls can be guided together inside the special winning opening 20 as shown in FIG. The game balls that have fallen into the box-shaped member 542 pass through the passage 548 one by one to detect a winning.

  The number and duration of the game balls staying on the slide plate 540 can be adjusted by changing the length and inclination angle of the special winning opening 20, the number and interval of the projections 546a and 546b, and the like. In the present embodiment, when the continuous firing of right-handed shots is continued, one to three game balls are designed to stay on the slide plate 540, and the slide plate 540 is held for a short time (for example, 0.052 seconds). Is adjusted so that approximately one to three game balls enter the inside of the box-shaped member 542 during one short opening time. Therefore, according to the configuration of the special winning opening 20 of the present embodiment, if an appropriate firing operation (for example, right-handed) is performed at an appropriate timing (for example, after a right-handed notification) during the small hitting game, the game ball can be turned into a special winning opening. 20 can almost certainly be made to enter the ball.

  The configuration of the special winning opening 20 shown in FIG. 50 is merely an example, and the special winning opening 20 having a different structure from the illustrated example may be provided. For example, the opening / closing member (slide plate 540) of the special winning opening 20 may include a plurality of opening / closing members provided at distant positions, and the plurality of opening / closing members may be controlled to open and close simultaneously.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram schematically showing an internal configuration of the special winning opening 20, and particularly shows a configuration of a lower region 550 of the special winning opening 20. The slide plate 540 opens and closes the entrance of the special winning opening 20 according to the control of the special winning opening solenoid 92. The special winning opening solenoid 92 controls the slide plate 540 to be in an open state, and operates the slide plate 540 so as to open the entrance of the special winning opening 20 so that game balls can flow into the special winning opening 20. And The special winning opening solenoid 92 controls the slide plate 540 to be in a closed state, and operates the sliding plate 540 so as to close the entrance of the special winning opening 20, so that game balls cannot flow into the special winning opening 20. And The game ball that has entered the special winning opening 20 once flows leftward and flows into the lower area 550 of the second special winning opening 22 from the passing opening 548 that can pass one ball at a time. The special winning detection device 25 detects a game ball entering the special winning opening 20 to give a prize ball, and specifically detects a game ball that has passed through the passing opening 548 and dropped into the lower region 550. I do.

  A discharge path 554 is provided in a lower area 550 of the special winning opening 20. The discharging path 554 is a path for discharging the game ball that has entered the special winning opening 20 to the outside of the special winning opening 20, and is typically a path for discharging the gaming ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 500. . In the lower area 550, a specific area opening / closing device 552 is provided in the middle of a flow path from the passage port 548 to the discharge path 554. The specific area serving as a condition for transition to the small hit development big hit corresponds to an area below the specific area opening / closing device 552, and can pass when the specific area opening / closing apparatus 552 is opened, and the specific area opening / closing apparatus 552 is closed. If you do, you will not be able to pass.

  The specific area opening / closing device 552 operates so as to switch between an open state that allows passage to the specific area and a closed state that disables passage to the specific area. The specific area opening / closing device 552 has a slide member or a valve member that operates according to the control of the specific area opening / closing solenoid 506. The specific area opening / closing device 552 operates so as to open the flow path to the specific area, so that the open state allows game balls to pass to the specific area, and operates to close the flow path to the specific area. As a result, a closed state is established in which the game ball cannot pass to the specific area. The specific area opening / closing device 552 shifts to the open state with the opening of the special winning opening 20, and after the special winning opening 20 is closed, it is expected that the internal game balls flow down to the position of the specific area opening / closing device 552. An operation is performed so as to wait for the design value and close the large winning opening with a delay from the transition to the closed state.

  The specific area passage detection device 504 is provided below the specific area opening / closing device 552, and detects the passage of the game ball in the specific area. The specific area passage detection device 504 generates, when a game ball passes through a specific area, specific area passage information indicating the passage. Upon receiving the specific area passage information, the ball entry determining means 201 of the main board 200 determines that the game ball has passed the specific area.

  In the second embodiment, both the unit game in the special game and the small hitting game are ended when the number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 reaches the same predetermined number (10 in the embodiment). In other words, the condition for ending the operation of the special electric accessory 556 in the unit game of the special game and the condition for ending the operation of the special electric accessory 556 in the small hit game both reach the number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 of ten. Including. More specifically, the special game control means 260 terminates one unit game of the special game when a predetermined time has elapsed or when the number of balls in the special winning opening 20 reaches ten. Is terminated as is satisfied. The small hitting game control means 265 terminates the small hitting game when the predetermined time has elapsed or when the number of balls entered into the special winning opening 20 reaches ten, assuming that the termination condition is satisfied. Note that the V prize is not a condition for terminating the small hit game, and the small hit game continues even after the V prize until the termination condition is satisfied.

  One opening time of the special winning opening 20 in the small hitting game is set to a short time in which a game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 can enter the special winning opening 20. In addition, the small hitting game control means 265 opens the big winning opening 20 for a short time through the opening / closing control means 275 in one small hitting game (during one operation of the special electric accessory 556). A predetermined upper limit number of times can be repeated. This upper limit number is equal to or more than the number of balls (ie, 10) that enter the special winning opening 20 which is a condition for terminating one unit game and a small hit game in the special game (in other words, a condition for terminating the operation of the special electric accessory 556). Is the number of times. In the embodiment, the number is 15 times, which is larger than the number of entered balls. When the number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 during the small hitting game reaches ten, the small hitting game control means 265 determines whether the number of times of opening the large winning opening 20 during the small hitting game is less than the upper limit number (15 times). At that time, the special winning opening 20 is closed, and the small hitting game is ended.

  The small hitting game control means 265 controls the short-time opening of the special winning opening 20 (opening time 0.052 seconds) and the opening of the special winning opening 20 for the first to twelfth opening of the special winning opening 20 in the small hitting game. The setting of the short-time closing (closing time 1 second) is repeated. In addition, the small hit game control means 265 determines the thirteenth and fourteenth opening of the special winning opening 20 in the small hitting game for a short time opening of the special winning opening 20 (opening time 0.052 seconds) and the special winning opening 20 For a long time (close time 4 seconds). In addition, the small hitting game control means 265 executes the operation of the opening time of 0.052 seconds for the fifteenth opening of the special winning opening 20 in the small hitting game, and when the fifteenth opening is completed, or the operation termination condition. When the game ball of the specified count number is entered, the closing is executed for 3.5 seconds.

  According to the configuration of the feature 1, only one large winning opening is arranged in the game area 81. In other words, the large winning opening for obtaining the V winning and the large winning opening for increasing the number of winning balls are shared. Thus, it is possible to secure a wide board area for displaying an effect, activating an accessory, and the like, thereby enhancing the interest of the effect. In the small hitting game, the same special electric accessory 556 as in the special game is operated, so that the payout is performed with the same number of prize balls, and the small hitting game is controlled in the opening mode described above. Based on this, it is possible to expect a predetermined number of balls, which is the condition for terminating the operation of the special electric auditors, so that a ball equivalent to one unit game of the special game can be obtained, and a sufficient number of balls for the player can be obtained. Can give a feeling.

  As described in connection with FIG. 50, when the player continues to shoot the game ball, the game ball stays on the slide plate 540 of the special winning opening 20, and therefore, once the large winning opening 20 in the small hitting game. Even if the opening time is short, at least one ball can be expected to enter. However, there is a possibility that the right hit of the game ball may be delayed, for example, because the player does not notice the start of the small hit game. Therefore, the number of times the large winning opening 20 is opened in the small hitting game is set to a number of times equal to or more than the number of balls entering the large winning opening 20 which is a condition for ending the small hitting game (in the embodiment, the number of times larger than the number of winning balls). Thus, in the small hit game, it is easy to obtain a payout equivalent to one unit game of the special game.

  Further, as for the thirteenth and fourteenth opening of the big winning opening 20 in the small hitting game, the closing time is relatively lengthened to promote the player's awareness, and the small hitting game without firing the game ball. Is ended, that is, the chance of acquiring a small hit jackpot is missed, or the time saving is ended based on the occurrence of the small hit game, and the occurrence of the small hit (small hit V) is originally high probability. It becomes easy to prevent the variation of the second special symbol that can be received from becoming difficult to execute. However, if the number of times of closing for a long time is increased too much, the number of out-balls (so-called wasted balls) that pass through the slide plate 540 of the special winning opening 20 when the player continuously fires the game balls increases. Therefore, by setting the large winning port 20 to be closed for a long time twice in the small hitting game, both the suppression of the end of the small hitting game without the V winning and the suppression of the increase of the out ball can be achieved.

  In the second embodiment, the opening time of the special winning opening 20 during the small hitting game is set to 0.052 seconds for each of the opening times. However, as a modified example, at least one opening time However, it may be different from other opening times. For example, the small hitting game control means 265 may open the special winning opening 20 for 0.052 seconds 13 times and open the special winning opening 20 for 0.104 seconds once during the small hitting game. . That is, it is only necessary to execute the opening at least ten times at which it is assumed that at least one of the game balls rolling on the slide plate 540 of the special winning opening 20 will enter the special winning opening 20.

<Feature 2. Small hit game production>
The effect determination means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display a predetermined effect image during the small hit game, and changes the display mode of the effect image in accordance with the ball entering the special winning opening 20 during the small hit game. . This effect image includes a first effect image and a second effect image. In the second embodiment, the effect determination means 303 determines whether to display the first effect image or the second effect image by a predetermined effect lottery (in other words, at a predetermined probability). As a modified example, the effect determination means 303 may be configured to display only one of the first effect image and the second effect image during the small hit game.

  The first effect image is an image corresponding to the number of balls entered into the special winning opening 20, which is a condition for terminating the small hit game. As described above, the number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 (ie, the prescribed count number), which is a condition for terminating the small winning game, can be said to be the upper limit number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 during the small hitting game. 10 balls are the same as the number of balls entered into the special winning opening 20, which is a condition for terminating a unit game in the game.

  FIG. 52 shows an example of the effect during the small hit game. The effect determination means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display a small hit game effect screen 560 during execution of the small hit game. The small hitting game effect screen 560 includes a right hit instruction image 562 for prompting the player to make a right hit, a V notification image 568, a round image 564, and a ball entry number notification image 566 as a first effect image. The V notification image 568 and the round image 564 will be described later. The number-of-balls-informed image 566 includes the same number of treasure-box images as the number of balls (10 balls) entering the special winning opening 20 which is a condition for terminating the small hit game. In FIG. 38, an unopened treasure chest is indicated by a rectangular parallelepiped, and an opened treasure chest is indicated by a star.

  The effect determination means 303 switches one unopened treasure box image to an opened treasure box image each time a ball entry into the special winning opening 20 is detected by the ball entry determination means 201 during the small hit game. . This suggests to the player that 10 balls can be entered into the special winning opening 20 during the small hitting game, in other words, that many balls can be obtained during the small hitting game. The player can be encouraged to fire a game ball during a hit game.

  The second effect image will be described. The second effect image is an image (hereinafter, also referred to as an “expectation image”) indicating the degree of expectation in which a high profit (possibility of obtaining many balls) is suggested in a subsequent suggestion effect. The expectation degree image can also be said to be an image suggesting that there is a possibility of obtaining a lot of balls in a later game. The details will be described below.

  Like the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment (FIG. 42), the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment also stops in a mode in which the symbol fluctuation indicates a small hit (hereinafter, referred to as a "small hit symbol"). In this case, the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit varies depending on the small hit design. In the second embodiment, the number of rounds of the small hit development jackpot is allocated to one of 10 rounds and four rounds in accordance with the small hit symbol (the first round is a small hit game).

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, the number of times that time savings are continued (in other words, the number of times that the electric chew support is continued) differs depending on the small hit symbol. Specifically, if the small hit symbol is of a specific type, it becomes a small hit development big hit with 10 rounds and 100 time saving continuation times. It is a jackpot development jackpot, or a small jackpot development jackpot of 4 rounds and 9 times shortened. If the number of time saving continuations is 100, the next small hit occurs almost certainly during the time saving (during the rush production), and the villa is connected.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, in the case of the symbol big hit in the special figure 1, according to the big hit symbol, (1) a big hit with 10 rounds and 9 times of reduced time, (2) a round of 4 times and reduced time. It is divided into 9 big hits and (3) a big hit with 4 rounds and 1 time saving continuation. The distribution probabilities of (1) to (3) in the embodiment are 1%, 49%, and 50%. The symbol jackpot of the special figure 2 is a jackpot of four rounds and nine times of working hours.

  The effect deciding means 303, when the V winning occurs in the small hitting game, after the small hitting game is over, the player determines in accordance with the type of the symbol indicating the small hitting (that is, the type of the small hitting symbol when the symbol change is stopped). Display any one of a plurality of types of suggestive effects that suggest possible benefits. For example, a plurality of types of suggestion effects are associated with any of a plurality of types of small hit symbols, for each number of rounds of the small hit development big hit determined by the small hit design, for each number of time savings after the end of the small hit development big hit, or , May be provided for each combination of the number of rounds and the number of times saved. In addition, the contents (motifs, characters, colors, etc.) of the plurality of types of suggested effects differ depending on the amount of profit that can be obtained by the player. The suggestion effect will be described later in the description of the feature 4.

  The effect deciding means 303 is an expectation image showing an expectation at which a high profit (for example, 10 rounds of big hits or 100 time savings is suggested) is suggested in the above suggested effect during the small hit game. Is displayed. For example, the effect determination means 303 may display an expectation image instead of the number-of-balls-informed image 566 on the small-hit game effect screen 560 shown in FIG. It may be displayed. In addition, the V notification image 568, which is an image for notifying that a V prize has been won, that is, an image for notifying the jackpot right acquisition, may be used as the expectation degree image.

  The effect determination means 303 changes the image of the degree of expectation in accordance with the ball entering the special winning opening 20 during the small hit game. The effect determination means 303 may change any one of the shape, pattern, and color of the expected degree image according to the ball entering the special winning opening 20 during the small hit game. For example, (1) the expected image is the V notification image 568, and (2) the colors of the V notification image are red, orange, yellow, green, and white in order from the one with the highest expected degree of profit obtainable by the player. It is assumed that (3) the small hit symbol corresponds to 10 rounds and the number of times of saving time 100 times. In this case, the effect determination means 303 may initially display the V notification image in white when a V winning is detected in the small hit game. After the V prize, each time a predetermined number (for example, one or two balls) of entrances to the special winning opening 20 is detected, the effect determination means 303 changes the color of the V notification image to green, yellow, orange, or red. May be changed in this order.

  In the above example, when the number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 during the small hit game increases, the V notification image is finally displayed in red, so that the player's expectation for the subsequent suggested effects and profit state Can be increased. As described above, as the number of balls entering the special winning opening during the small hit game increases, the accuracy of the expected degree image increases, in other words, the reliability of the content of the suggestion effect indicated by the expected degree image increases. That is, by entering the large winning opening during the small hit game, it is possible to identify the degree of expectation that a high profit is suggested by the later suggested effect, so that the game ball is played during the small hit game (particularly after the V winning). Can be provided to the player. In addition, even in the small hitting game, the player can feel the gaming ability to obtain a payout corresponding to one round of the special game.

  The V notification image 568 is an image displayed after the detection of a game ball by the specific area passage detection device 504 inside the special winning opening 20. When the display is started, the game ball already entered in the small hit game is displayed. Since the number (remaining number of possible balls) may differ depending on the situation, the initial display is unified in the way of entering the ball, such as white (or green from the beginning as a chance-up pattern that finally becomes red or more), and the subsequent entry The mode that changes according to the ball is displayed by skipping the change mode in the middle when changing according to the prize, according to a predetermined change pattern from the second ball entry to the 10th ball entry. Can be adopted. In this case, “white (initial)”, “green (3)”, “yellow (5)”, “orange (7)” (the numbers indicate the number of game balls that entered during the small hit game In the case of the pattern (shown), when passage is detected by the specific area passage detection device 504 on the fourth ball, “white” is displayed as the V notification image, and the V notification image is displayed when the next game ball enters (the fifth ball). To “yellow”. By adopting the method of skipping the display mode in the middle as described above, it is not necessary to have a production determination table based on the number of the ball that has passed the specific area, and when entering the ball, it is fixed as a lottery result. Since it is displayed, whether or not the display of the initial mode is a chance pattern and the final change mode can be identified. It should be noted that the pattern that changes in response to the ball entering the special winning opening 20 may additionally have a pattern defined for the eleventh ball and the twelfth ball that is called over winning with a specified count or more (normally). The tenth ball corresponds to the final mode, and the effect pattern is set so that the over-winning portion is equivalent to the tenth ball or an exceptional premier appears.)

  Further, the effect determination means 303 may change the expectation image so that the expected image shows a content different from the content of the suggested effect at a predetermined probability (for example, 30% or the like). For example, when the content of the later suggested effect suggests high profit, the image may be changed to an expected degree image indicating that the expected degree is low. Similarly, when the content of the later suggested effect suggests a low profit, the image may be changed to an expected degree image indicating that the expected degree is high. As a result, the player's expectation and anxiety can be mixed, or the player can have an unexpected feeling, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

  A modified example related to the feature 2 will be described. The sub-board 300 may further include prize ball counting means for counting the number of prize balls paid out (number of payout balls). The payout control board 155 or the main board 200 may notify the sub board 300 of the number of paid out prize balls. The prize ball counting means may count the number of prize balls paid out during the small hit game and the special game based on the number of prize balls notified from the payout control board 155 or the main board 200. Alternatively, the ball entry determining means 201 of the main board 200 may notify the sub board 300 of information indicating the entry of a game ball into each winning port. The prize ball counting means may count the number of prize balls paid out during the small hit game and the special game based on the information indicating the entry into the special winning opening 20 notified from the main board 200. . The number of prize balls when one ball enters the special winning opening 20 is 12.

  The effect determining means 303 of the present modification displays the small hit game effect screen 560 as shown in FIG. 52 during the small hit game, and displays the small hit game effect screen 560 on the small hit game effect screen by the prize ball counting means. Acquired prize ball information indicating the number of prize balls paid out during the game is displayed. Here, the acquired prize ball information is in the form of “○ / ×”. “From 発” indicates the number of prize balls paid out so far in this hit. “× departure” indicates the maximum number of prize balls that can be paid out this time, in other words, the maximum number of prize balls that the player can acquire in this time.

  As described above, the small hit game according to the second embodiment is designed so that a prescribed count number (ie, 10 balls) can be entered while the special winning opening 20 is repeatedly opened 15 times for a short time. Therefore, “120 shots”, which is the number of prize balls at the specified count number (12 prize balls × 10 hit balls), may be displayed in “× shots” during the small hit game. However, since the small hit game is a specification that repeats short opening, and the winning ball is not surely acquired, the effect determination means 303 of the present modified example is configured such that, during the small hit game, both the “O” and “X” The initial value is set to "0 shots", and 12 shots are added each time a ball enters the special winning opening 20. This makes it difficult for the player to feel dissatisfied even if ten balls do not enter the special winning opening 20 during the small hit game due to the opening / closing timing of the special winning opening 20 or the like.

  As will be described later in connection with the feature 4, the effect determination means 303 displays a suggestion effect indicating the type of the big hit (the number of rounds, etc.) at the start of the special game in the small hit development big hit. The effect deciding means 303 of the present modification updates the “×” in the acquired prize ball information to a value corresponding to the number of rounds at the timing of displaying the suggested effect, in other words, at the timing of suggesting the number of rounds. Specifically, the value of “× departure” up to that point (that is, the number of winning prize balls during the small hitting game) is (the number of rounds−1) × the value of 12 prize balls per ball entry × the value of 10 ball entries. To “×”. For example, in the case of 10 rounds, a value obtained by adding 1080 shots to the number of acquired prize balls during the small hit game is set to “× shots”.

  According to the configuration of this modified example, by presenting the number of acquired prize balls to the player also in the first round of the small hit development big hit (small hit game), it becomes easy for the player to have a sufficient shot feeling. During the special game, the effect determination means 303 may execute a round promotion effect of increasing the number of rounds of the special game in appearance (for example, increasing from 4 rounds to 10 rounds). In this case, the effect deciding means 303 may update “× fire” in accordance with the apparent number of rounds (add “720 shots” for a difference of 6 rounds when a promotion effect occurs). Further, the acquired prize ball information may further include the total number of prize balls during the consecutive holidays (that is, while repeating the jackpot acquisition during the working hours), and the effect determination means 303 determines the number of consecutive prize balls counted by the prize ball counting means. May be displayed as a total number of prize balls.

<Feature 3. Small hit development big hit production>
As shown in the small hit game rendering screen 560 of FIG. 52, when a V winning occurs during the small hitting game, the rendering determining means 303 displays a V notification image 568 which is a rendering for notifying that the V winning has been achieved. In addition, the effect determination unit 303 displays a round image 564 indicating the cumulative number of times the special electric auditors product 556 has been operated from the small hit game to the special game, triggered by the V winning in the small hit game.

  The effect determining means 303 displays a round image 564 indicating that the first operation of the special electric auditors character 556 is performed during the small hit game after the V prize. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, a round image 564 indicating the first round is displayed. During the small hitting game, the slide plate 540 of the special winning opening 20 is opened up to 15 times at maximum, but the number of times of operation of the special electric accessory 556 is one. If the small hit symbol corresponds to 10 rounds of big hits, a round image 564 indicating the 10th round is displayed in the last round of the small hit development big hit.

  According to the feature 3, even during the small hitting game, an image indicating "the first round" or the like is displayed, that is, a series of count display is performed from the small hitting game to the special game. Thereby, it is suggested that a payout equivalent to one round of the special game can be obtained in the small hitting game, and the player can be encouraged to fire the game ball even after the V prize during the small hitting game. In the case of the small hit game and no V winning, the second and subsequent rounds (special game) are not executed. Therefore, by displaying the round image 564 on the condition of the V winning, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the second and subsequent rounds will continue in the absence of the V winning.

<Feature 4. Production at the start of the big hit in the small hit development big hit>
As described above in part, the type of the first profit that can be obtained by the player in the special game executed when the player wins the V in the small hit game, and the player in the normal game after the end of the special game, At least one of the types of the second profit that can be obtained differs depending on the type of the small hit symbol at the time of stopping the symbol change. The first benefit is, for example, the number of rounds of small hits and big hits, and includes 10 rounds and 4 rounds in the second embodiment. The second benefit is, for example, the number of times of reduced working hours, and includes 100 times and 9 times in the second embodiment.

  When the V prize is won during the small hit game, the effect deciding means 303 sets the big win port in the special game executed following the small hit game after the last opening of the big win port 20 in the small hit game is completed. Until the first opening of 20, a suggestion effect indicating the type of profit that the player can acquire is displayed according to the type of the small hit symbol that triggered the small hit game. The suggested effect is at least one of the number of actuations of the special electric accessory 556 in the small hit development big hit, the number of actuations of the continuous actor actuation device in the special game, and the number of time savings after the end of the special game (for example, 100 times, 9 times, etc.). The content may indicate one or any combination. For example, the suggestion effect may include a content for displaying a bonus name “XX bonus”, “XX bonus”, or “△△ chance” corresponding to a combination of the number of rounds of the small hit and the large hit and the number of times of reduced time.

  Further, the suggestion effect may include a button effect. For example, the suggestion effect may display a content that prompts the player to operate the effect button 109 or the cross key 110. When a predetermined button operation (for example, pressing the button a predetermined number of times or more) is input during the display of the suggestion effect, the effect determination means 303 indicates the type of profit that the player can obtain, for example, the bonus described above. The name may be displayed on the suggestion effect screen.

  FIG. 53 shows the display timing of the suggested effect. The effect determination means 303 determines the closing period (3.5 seconds) after the end of the last opening of the special winning opening 20 in the small hitting game + the start demonstration time of the continuous operation device for the accessory (the demonstration start time of the continuous operation of the role) (10. 5 seconds), in other words, a suggestion effect is displayed between the first round and the second round of the small hit development big hit. Note that FIG. 39 shows a situation in which the special winning opening 20 in the small hitting game is opened 15 times. However, if the number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 reaches 10 during the small hitting game, at that time, The small hitting game is completed, and a closing period of 3.5 seconds is provided after the opening is completed regardless of the number of times of opening. Further, the expectation effect production described in the feature 2 is executed before the suggestion effect.

  According to the feature 4, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by suggesting the types of profits that the player can obtain in connection with the small hit development and the big hit. In addition, by displaying the suggested effect on the condition of the V winning in the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the effect content and the actual profit from being inconsistent when the V winning does not occur in the small hit game.

  A modified example related to the feature 4 will be described. If there is no V winning in the small hit game, the effect determination means 303 determines the closing time (3.5 seconds) after the end of the last opening of the big winning port 20 in the small hit game + a demonstration of the end of the small hit game (for example, 0. (1 second), a failure effect may be displayed. The failed production may be content that suggests or informs that it does not develop into a jackpot, or content that suggests or informs that the acquisition of the expected profit has failed. In FIG. 53 of the second embodiment, the end demonstration time of the small hit game is not set when the V prize is won. (0.1 seconds when no V win) is canceled (it should not be executed as "0 seconds" or substantially not executed as "0.004 seconds (1 interrupt)"). is there.

  Another modification related to the feature 4 will be described. The effect deciding means 303 has a special content that suggests that the occurrence of the next small hit development jackpot (in other words, a small hit development big hit renjo) is substantially determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect may be displayed as a suggestive effect. The special effect may include, for example, a display of “VV bonus” indicating that a bonus (small hit development big hit or big hit) is continuously generated. The predetermined condition may be that the occurrence of the next small hit development big hit is substantially determined. Specifically, (1) As described in the feature 5, there is information that is a small hit in the hold due to the prefetching, and (2) The current big hit (small hit symbol) is given the number of times of shortening 100 times. It may be what is done.

  Another modification related to the feature 4 will be described. The effect determination means 303 determines whether or not the suggestion effect can be performed, that is, after the last opening of the special winning game 20 in the small hit game is completed, the special winning game 20 in the special game executed following the small hit game. Until the first opening, one or both of the music selection effect and the character selection effect may be displayed in addition to the suggestion effect (displayed simultaneously with the execution of the suggestion effect or after the end of the suggestion effect). The music selection effect may be an effect in which a song to be output from the speaker during one or both of the special game and the normal game after the special game is completed can be selected from a plurality of candidates. The character selection effect is an effect in which a character that appears in the effect during one or both of the special game and the normal game after the end of the special game (that is, an effect mode that is an embodiment of the effect) can be selected from a plurality of candidates. It may be.

  In the small hit development big hit, the small hit game is the first round, and the round in which the big hit effect (special game effect) can be executed is smaller by one round. Therefore, by making it possible to select a music or a character between one round and two rounds, it is possible to provide the player with an effect using the music or the character selected by the player for a longer time. If it is considered that the selectable period of the music or the character is insufficient only between the rounds, the selectable period may be continued over the execution period of the second round.

  Another modification related to the feature 4 will be described. In the above embodiment, the suggestion effect is displayed during the period of the last closing period (3.5 seconds) of the big winning opening 20 in the small hitting game + the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the continuous actuating device. . As a modification, the suggested effect may be displayed during the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the accessory continuous operation device. In addition, when a small hit end demonstration (for example, 0.004 seconds) is executed at the end of the small hit game in which the V winning has occurred, the closing period (3.5 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game + small The suggestion effect may be displayed during the period of the hit end demonstration time (0.004 seconds) + the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the accessory continuous operation device.

  Another modification related to the feature 4 will be described. Pachinko gaming machine 500 may further include vibration detecting means for preventing fraud. The vibration detecting means detects the presence or absence of vibration when the big winning opening 20 in the small hit game is opened, and when the vibration is detected, may perform a predetermined fraudulent notification process (warning display, notification to an external device, etc.). . Generally, in a unit game or a small hit game of a special game that opens and closes a special winning opening having a specific area, it is implemented that the vibration detection is made effective during the open period and during the remaining ball detection period after the end of the open period. According to the configuration of the characteristic 4, the suggestion effect is performed by removing the timing of the vibration detection (if the vibration detection effective period is 5 seconds from the transition to the 3.5-second closing period of the special winning opening, the suggestion effect is performed. Since the button valid period is generated after 6 seconds from the start), it is also possible to provide a suggestive effect in which vibration occurs, such as an effect in which a player presses a button. In the button validity period, a display indicating that the validity period is to be reached (the button image is faded in, etc.) before the image display indicating the validity period (image display imitating the effect button 109). Button display introduction effect) may be performed. However, when the button display introduction effect is started, the effect button 109 may be operated by the player before the expiration period, so that the button display introduction effect is performed. Is preferably shifted after the vibration detection effective period ends.

<Feature 5. Small hit look-ahead>
As described in the base technology and the first embodiment, when there is a ball entering the second starting port 12, the preliminary determination unit 235 of the main board 200 determines a lottery value (for example, Regardless of whether or not the symbol change based on the winning / rejecting lottery value is started immediately, the result of the execution of the winning / rejecting determination (final determination) based on the lottery value acquired in response to the entering ball is a big hit or a small hit. It is determined in advance whether or not a hit will occur. When the pre-judgment result of the entry is a big hit or a small hit, the pre-judgment means 235 transmits to the effect determination means 303 the pre-judgment information indicating that the change corresponding to the entry is a big hit or a small hit. . Note that the pre-judgment information transmitted to the effect determination means 303 is transmitted in such a manner that a large hit or a small hit is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 9, by transmitting information indicating the success / failure range “4” as the preliminary determination information, it is possible to identify a small hit.

  The effect determination means 303 determines that the V-prize has occurred during the small hit game, and that the preliminary determination information received from the main board 200 for the hold on the special figure 2 is that one or more lottery values for the small hit are held. In the case where the special game is completed and the special game ends and the normal game is started, an effect of giving a preliminary notice of the occurrence of a small hit in the normal game after the end of the special game (hereinafter referred to as “small hit notice”). The effect may be performed one or more times. In other words, the effect determination means 303 determines that at least one small hit is executed if the right to shift to the big hit is acquired during the small hit game and if there is a hold in which the winning lottery is a small hit. The small hit announcement effect of the content suggested or notified can be executed during the period from the end of the big hit to the start of the time saving state. The reservation to be prefetched for the small hit is a special figure 2 reservation which is the main game during the working hours. In the embodiment, the effect determination means 303 displays, as a small hit announcement effect, V stock images that make it look as if "V" is stocked in appearance, for the number of small hits to be announced.

  The effect deciding means 303 can execute the small hit announcement effect at a plurality of advance timings from the V prize to the transition to the time saving state after the end of the small hit development big hit. The plurality of notice timings are configured such that the larger the number of rounds in the small hit development big hit, the larger the number of notices of the small hit reservation. More specifically, a plurality of advance notice timings in the second embodiment are at the time of the V prize, the third round of the small hit development big hit, the ninth round of the small hit development big hit, and the end of the big hit demonstration. At each of a plurality of advance notice timings, the number of small hits to be announced is limited to one. That is, in one small hit announcement effect, the V stock image is increased by one.

  Therefore, only when the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit is the maximum (specifically, 10 rounds), four small hit announcement effects can be executed, that is, all of the four reservations (special figure 2 reservation) If it is a small hit, that can be suggested to the player. In other words, if the number of rounds of the small hit development jackpot is four, the small hit announcement effect cannot be executed in the ninth round, so that even if all four reservations are small hits, the maximum three small hits are notified. Stay in. The effect determination means 303 determines, by lottery, how many times the small hit announcement effect is to be executed and at what notice timing, the upper limit is the number of the preliminary determination results of the reserved small hits.

  Note that the effect determination means 303 executes four small hit announcement effects when the preliminary determination information for all of the four existing reservations is a small hit, and at least one small hit announcement among them. As an effect, a premiere effect may be displayed. The premier production is a rare production that is not displayed except when all four reservations are small hits, and may be a content that suggests or informs that a very large profit is obtained.

  According to the feature 5, by suggesting that the small hit development jackpot can be continuously obtained in the machine with the small hit development jackpot, the player can be made aware that there is a high possibility that a great profit is obtained. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  A modified example related to the feature 5 will be described. When three small hits are reserved during the first small hit development big hit (or during the big hit) generated earlier, the effect determining means 303 conceals one small hit and makes two V stock images. May be displayed. In the case where the second small hit development jackpot is changed by the fluctuation immediately after the end of the small hit development jackpot, the V stock image is updated so as to be reduced to one (at this time, the reserve existing from the first small hit development jackpot) (Small hits in 2). Further, when one hold generated during the change of the second small hit is a small hit (the small hit in the hold changes to three hits), the effect determining means 303 causes During the small hit game or the big hit game, a small hit announcement effect in which the V stock image is increased by two including the number of the small hits in the reserve that existed in the first small hit development big hit may be displayed. Good. As described above, the first small jackpot development jackpot and the second small jackpot development jackpot are defined in the special game performed during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device after winning the V during the small jackpot game. However, since the execution timing of the small hit prefetching effect includes “at the time of V winning” as described in the present embodiment, a small hit prefetch (V stock notification) may be performed during the small hit game. In this paragraph, it is expressed as a small hit look-ahead executed in "first small hit development big hit" and "second small hit development big hit".

  As a method 1 for realizing this, the effect determination means 303 uses the pre-determination information in the event of a small hit or a big hit (for example, when a small hit symbol or a big hit symbol is stopped or when a V winning in a small hit game). The number of small hits in the hold may be specified based on the number. The effect determination means 303 calculates a difference between the number of displayed Vstocks and the number of small hits in the hold, and selects one of the effectable Vstock effect patterns by lottery with the difference as an upper limit. May be. For example, a small hit announcement effect for increasing the number of differences and the V stock image may be displayed.

  In addition, as a second method, at the time of a small hit or a big hit, the effect determination means 303 specifies the number of small hits in the hold based on the preliminary determination information, and based on the specified small hit number, a pattern of the small hit announcement effect. (For example, the display timing of the small hit announcement effect) may be determined. At the display timing of the small hit announcement effect based on the determined pattern, the effect determination means 303 may cancel the display of the small hit advance effect in accordance with the displayed V stock number, or replace the normal effect pattern with the normal effect pattern. Is also good. For example, in the case where three small hit announcement notices (at the time of winning a prize, the ninth round, at the end demonstration) are determined, and two V stocks are displayed from before the small hit, two small hits are displayed. The hit notice effect (for example, at the end of the ninth round at the end of the demonstration) may be canceled.

  According to this modification, in order to specify the number of small hits reserved for each small hit (or small hit development big hit), a special effect (premier effect) when the number of held small hits is the maximum (4). Can increase the opportunity to perform. Since the timing at which the fourth Vstock image is displayed by the small hit announcement effect varies, for example, the effect determination means 303 sets each Vstock image to a rainbow color when four Vstock images are accumulated. It is preferable that the special effect (premier effect) be displayed in the normal game immediately after the end of the small hit development big hit.

  Another modification related to the feature 5 will be described. Even if the small hit does not exist in the hold, the effect determining means 303 determines whether or not the number of time savings after the end of the current small hit development big hit is a predetermined value or a predetermined value or more by lottery (with a predetermined probability). May be displayed in the same manner as in the case of a small hit. In this modified example, when the number of times of saving time is 100, a small hit announcement effect (that is, a V stock image) can be displayed. This is because the small hitting probability of the special figure 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 500 is 1/10, and the small hitting occurs almost certainly during 100 fluctuations in the time saving state. It should be noted that the number of times of saving time to display the small hit announcement effect is not limited to 100 times, and may be any value that is equal to or larger than the number of times that a small hit is expected to occur almost certainly according to the small hit probability. It should be noted that the V stock image displayed in the small hit announcement effect of the present modified example must also delete the V stock image indicating that it is a chance of V winning even in the case of a subsequent big hit that does not require V winning. Since there is a risk of misunderstanding about the subsequent game (reduction of display reliability due to the possibility of occurrence of a situation where there is no small hit even though there is a V stock display), a small The hit notice effect is referred to as a second small hit notice effect.

  According to the second small hit announcement effect of this modification, even if four reserves are digested after the small hit development big hit, the V stock image remains, so that the small hit (or big hit) execution possibility is extremely high. Can be executed continuously, so that a surprising effect can be realized. For example, the effect determination means 303 displays the “HOLD” image superimposed on the V stock image at the time of the fourth (holding) digestion after the small hit development big hit, and displays “HOLD” until the change of the big hit or the small hit. The displayed V stock image may be maintained. The effect determination means 303 may end the display of the “HOLD” V stock image at the start of the symbol change of the big hit or the small hit, during the change, or at the end of the change.

  In this embodiment, the V stock display is subtracted and displayed when the execution of the small hit variation is notified in executing the small hit change (if 0, the display is deleted). Regarding the V stock display for the 100 time savings in the modified example, the reason why the V stock image "HOLD" is erased even in the case of a big hit is that when the big hit occurs, the number of time savings is reset. This is because there is no compensation for the occurrence of. For the same reason, if a small hit does not exist in the hold but a big hit exists, the second small hitting announcement effect is displayed even if the number of hours saved after the end of the current small hit development big hit is equal to or greater than the predetermined value. Do not let. Alternatively, even if the lottery of the small hit notice effect is won, the execution of the effect is canceled.

  Another modification example of the feature 5 will be described. The effect determination means 303 also provides a small hit announcement effect for notifying the number of small hits in the hold by the V stock image even when the small hit and the big hit exist in the hold and the big hit fluctuates before at least one small hit. Is displayed. The effect determination means 303 determines the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image (the number of V stock images indicates the number of small hits) as the V stock digestion effect between the start of the small hit change and the start of the small hit game. In this case, the V stock image itself) is reduced by one.

  On the other hand, the effect determination means 303 does not change the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image and keeps the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image over the big hit period in the event of a big hit change. Note that the effect determination means 303 displays a small hit announcement effect to increase the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image during the big hit game, if there is a small hit in the change newly generated during the big hit or the big hit game. May be.

  The effect pattern of the V stock digestion effect executed in the small hit variation in the normal game in the time-saving state may include an effect pattern of a special mode such that the V stock image is emitted in a rainbow color and erased (normal pattern). Is an example in which white light is emitted and erased). The effect determination means 303, when the small hit symbol brings a high profit (for example, 10 rounds of small hit development big hit or 100 times of reduced time), as a directing effect of the V stock digestion effect, the effect of the special mode. A pattern may be selected to display a V-stock digestion effect in a special mode. Thereby, the player can be effectively informed that high profits will be provided. In the present embodiment, the result of the preliminary determination regarding the suspension of the special figure 2 that is consumed in the normal game during the time-saving game, which is referred to when the effect determination means 303 determines the execution of the small hit notice effect, includes the special symbol It does not include information on the stop display mode (small hit symbol), and determines in advance only whether or not the hold is a small hit by using advance judgment information related to a random number used for the success / failure judgment. Therefore, at the stage of displaying as a V stock image, the type of the small hit development big hit that occurs at each V winning opportunity is not determined, so that the number of the V winning opportunities is simply displayed. However, as in the present modification, by switching the pattern to the digestion effect based on the stop symbol information of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the effect determination means 303 when the change is actually started, the V stock It is possible to diversify the effects using images and improve the interest.

  Another modification example of the feature 5 will be described. As described in the first embodiment, the specific game control means 270 ends the time saving when a small hit occurs. For this reason, when the small prize game does not win the V (that is, when a puncture occurs), after the small prize game ends, the normal game is not a time reduction game but a normal state. The effect deciding means 303 does not win a V in the small hit game, but displays a V stock image indicating that at least one small hit is reserved at the end of the small hit game. Alternatively, an effect that makes it appear that time savings are continuing may be displayed. In other words, the effect determination means 303 may display an effect in a time-saving state (or an effect with similar contents) as an effect in the normal game in the normal state after the end of the small hit game.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to connect to the next small hit while maintaining the player's expectation for the extended villa. In this modification, the effect determination means 303 is an exceptional effect that associates a symbol variation pattern that can be selected by the main CPU in a normal state with an effect pattern during a time reduction (variable effect pattern, notice effect pattern). The pattern table is stored, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the exceptional effect pattern table.

  The present invention has been described based on the second embodiment. The second embodiment is an exemplification, and it is understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention.

  A first modification will be described. The first modification mainly shows a configuration for continuing firing even after winning the V, with respect to the features 3 and 4 of the second embodiment. The effect deciding means 303 displays a mission effect such as "Let the ball enter the attacker (large winning opening 20) and accumulate the gauge!" Instead of the count effect using the treasure chest object or the like during the small hit game. Is also good. In the present effect, as an example, an empty indicator display (or an indicator having a different initial amount according to the chance degree) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60 in accordance with the occurrence of the small hit game, and the large hit during the small hit game is performed. As the ball enters the winning opening 20, an example of executing an effect of expanding the area of the indication of the degree of expectation in the indicator display (effect of accumulating the gauge) is executed.

  In addition, similarly to the display of the expected degree image of the feature 2, the effect determination means 303 displays an image indicating the expected degree of the result of the suggested effect between the first round and the second round of the small hit development big hit in this mission effect. Depending on the degree of achievement of the mission (in the above example, the degree of accumulation of the gauges), the mode of the image indicating the degree of expectation of the profit obtained in the small hit development big hit may be changed. In addition, the display of the indicator is not limited to the increase mode, and may be a decrease mode, or may be continuously changed like an indicator as an effect that prompts the continuation of firing by connecting to the expectation degree suggestion. Instead, it shows whether or not the item will be displayed when the treasure chest is opened in response to the ball entry, such as "Chance by acquiring item XX, great chance if all three items can be acquired" Then, the expectation may be suggested based on the number or combination of the suggested objects finally displayed.

  In addition, the effect determination means 303 is suspended each time a predetermined unit amount (one ball or two balls) of game balls enters the special winning opening 20 or each time the gauge in the mission effect increases by a unit amount. Whether or not to display an effect that suggests or informs the number of small hits (small hit notice effect of Feature 5) may be determined by lottery. When this lottery is won, if there is an unreported small hit in the hold, the effect determining means 303 may display a small hit notice effect that suggests or notifies the small hit.

  Further, if there is a small hit in the hold, the effect determining means 303 determines, with a predetermined probability (for example, 2%), the vicinity of the special winning opening 20 in accordance with the ball entering the special winning opening 20 after the V winning. The light guide plate installed in the device may be turned on. When the light guide plate is turned on, the effect determining means 303 determines the special effect that suggests that the small hit development jackpot has been determined as a suggestion effect between the first round and the second round of the small hit development jackpot (described above). May be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 100%).

  A second modification will be described. The second modification mainly shows a configuration for continuing firing even after the V prize, with respect to the features 3 and 4 of the second embodiment. At the start of the small hit game, the effect determination means 303 includes an effect image including a special winning opening image indicating the special winning opening 20 and a character image, and the effect of prompting the firing toward the special winning opening 20 (referred to as a “promotion promoting effect”). .) May be displayed. The effect determination means 303 displays a V notification image as shown in FIG. 52 when a V prize is won in the small hit game, but continues to display the firing promotion effect for a while after the V notification image is displayed. Is also good. That is, the V notification image and the launch promotion effect may be displayed in parallel.

  The timing for ending the display of the launch promotion effect is the earlier of a certain time after the V prize and the establishment of the closing condition of the big winning opening in the small hitting game (the entry of 10 balls or the end of 15 opening). It may be. Alternatively, the timing of ending the display of the launch promotion effect may be determined as follows: when there is a V winning and three or more balls enter the special winning opening 20, at the time of V winning after entering three or more balls in the special winning opening 20 (+ several seconds later) Good).

  Note that the effect determination means 303 uses the V notification image 568 to display the number-of-balls display object (such as the number-of-balls notification image 566 in FIG. 52) and the image of the launch promotion effect during the small hit game. May also be set to a higher display priority. For example, the effect determination unit 303 draws the number-of-balls-informed image 566 and the image of the launch promotion effect on a relatively higher drawing layer among a plurality of drawing layers provided in the effect display device 60, You may arrange so that it may not be hidden by another image. In addition, when increasing the display priority of the V notification image 568, the effect determination unit 303 sets the number-of-ball-entry notification image 566 and the launching image 566 at a position different from the V notification image 568 so as not to overlap the V notification image 568. You may arrange the image of a promotion effect. The effect determination unit 303 may reduce the size of the number-of-balls-informed image 566 and the size of the image of the launch promotion effect so as not to overlap with the V notification image 568 as compared with the case where the V notification image 568 is not displayed.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, an effect example applicable to the second embodiment and the modification will be described. FIG. 54 (a) shows a fluctuation effect screen 570 that notifies the occurrence of a small hit (or a big hit), and shows a state in which the change of the decorative pattern 61 is stopped in a mode indicating a small hit (or a big hit). I have. In addition, the character image 572 is displayed on the fluctuation effect screen 570 of FIG.

  FIG. 54 (b) shows the small hitting game effect screen 560 following FIG. 54 (a). The small hit game rendering screen 560 of FIG. 54 (b) is displayed, for example, as a small hit game start demonstration. The small hitting game effect screen 560 in FIG. 54B includes a right-handed instruction image 562 for instructing the player to make a right-handed hit, a large winning opening image 574 imitating the appearance of the large winning opening 20, and a character image 572. . In the small hitting game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54B, the character image 572 is displayed in a mode that prompts a right strike (for example, a state where the right is pointed).

  FIG. 54 (c) shows the small hitting game effect screen 560 following FIG. 54 (b). The small hit game rendering screen 560 of FIG. 54C is displayed, for example, after the occurrence of the V winning in the small hit game. The small hit game rendering screen 560 of FIG. 54 (c) prompts the player to aim for a V notification image 568 indicating the V winning, a round image 564 indicating the first round, and an attacker (large winning opening 20). A message 576 and a gauge image 578 indicating the number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 are included. The gauge image 578 corresponds to the number-of-balls-informed image 566 of the second embodiment, and changes in color, for example, according to the number of balls in the special winning opening 20.

  FIG. 55 (a) shows the small hitting game effect screen 560 following FIG. 54 (c). In the small hit game rendering screen 560 of FIG. 55 (a), since the number of balls entering the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game has reached a predetermined number or more (for example, 7 balls or more), the target is launched at the large winning opening 20. The message 576 for prompting the player to perform the game and the special winning opening image 574 are not displayed.

  FIG. 55 (b) shows an inter-round effect screen 580 subsequent to FIG. 55 (a). The inter-round effect screen 580 displays an inter-round effect that is displayed from the end of the small hit game (first round) to before the start of the first unit game (second round) of the special game. The effect between rounds corresponds to the suggestion effect of feature 4 of the second embodiment. The inter-round effect screen 580 includes a button image 584 that prompts the operation of the effect button 109 and the like, and a bonus suggestion image 582 that indicates the type of the current big hit from a plurality of types of big hits having different numbers of rounds and time savings. The bonus suggestion image 582 may include an image imitating roulette that rotates in response to an operation of the effect button 109 or the like. In addition, the inter-round effect screen 580 includes an effect image 586 at the end of the screen. The effect image 586 may have a color that changes over time, or may change to the same color as the color of the gauge image 578 on the small hit game rendering screen 560 at the end of the inter-round rendering.

  FIG. 55 (c) shows the big hit effect screen 588 following FIG. 55 (b). The big hit effect screen 588 of FIG. 55 (c) shows the effect of the first unit game (second round) of the special game. As described above in part, the jackpot effect screen 588 includes a round image 564, acquired prize ball information 590, and a V stock image 592. The V stock image 592 in FIG. 55 (c) shows that two small hits are stocked (that is, two small hits exist in the reservation).

  A third modification will be described. Pachinko gaming machine 500 has the following conditions: (1) the number of changes A in special figure 1 (for example, seven times), (2) the number of changes B in special figure 2 (for example, 100, 9, or 1), ( 3) Includes the number of fluctuations C (for example, 100 times, 15 times, or 7 times (A + B-1)) in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. As described in the first embodiment, the first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232 switch the variation pattern table according to the variation of each of the special figures 1 and 2.

Processing 1 related to end of working hours
The first variation pattern determination unit 231 of the present modification switches the variation pattern table to the mode 0 table at the end of the time saving. The number of variation pattern candidates (the number of candidates that can be selected) specified in the variation pattern table for time saving in Toku-zu 1 is small. For this reason, by forcibly switching the fluctuation pattern table to the mode 0 table at the end of the time reduction, the effect determined by the fluctuation of the suspension of the special figure 1 during a plurality of fluctuations after the end of the time reduction becomes monotonous. Can be avoided.

Process 2 related to time reduction:
On the other hand, the second variation pattern determination means 232 of the present modification shows that even if the time saving ends, the four variations after the end of the time saving refer to a variation pattern table different from normal (the mode 7 table in FIG. 43). The fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 is determined. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, since the time saving effect mode (rush effect in FIG. 40) continues while the suspension of the special figure 2 is exhausted after the time saving ends, the time saving ends exceptionally under the time saving end condition of the special figure 1. However, if the special figure 2 reservation occurs, it is necessary to select a variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction effect mode.

Process 3 related to time reduction:
If there is no V prize (punk) in the small hitting game, which is an exceptional time saving end, the first variation pattern determination means 231 switches the variation pattern table of Toku-zu 1 to the mode 0 table of Toku-zu 1. Further, the second variation pattern determination means 232 also switches the variation pattern table of Toku-zu 2 to the mode 0 table of Toku-zu 2.

  The above processing 3 is performed when the small hit does not occur in the special figure 1 as in the first embodiment, or the small hit may occur in the special figure 1 and the small hit game of the special figure 1 Is executed when a V prize can be won in the same manner as in FIG. On the other hand, there is a possibility that a small hit occurs in the special figure 1, but when the opening / closing control of the specific area opening / closing device 552 is performed so as not to win the V in the small hit game of the special figure 1 (the small hit in the special figure 1) In the case where the game is designed to puncture almost certainly before, the above-mentioned processing 3 and the control of the end of the working hours are not performed in the small hitting game shown in FIG. That is, in the small hit game of Tokuzu 1, time savings are continued even if no V prize is won. At the time of the first hit (at the time of the first shift to saving time), if the special figure 1 changes before the special figure 2 reservation occurs and the small hit occurs, to prevent the time saving from ending due to the puncture of the small hit game. It is.

  A fourth modification will be described. In a fourth modified example, a modified example related to the round indicator lamp will be described. As described in the base technology, the game state display unit 76 functions as a round indicator lamp that displays the number of unit games (the number of rounds) to be executed in the special game by the 7-segment LED. The main board 200 (for example, the main display control means 250) controls the game state display section 76 (that is, the round indicator light) for both the 10 round symbol jackpot and the 10 round small jackpot development jackpot (small hit 1R, big hit 9R). May be emitted in the same pattern. Similarly, the main board 200 (for example, the main display control means 250) displays the game state display portion 76 in the same pattern in both the four rounds of the symbol big hit and the four rounds of the small hit development big hit (small hit 1R, big hit 3R). May be used to emit light.

  Note that the main board 200 starts the special game state based on the operation of the V prize or the continuous actuation device for the bonus after the V prize (the small hit development) in the 10 round small hit development big hit and the 4 round small hit development big hit. Until the start of the big hit), the game state display section 76 may emit light in a common pattern for the small hit game. Then, after winning the V, the gaming state display section 76 may emit light in the same pattern as the 10 round symbol jackpot, respectively, in the same pattern as the 4 round symbol jackpot. This makes it impossible or difficult to distinguish between 10 rounds and 4 rounds before the V prize.

  A fifth modification will be described. In the fifth modification, a modification relating to the performance display unit 159 will be described. As described in the base technology, the performance display unit 159 is “calculated and displayed as a ratio (referred to as a base value) of the total number of awarded balls to the total number of fired balls, which is the sum of the safe ball and the out ball”. In this modification, the base value in the normal game in the normal state (the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state) is particularly displayed, and in the normal game during the time-saving game, and during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. During a special game, it is not treated as count data for display on the performance display section.

  In the gaming machines described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, when the small hit game corresponding to the substantial first round of the small hit development big hit starts, the time saving game ends, and the small hit game ends. It is configured to operate the accessory continuous operation device accordingly. Therefore, during the small hit game, it means the same state as the normal game in the normal state (the low probability game state and the non-time saving game state), and the state corresponding to the substantial first round in the small hit development big hit In spite of this, the acquired game ball is counted as the base value in the normal game in the normal state. In such a situation, when the base value of the fifth modified example is calculated, a safe ball equivalent to a payout of 1R of the big hit (the second embodiment) Is added to the base value, so in a small hit game that should be treated as a special game in a game, a value that should not be originally counted is included in the count data of the performance display unit 159. There is a risk that

  Therefore, as a fifth modified example, an optimal method as a data counting method of the performance display unit 159 in the first and second embodiments that employs the small hit and the large hit will be described below.

  Regarding the data displayed on the performance display section 159 of the fifth modified example, the main CPU 290 determines that the execution of the big hit game is definite when a V prize is made during the execution of the small hit game which is a small hit development big hit. The post-V prize is regarded as equivalent to a big hit, and the prize balls generated by the ball entering the grand prize opening 20 after the V prize and the total number of safe balls and out-balls fired after the V prize are calculated. Adopt a method of controlling outside. As a method for satisfying the gaming state equivalent to the big hit after the V winning, the flag related to the operation of the condition device or the continuous action device for the accessory is set to be equal to that during the big hit based on the V winning during the small hitting game. Switching to a value.

  By doing in this way, for example, during the small hitting game of the second embodiment, if the game ball that entered the third ball passes through the specific area (V wins), the fourth game ball will It can be regarded as a prize ball generated in the small hit development big hit, and only “36 balls” (12 prize balls × 3 hit balls) are added as counting objects as the number of prize balls generated in the normal game in the normal state. In a gaming machine that employs a small hit development jackpot, the base of the normal game in the normal state is excessively raised based on the occurrence of the small hit game corresponding to the substantial first round. Can be prevented.

  A sixth modification will be described. In each of the examples, the number of rounds in the small hit development jackpot and the number of times of saving time after the end of the small hit development big hit were determined according to the small hit symbol. As a modification, at least one of the number of rounds and the number of time savings may be determined according to the result of the lottery at the time of the V prize (a small hit symbol may be involved) instead of the small hit symbol.

(Third embodiment)
The basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, the functional configuration of the main board 200, and the functional configuration of the sub-board 300 are the same as those of the second embodiment (FIGS. 49, 3, and 4). , FIG. 11). In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology, a setting change device 170 is provided (FIG. 2), and the game setting is set in six stages (setting 1 to setting 6). ), The probability that the lottery will be a big hit has a setting difference in addition to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, and the probability of a small hit has no setting difference.

  The following description focuses on the differences from the base technology, the first embodiment, and the second embodiment, and omits the common points. Further, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same or corresponding elements as those described in the base technology, the first embodiment, and the second embodiment. I do.

  An outline of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment has the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment. In addition to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, Then, an effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “setting suggestion effect”) that suggests the setting value stored in the setting change device 170 (setting memory) to the player is executed.

  The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500 may be stored in both the RAM of the main board 200 (for example, the memory of the setting change device 170) and the RAM of the sub board 300. The sub-board 300 may execute the setting suggestion effect with reference to the setting value stored in the RAM of the sub-board 300. For example, the main board 200 may transmit a predetermined command indicating the changed setting value to the sub-board 300 at the timing when the setting change is determined, and the sub-board 300 may store the setting value in the RAM. Further, the main board 200 may transmit a predetermined command indicating the current set value to the sub-board 300 even when the power is turned on and when the RAM is cleared.

  Further, the main board 200 may include set value information indicating a current set value in various commands transmitted to the sub-board 300 for each symbol change. Similarly, the main board 200 may include set value information indicating the current set value in various commands transmitted to the sub board 300 at the time of a special game and at the time of error recovery. As described above, by transmitting the setting value information at a predetermined timing even during the game, the setting value stored in the main board 200 and the setting value stored in the sub-board 300 can be synchronized even during the game. And it is easy to maintain fairness of the game. For example, when an illegal operation for illegally changing only the main setting value is performed while dropping the sub board 300, the setting value after the illegal change is reflected on the sub board 300 side, and the setting value after the illegal change is played. Can be presented to a player or a game shop staff.

  The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment has the following four features related to setting suggestion effects. These features can be implemented as a single unit, can be arbitrarily combined, and can be arbitrarily combined with the features described in the base technology, the first embodiment, and the second embodiment.

Features 1. Demonstration setting end only when V stock is suggested:
Since setting suggestion effects are not common in conventional pachinko gaming machines, if a setting suggestion effect is displayed in a special game end demonstration, the setting suggestion effect is in an advantageous state (for example, a certain game The player may be mistaken for indicating or notifying that the transition to the “inner villa” is planned. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the third embodiment provides a special game on the condition that the “advantage notification effect”, which is an effect indicating or notifying that a transition to an advantageous state is scheduled, has been executed. Display a setting suggestion effect in the end demo of. This can prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the setting suggestion effect, and prevent the player's expectation that the game should shift to an advantageous state.

Features 2. Prevention of downgrade of setting suggestion effects:
If the suggestion made by the setting suggestion effect executed at a later time is lower in the player's profit (in other words, the degree of advantage) than the suggestion content by the setting suggestion effect executed at the earlier time, the setting at the earlier time is made. The expectation of the player who saw the suggested effect is spoiled. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, a higher priority is given to a setting suggestion effect that suggests a content that is more profitable for the player, and after the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority is executed, , The execution of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second priority lower than the first priority is restricted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the player from being spoiled.

Features 3. When V is not awarded, end demonstration setting suggestion effect is not executed:
As described above, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the game does not develop into the big hit and returns to the normal game after the end demonstration effect of the small hit game. The execution time of the end demonstration effect of the small hit game is very short, and it is difficult to secure the time of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment does not execute the setting suggestion effect in the end demonstration of the small hitting game, so that the lottery process and the display process for the setting suggestion effect that have substantially no meaning are performed. Execution can be avoided.

Features 4. Set difference in pending change frequency:
In the pachinko gaming machine, one game (for example, symbol fluctuation) progresses based on the passage of time, rather than progressing in response to an operation by a player as in a slot machine. Therefore, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that is executed across a plurality of symbol variations by pre-reading the information of the held lottery values. In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, it is assumed that a specific effect mode in the effect suggests a set value for the effect based on the hold-ahead look-ahead executable over a plurality of symbol changes. As a result, the reserved look-ahead effect can be presented to the player as not only indicating the big hit but also as indicating the set value, so that the player's sense of expectation and interest in the game can be further enhanced. In addition, since the symbol change is performed a plurality of times, it is easy to prevent the player from overlooking the suggestion content.

Hereinafter, the above four features will be sequentially described in detail.
<Feature 1. End demonstration only when V stock is available>
As in the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the third embodiment generates a V prize during the small hitting game, and includes small information in the preliminary determination information received from the main board 200 for the special figure 2 reservation. When one or more winning lottery values are reserved, a V stock image is displayed as a small hit announcement effect from the V prize until the small hit development big hit (special game) ends and the normal game is started. Can be displayed. The small hit announcement effect is an effect of adding or adding a V stock image, and is hereinafter also referred to as a “V stock effect”.

  The effect deciding means 303 of the pachinko gaming machine 500 stores two conditions as conditions in which the setting suggestion effect can be displayed in the special game end demonstration effect (also referred to as “big hit end demonstration effect”). The first condition is that one or more V stock images are displayed before the end demonstration effect starts, in other words, the V stock effect is executed at least once before the end demonstration effect starts. It is. The second condition is that the V stock effect in the end demonstration effect has not been won. When both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the effect determination means 303 determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the end demonstration effect at a predetermined probability.

  As described in the second embodiment, the effect determination means 303 determines whether or not to execute the V stock effect, how many times the V stock effect is executed, and the V stock effect when the V winning in the small hit game is triggered. (For example, at the time of the V prize, the third round of the small hit development big hit, the ninth round of the small hit development big hit, and the big hit end demonstration) are determined by lottery. When the result of the lottery is a specific pattern, the effect determination means 303 does not execute the setting suggestion effect in the end demonstration effect of the special game. For example, when the lottery result is a pattern in which the V stock effect is executed and the V stock effect is executed at the time of the big hit end demonstration, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the end demonstration effect of the special game.

  In the case of a gaming machine having a probable change state, the above-mentioned second condition is that a special game end demonstration performance must not be won for a probabilistic promotion performance (for example, a resurrection performance such as victory by reversing a battle once defeated). May be. The reason why such a second condition is provided is to give priority to an effect such as a V-stock effect or a probable change promotion effect that suggests and informs a content directly related to the profit of the player rather than a set value. In addition, when it is understood by the player that the appearance of the setting suggestion effect and the V stock effect (or the probable change promotion effect, etc.) are clearly different, the second condition is not specified and only the first condition is specified. In some cases, it may be possible to simultaneously display.

  In addition, the probable change promotion effect in the end demonstration may be designed to lengthen the end demonstration time in order to secure the length of the effect, and the stop pattern of the big hit (small hit in the case of the small hit V) may be used. May be executed based on In this case, as the second condition, it is determined that the stop symbol of the big hit (small hit in the case of the small hit V) is not a specific mode of executing an effect that is prioritized to the setting suggestion effect such as a probable change promotion effect at the end demonstration. You may be. The effect determining means 303 may avoid executing the setting suggestion effect during the end demonstration effect, when the stop symbol of the big hit is the specific symbol, assuming that the second condition is not satisfied.

  FIG. 56 (a)-(d) shows an example of a jackpot end demonstration effect. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the effect determination unit 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display an end demonstration screen 600. The effect deciding means 303 causes the end demo screen 600 to display a wallpaper image 602 indicating the content (motif, character type, etc.) according to the number of consecutive villas. Although not shown, the effect determination means 303 may display the number of consecutive games in the advantageous period and the total number of acquired prize balls in the advantageous period on the end demonstration screen 600.

  FIGS. 56B to 56D show a setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 56 (b), the effect determination unit 303 displays the character image 604 on the end demonstration screen 600, and displays an operation (animation) of removing the wallpaper image 602 displayed so far by the character image 604. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the effect deciding means 303 displays an operation as if the character image 604 selects the setting. Finally, as shown in FIG. 56 (d), the effect determination means 303 displays the ema image 606, which is an object whose content indicates the setting value.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 500, ema images 606 in a plurality of types (shapes, patterns, colors, and the like, which can also be referred to as appearances) corresponding to a plurality of set values are stored in advance. The effect deciding means 303 selects one of the plurality of types of ema images 606 according to the setting value stored in the setting changing device 170 and a predetermined selection probability. The plurality of types of ema images 606 have appearances corresponding to “setting 6 determined”, “setting 4 determined”, “setting 4 or more”, “setting 2 or more”, “setting value is an odd number”, and the like. including. Thus, the expected value of the setting value changes depending on the mode of the ema image 606 presented in the setting suggestion effect. In addition, the effect determination means 303 changes the display mode (for example, in a band display mode) of the number of extended games and the total number of acquired prize balls displayed in FIG. The continuous display at the corner may enable the number of extended games and the total number of acquired prize balls to be confirmed on the effect screen after FIG. 56 (b).

  FIG. 57 is a time chart related to the big hit end demonstration effect. FIG. 57A shows a time chart in a normal state in which neither the V stock effect nor the setting suggestion effect is executed. FIG. 57 (b) shows a time chart when the V stock effect is executed during the end demonstration effect. FIG. 57C shows a time chart when a setting suggestion effect is executed during the end demonstration effect. The time period of the big hit end demonstration effect is 13 seconds in any of the normal time, the V stock effect execution, and the setting suggestion effect execution. The time of the big hit end demonstration effect is, for example, an effect executed in accordance with the time of the special game end demonstration time (S814 in FIG. 28) in the main controller, and the type of the big hit game (at the time of the start of the big hit). This is determined for the special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a special symbol), and if there is only an inadequate length of time for the jackpot end demonstration effect, such as a setting suggestion effect, etc. In the big hit of, the setting suggestion effect or the like may not be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a), at normal time, the background (wallpaper image 602) according to the number of extended holidays is displayed for 6 seconds, the character string of the rush effect entry is displayed for 6 seconds, and the background image transition is displayed for 1 second. I do. Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), at the time of executing the V-stock effect, the background (wallpaper image 602) corresponding to the number of extended holidays is displayed for 3 seconds, the character and the addition of the V-stock image are displayed for 9 seconds, and the background image is displayed. Display transition for 1 second. Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), at the time of execution of the setting suggestion effect, the background (wallpaper image 602) corresponding to the number of extended games is displayed for 2 seconds, the rotation of the character image 604 and the ema are displayed for 6 seconds, and stopped. The displayed ema image 606 is displayed for 5 seconds. Although not shown, in FIG. 57 (b) and (c), the notification of the rush effect entry is different from the normal state of FIG. 57 (a) in order to notify the player of the subsequent game state. The entry to the rush effect may be notified by (for example, displaying a telop or an icon at the corner of the screen).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, the setting suggestion effect in which the character operates by animation is displayed. Therefore, it is easier to attract the player's attention to the effect than when the background image of the big hit end demonstration is simply replaced with a special background indicating the set value. On the other hand, a player is liable to misinterpret a profit to the player, such as a transition to a specific game such as a big hit (small hit V) or a certainty change, due to the production of the animation due to the holding in-house. In addition, unlike the slot machine, the pachinko gaming machine 500 ends the big hit end demo at the timing of the time, so that if a special effect occurs without involvement of the player operation, it also notifies the on-hold in-house or probable change transition. Is likely to be mistaken for the player.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the third embodiment, the effect for informing that the state is already advantageous (the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned effect for informing the profit to the player, and the V-stock effect in the third embodiment). ) Is displayed, provided that the setting suggestion has been executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to make a mistake and to prevent the expectation of the player from being spoiled.

  The effect determination means 303 continues to display the ema image 606 presented in the setting suggestion effect at the time of the end demonstration in a corner of the effect screen (in other words, a corner of the effect display device 60) in the subsequent game. By doing so, even in a situation where there is no player to play, it is possible to provide information on the set value to the next player, which leads to an increase in game motivation and motivation for the game. However, during the small hit game, during the big hit game (except at the end demonstration with setting suggestion), and during the super-reach effect, the effect determining means 303 sets the ema image 606 presented in the past setting suggesting effect to a non- Display. The effect determining means 303 may display an effect of replacing the ema image 606 presented in the past setting suggestion effect with a new ema image 606 at the end demonstration in which the setting suggestion has been won.

  In addition, the effect determination unit 303 determines that a plurality of types of ema images 606 having different appearances are presented in a plurality of setting suggestion effects, in other words, a plurality of types of ema images 606 suggesting different setting values are presented. The plurality of types of ema images 606 are continuously displayed in subsequent games. As described above, the ema image 606 of the third embodiment has (1) an image indicating that the set value is an even number or an odd number (or that the even or odd number has a high degree of expectation), and (2) a set value. Indicates that is greater than or equal to a specific value (or that the expected value that is greater than or equal to the specific value is higher); (3) that the set value is a specific value (or that the expected value that is a specific value is higher) ). Therefore, by combining a plurality of ema images 606, it is possible to narrow down the actual set values, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Even when a plurality of ema images 606 are displayed, inconsistent suggestions may be displayed if a plurality of ema images 606 are displayed with the same type of contents described in (1) to (3) above. When the same type of ema image 606 that is difficult to connect is displayed, some ema images 606 may be hidden from the same type of ema image 606 based on the priority and the like described later.

  As a modification, when a plurality of ema images 606 having different appearances are displayed in a plurality of setting suggestive effects in a plurality of setting suggestion effects, the effect deciding means 303 selects the ema image 606 having the highest priority among the plurality of ema images 606 (in other words, Only the ema image 606) presented in the setting suggestion effect having the highest priority may be displayed in the subsequent game. The priority will be described later. Further, the effect determining means 303 may display only the ema image 606 indicating the highest setting value in the subsequent game instead of or together with the priority. In this modification, even when only one ema image 606 is displayed during a game, the effect determination unit 303 determines whether or not each of the big hit histories together with the big hit history according to the operation on the menu screen during the game standby demonstration. The ema images 606 presented in the setting suggestion effect may be arranged and displayed in a list, or the displayed ema images 606 may be displayed in a predetermined order or displayed by operating the cross key 110 or the like. The ema image 606 which is not displayed as a setting suggestion effect may be configured to be sequentially switched and displayed in order.

  As another modified example, in the game after execution of the setting suggestion effect, the effect determination unit 303 does not always display the ema image 606 but displays the ema image 606 during the game standby demonstration or only on the menu screen. Is also good.

  As still another modified example, the effect determination means 303 does not execute the V stock effect at the current big hit (small hit development big hit or design big hit), but as a result of executing the V stock effect at the previous big hit, the V stock image becomes If so, a setting suggestion effect may be displayed at the end of the big hit demonstration. For example, if the V stock image as a result of executing the V stock effect at the previous big hit is displayed on the current big hit effect screen, the effect determination means 303 displays the setting suggestive effect at the end of the current big hit demonstration. Is also good.

  Further, as another modified example, regarding the ema image 606 continuously displayed during the normal game, the ema image 606 is not only updated by displaying the new ema image 606 in the big hit end demonstration, but also special in the fluctuation effect. When winning in the preliminary lottery, an effect of replacing the ema image 606 with another image may be executed. For example, it is an effect equivalent to the hold change effect in which the hold lamp image is switched by the involvement of another object image in the hold lamp image, and the other object image is involved in the ema image 606 instead of the hold lamp image. A certain amount of points are added when the ema image 606 is replaced with the display of the image, when a special reach effect (SP reach) is lost, or when a specific effect occurs, and the point is determined. The ema image 606 may be replaced (or a replacement execution lottery) based on the value. When such replacement is performed, it is preferable to perform control so as to prevent downgrade of the setting suggestion effect (the ema image 606) described in Feature 2 described later.

  The feature 1 and the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment are also useful for the slot machine 1010. For example, in a special game such as a big bonus, the effect determination unit 1304 of the slot machine 1010 provides an advantageous information effect effect (for example, an effect for notifying the winning of assist replay time (hereinafter, referred to as “ART”) before the end demonstration starts). When executed, a configuration suggestion effect may be executed in the end demonstration effect. In addition, if the advantage notification effect is not executed before the start of the special game end demonstration, the effect determination unit 1304 may limit the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the end demonstration effect. The advantage notification effect in the slot machine 1010 may be such that a plurality of symbols are arranged in a specific mode during execution of the special game, or an effect of notifying an ART winning when a predetermined button is pressed. Note that a setting suggestion effect may be displayed in the advantageous information effect (ART winning information effect).

<Feature 2. Prevention of downgrade of suggested settings>
The effect determination unit 303 stores a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects and a plurality of priorities in association with each other. The plurality of types of setting suggestion effects are effects in which the ema images 606 in different modes are presented in the third embodiment. Therefore, the effect determination unit 303 includes a plurality of types of ema images 606 that can be presented in the setting suggestion effects. It can also be said that a plurality of priorities are stored in association with each other.

  In the third embodiment, a setting suggestive effect (in other words, the ema image 606) having a higher profit for the player is associated with a higher priority. Specifically, as shown in the following (1) to (11), a setting suggestion effect in which the range of the suggested setting value is narrower (in other words, the actual setting value is easily specified) is associated with a higher priority.

(1) Suggestion setting effect of presenting an ema image 606 suggesting setting value 2 or more (setting values 2 to 6) → priority 1
(2) Setting suggestion effect that presents an ema image 606 suggesting setting value 3 or more (setting value 3 to 6) → priority 2
(3) Setting suggestion effect that presents an ema image 606 suggesting a high setting (setting values 4 to 6) → priority 3
(4) Setting suggestion effect to present an ema image 606 suggesting that the setting value is an odd number (setting value 1, 3 or 5) → priority 3
(5) Setting suggestion effect to present an ema image 606 suggesting that the setting value is an even number (setting value 2, 4 or 6) → priority 3

(6) Setting suggestion effect to present ema image 606 that definitely suggests setting 1 (in other words, informs) → priority 4
(7) Setting suggestion effect that presents an ema image 606 that definitely suggests setting 2 → priority 4
(8) Setting suggestion effect that presents an ema image 606 that definitely suggests setting 3 → priority 4
(9) Setting suggestion effect that presents an ema image 606 that definitely suggests setting 4 → priority 5
(10) Setting suggestion effect that presents an ema image 606 that definitely suggests setting 5 → priority 5
(11) Setting suggestion effect that presents an ema image 606 that definitely suggests setting 6 → priority 6 (maximum priority)

  After performing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority (for example, the setting suggestion effect of (4) above), the effect determination unit 303 sets the setting suggestion corresponding to the second priority lower than the first priority. The execution of the effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect of (1) above) is restricted. In other words, the effect determination unit 303 limits the execution of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the relatively low priority after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the relatively high priority. In the embodiment, the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second priority is prohibited. For example, after the execution of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority, the effect determination unit 303 may cancel the execution if the selection suggestion effect corresponding to the second priority is won by lottery.

  Note that the effect determination unit 303 may execute a setting suggestion effect corresponding to the same priority after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to a certain priority. The priorities (6) to (11) are set higher as the set value is higher, from the viewpoint that the higher the set value is, the more advantageous the player is. As described above, in the embodiment, a higher priority is given as the range of the setting value suggested as the main parameter is smaller and the setting value as the sub parameter is higher.

  As a modification, the effect determination means 303 may store a higher priority in association with a setting value having a higher game advantage, regardless of the width of the setting value suggested. For example, setting 1 → priority 1, setting 2 → priority 2,..., Setting 5 → priority 5, setting 6 → priority 6 may be set. This association with the setting value is associated with the setting value having the lowest advantage level among one or a plurality of setting values suggested by the setting suggestion effect. However, for items that should be treated equally, such as odd number suggestions (settings “1”, “3”, “5”) and even numbering suggestions (settings “2”, “4”, “6”), the same priority is set. It is desirable to keep. In addition, a setting suggestion effect of a type in which a certain setting value is definite is set to a high priority because the meaning of the appearance of the subsequent setting suggestion effect is sparse. Then, after performing the setting suggestion effect indicating the setting value corresponding to the first priority, the effect determination unit 303 sets the setting indicating the setting value corresponding to the second priority lower than the first priority. The execution of the suggestion effect may be restricted.

  As another modified example, after effecting the setting suggestion effect of priority 6, effect determining means 303 enables execution of setting suggestion effect of priority 4 or higher, and restricts execution of setting suggestion effects of priority 1 to 3. You may. After executing the setting suggestion effect of priority 4, the effect determination unit 303 may enable the setting suggestion effects of priority 2 to 6, and may limit the execution of the setting suggestion effect of priority 1. As described above, the execution of the setting suggestion effect having a priority smaller than the priority of the executed setting suggestion effect by a predetermined value or more (for example, 2 or more) may be limited. In other words, the execution of the suggestion effect having a priority within a predetermined range from the priority of the executed setting suggestion effect may be permitted. Further, priority 1 to priority 3 may be grouped as level 1 and priority 4 to priority 6 may be grouped as level 2, and the execution of the setting suggestion effect at the same level as the already-executed setting suggestion effect may be permitted. .

  As yet another modification, the effect determination unit 303 stores a setting suggestion prohibition flag when displaying a setting suggestion effect indicating the content (Ema image 606) that definitely notifies the highest setting value (or setting suggestion). The prohibition flag is turned on), and while the flag is being stored (or when the flag is on), the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may not be performed. Alternatively, as a result of the lottery, the setting suggestion effect may be canceled or the setting suggestion effect may be canceled.

  Another modification will be described. The setting suggestion effect suggests different setting values for different combinations of the type of image displayed on the effect display device 60, the audio pattern output from the speaker 108, and the light emission pattern of the decorative lamp 111. You may. For example, a setting suggestion effect that suggests a combination (first combination) of the rainbow light emission of the decorative lamp 111, the sound “Is it believable”, and an image indicating the setting of 3 or more with a reliability of 100%. May be defined as The lottery table, which is referred to by the effect determination means 303 and determines the type of effect, is selected with a predetermined probability when the setting suggestion effect of the first combination is 3 or more, and is selected when the setting suggestion effect is 2 or less. It may be configured not to be performed.

  In addition, a combination (second combination) of the normal light emission of the decorative lamp 111, the sound “good tone”, and an image indicating the setting 3 or more is set as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting 3 or more with a reliability of 40%. May be determined. In the lottery table, the possibility of the setting value when the setting suggestion effect of the second combination is selected is setting 3 or more: less than setting 2 = 4: 6 (for example, setting at a certain timing when the setting suggestion effect is won) In the case of the values “3” to “6”, the sum of the number ranges to be won in the second combination is calculated at a certain timing when the setting suggestion effect is won. (A design in which the value obtained by dividing the sum of the numerical ranges to win the combination is “0.4”). As described above, even when the same setting suggestion image (for example, the ema image 606) is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion may be different if the output contents of another combined effect device are different.

For example, the priority of the setting suggestion effect that can be selected in the lottery table may be set higher as the setting value range suggested in the following order of pattern 1 <pattern 2 <pattern 3 <pattern 4 becomes narrower.
Pattern 1. Setting 2 or more suggestion pattern (image only, reliability 30%)
Pattern 2. Setting 2 or more suggestion patterns (image, sound, lamp chance up emission, reliability 100%)
Pattern 3. 3 or more suggestion patterns (image only, reliability 40%)
Pattern 4. 3 or more suggestion patterns (image, sound, lamp chance up emission, reliability 100%)
As another example, the priority of the confirmation notification and the effect with high reliability may be increased so that the priority is set to pattern 3 <pattern 2.

  Another modification will be described. Since the setting suggestion effect at the time of the end demonstration is a condition of V stock (that is, a transition to a specific game state that is advantageous, such as a probable change as a modified example), it is considered that the execution conditions in the first place are severe. This is because, for example, the condition of the pending ream may be that a hit is won in the reserving, or that the condition may be satisfied only at the time of the big hit in the time saving mode. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect at the time of the end demonstration may be exceptionally executable without satisfying the conditions such as the suspension sequence. However, in the lottery for determining whether or not there is a setting suggestion effect, the winning probability of this exceptional setting suggestion effect is set to be lower than the winning probability at the time of establishment of the pending ream. Further, the system may be configured to be able to win only in the case of an initial hit (a normal hit, for example, a hit other than in a rush state).

  In addition, a player who has abundant gaming experience can easily recognize that the setting suggestion effect suggests a setting value. Therefore, when the conditions such as the pending rendezvous are not satisfied, the effect determination means 303 wins the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect, and at a specific timing during the end demonstration effect, the effect input operation device 115 (the effect button 109 and the like). Is pressed, a setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a so-called back button effect. The back button effect can be seen by a player who is accustomed to the game or a person who has knowledge that there is a setting suggestion. Therefore, the button used for the back button effect here is a sub button (volume adjustment button, cross key 110, etc.) different from the effect button used in a normal game, so that a setting suggestion effect due to erroneous operation by a beginner can be provided. Display can be prevented.

  The above feature 2 and the modification of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment are also useful for the slot machine 1010. For example, the effect determination means 1304 of the slot machine 1010 stores a plurality of setting suggestion effects and a plurality of priorities in association with each other, executes the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority, and then executes the first priority The execution of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the lower second priority may be restricted.

<Feature 3. When V is not awarded, end demonstration setting suggestion effect is not executed>
If a V prize occurs during the small hit game, the effect determination means 303 determines whether or not to execute the V stock effect (small hit notice effect) and the execution timing, and ends the special game if the condition described in the feature 1 is satisfied. It is determined whether or not a setting suggestion effect is to be executed during a demonstration (in other words, a combination operation end demonstration). At the start of the special game end demonstration, it may be determined whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. It should be noted that when executing the big hit based on the stop of the big hit symbol, since the determination of the V winning is not performed, the lottery of the setting suggestion effect is performed at the start of the big hit game or the start of the big hit end demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, when there is no V winning during the small hit game, the game shifts to the normal game without developing into the big hit. Specifically, after the closing time (3.5 seconds) after the end of the last opening of the special winning opening 20 in the small hitting game + the end demonstration time of the small hitting game (for example, 0.1 second), the normal state of the normal state It shifts to a game.

  During the closing time after the final opening of the special winning opening 20 in the small hit game, the opening / closing control means 275 of the main board 200 closes the entrance of the special winning opening 20 (for example, the slide plate 540 in FIG. 50). It is necessary to open and close a valve member in a specific area (for example, the specific area opening / closing device 552 in FIG. 50) to eliminate clogging of the balls and increase the possibility of passing through the specific area. Therefore, it is necessary to secure a certain length of the closing time (3.5 seconds in the embodiment). At the closing time, since the special winning opening 20 is closed, it appears to the player that the round is over. For this reason, it is desired to execute the small hit end demonstration effect, but if the small hit end demonstration time is also lengthened, the V winning with the remaining ball in the small hit end demonstration when the small hit end demonstration is not made while the V winning is opened is determined. It is necessary to make the end demonstration effect redundant so that it can be replaced with the transition to the jackpot game based on the above, the effect control becomes complicated, and the interest of the game may be spoiled. In order to solve such a problem, the end time of the small hit game is shortened while increasing the closing time.

  If there is no V prize during the small hit game, the effect determination means 303 executes a small hit game end demonstration effect. In the third embodiment, the demonstration of the end of the small hit game is executed for 3.6 seconds, which is the closing time after the end of the last opening of the big winning port 20 in the small hit game + the end demonstration time of the small hit game. That is, when there is no V winning during the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 sets the time (3.6 seconds) shorter than the execution time (13 seconds in the third embodiment) of the end demonstration effect of the special game to a small hit game. Perform the end demonstration effect of.

  The effect determination means 303 restricts the execution of the setting suggestion effect even if the V stock effect has already been executed (the V stock image 592 has been displayed) in the end demonstration effect of the small hit game. , Prohibits or cancels the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Since the time period for the demonstration of the end of the small hit at the time of non-winning is very short (3.6 seconds even when the closing time of the large winning opening 20 is added), it is difficult to execute a meaningful setting suggestive effect. It is.

<Feature 4. Difference in hold change frequency>
The effect deciding means 303 of the third embodiment shifts to a special game in a future symbol change according to the advance judgment information transmitted from the main board 200 (in the third embodiment, a big hit and a small hit, hereinafter collectively referred to as , Simply referred to as “hit”) can be performed over a plurality of symbol variations up to the future symbol variation described above.

  In the third embodiment, the effect determination means 303 displays a pending change effect as the suggested effect. The effect determination means 303 changes the color of the hold lamp image corresponding to the special figure 2 hold, which is the target of pre-reading based on the preliminary determination information, to a color different from the default color (for example, white) as the hold change effect. Specifically, the color is changed from the default color to blue, green, red, and gold in one or more steps. It should be noted that the target of the hold change effect may be special figure 1 hold or both special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold.

  That is, the effect deciding means 303 can change the color of the hold lamp image one or more times, triggered by one or more symbol fluctuation digestions after starting the hold change effect. For example, the special figure 2 reservation to be pre-read is the fourth reservation in the fluctuation order (hereinafter also referred to as “reservation 4”), the third reservation (hereinafter also referred to as “reservation 3”), and the second reservation ( In the following, the color of the reserved lamp image indicating the special figure 2 reserved is changed along with the progress of the first reserved (reserved for the next fluctuation, hereinafter also referred to as “reserved 1”). It can be changed one or more times.

  The effect determination means 303 stores a hold change lottery table defining a plurality of scenarios (patterns) of the hold change effect, and refers to the hold change lottery table to determine a specific scenario to be executed in the current hold change effect. . The hold change lottery table is designed such that the color of the hold lamp image at the final stage of the change of the hold lamp image (hold 1) increases in the order of blue, green, red, and gold in order to increase the expectation of hitting. Further, the scenario of the hold change effect is designed such that the degree of expectation indicated by the form (color) of the hold lamp image is equal to or higher than the degree of expectation suggested by the form in the previous symbol change. That is, the scenario of the pending change effect is designed so that the color of the pending lamp image changes stepwise and irreversibly in the order of blue, green, red, and gold.

  58 and 59 show examples of the pending change lottery table. FIG. 58 is a holding change lottery table (hereinafter referred to as a “holding change change lottery table”) according to the type of the sub-variation pattern (fluctuating effect pattern) when the special figure 2 hold (trigger holding in the figure) of the prefetch target is out. .). FIG. 59 shows a lottery table of a pending change effect (hereinafter, referred to as a “winning change change lottery table”) according to the type of the sub-variation pattern (variable effect pattern) when the special figure 2 reservation to be prefetched is a hit. Is shown. The effect determination unit 303 may identify the sub-variation pattern of the pre-read target special figure 2 reservation according to the result of the preliminary pattern determination (the fluctuation pattern range) for the pre-read target special figure 2 reservation.

  In each of the tables of FIGS. 58 and 59, the total number of effect random numbers is 10,000, and numbers (selection probabilities) are allocated to 47 scenarios of the pending change effect. The out-of-hold change setting table and the hit-hold change setting table are provided for each set value, and the effect determining means 303 refers to the out-of-hold change change table and the hit-hold change setting table corresponding to the set value of its own machine to change the hold. Determine the production scenario.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the probability that the hold lamp image indicating the special figure 2 hold to be pre-read in the hold change effect is in a specific mode is stored in the setting change device 170 (actually, the RAM of the sub board 300 Depends on the (stored) settings. The particular embodiment is gold in the third embodiment and is also referred to below as "gold reserve". In the pachinko gaming machine 500, this is the frequency of appearance of money reservation, in other words, the higher the probability of selection of a scenario in which money reservation finally appears, the higher the setting is. This means that the higher the setting of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the lower the degree of expectation (it can be said that the degree of reliability of gold holding) in the event of gold holding is inferior. I can say.

  Specifically, the reliability of the gold reserve is set to about 99% in the setting 1, the reliability of the gold reservation is gradually reduced as the setting is increased, and the reliability of the gold reservation is set to about 70% in the setting 6. , An off-hold change lottery table and a hit on-hold change lottery table are designed. For example, the numbers assigned to the scenarios of ID36 to ID47 (shaded area in FIG. 58) in the out-of-hold hold change lottery table for setting 1 and the scenarios of ID36 to ID47 in the hit-hold change lottery table for setting 1 (see FIG. 59) The number assigned to the hatched area) is (1) the probability of multiplying the probability of a deviation variation, the probability of selecting a deviation variation pattern that can be reserved for prefetching, and the probability of winning ID36 to ID47 in the prefetch lottery (that is, Probability of winning a prefetch which becomes a gold reservation when a certain reservation becomes a prefetch target reservation and a deviation is executed), (2) probability of a hit change, probability of selecting a hit fluctuation pattern that can be a prefetch target hold, The probability obtained by multiplying the probability of winning ID36 to ID47 in the prefetch lottery (that is, a certain reservation becomes a prefetch target reservation). Ratio of probability) to win the prefetch to be the gold pending If per change is executed, 1: is set to be 99. On the other hand, the numbers assigned to the scenarios of ID36 to ID47 in the off-hold change lottery table for setting 6 and the numbers assigned to the scenarios of ID36 to ID47 in the hit-hold change lottery table for setting 6 are as described above ( The ratio of 1) and (2) is set to be 3: 7.

  Note that the reliability of the blue display of the hold lamp image (blue hold), the green display of the hold lamp image (green hold), and the red display of the hold lamp image (red hold) is constant regardless of the set value of the own device. For example, it may be 5%, 10%, and 20% in this order. The reliability of the blue hold, the green hold, and the red hold may also be realized by the ratio of the number range in the out-of-hold change lottery table to the number range in the hit-hold change lottery table.

  As described above, in the holding change effect, by designing a holding lamp image that changes irreversibly in a stepwise manner so as to lead to a setting suggestion, the changing state in the middle stage (for example, blue, green, red) ), There is a sense of expectation as to whether or not this green hold will be a hit, as well as a possibility that a high setting may be set if it changes one time later, or a high even if the money is held or removed. The setting is likely to be high, "the player's expectation regarding the setting is increased, and the player's willingness to play is easily improved. In addition, even when the money hold is not successful, the player can be expected to have a high setting, and a bad impression that “high expected hold has been released” is called “the possibility of high setting has increased”. It can be reduced with a good impression, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play.

  A first modification example regarding the feature 4 will be described. In the above embodiment, the holding change effect of changing the mode of the holding lamp image between the holding winning and the holding 1 has been described. As a modified example, the effect determination means 303 performs a preview effect (hereinafter referred to as “the suggestion effect”) that indicates the degree of expectation of the change in accordance with the result of determining whether or not the change (design change being executed) is correct or not, the design determination result, or the like. ) May be displayed. Here, the suggestion effect may have an appearance similar to the hold lamp image, and the effect control unit 304 shifts the hold lamp image displayed in the hold 1 to the object of the suggestion effect until the start of the change. Alternatively, the holding lamp image and the object of the suggested effect may be linked.

  The object of the suggestion effect may be controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, default colors, blue, green, red, and gold), similarly to the hold lamp image of the third embodiment. It may be designed such that the degree of expectation per hit varies depending on the effect mode. Here, it is assumed that the degree of expectation per hit is higher in the order of blue <green <red <gold. Then, the probability that the object of the suggested effect becomes a specific effect mode (here, gold, and also referred to as a “gold object”) may be different depending on the setting value stored in the setting change device 170. .

  Also in this modification, the effect determination means 303 may determine the effect mode of the object of the suggested effect by referring to the departure-hold change lottery table or the hit-hold change lottery table for each set value of the own device. The out-of-hold change lottery table and the hit-hold change lottery table in this modified example are, similarly to the tables of FIGS. 58 and 59, a plurality of production modes of the object of the suggestion effect according to the type of the sub-variation pattern in the variation. Are assigned.

  Also in this modification, the reliability of the gold hold is about 99% when the pachinko gaming machine 500 is set to 1, the reliability of the gold hold is gradually lowered as the setting is increased, and the reliability of the gold hold is reduced to about 99% in the setting 6. The off-hold change lottery table and the hit-hold change lottery table may be designed to be 70%. Also in this modified example, the same effect as the above-described feature 4 is obtained.

  At the time of the hold winning, the effect determining means 303 may collectively determine the change scenario of the hold lamp image from the hold winning to the hold 1 and the display mode of the object in the suggested effect. Further, the change of the hold lamp image and the display mode of the object in the suggestion effect may be determined in the off-hold change lottery table and the hit-hold change lottery table as a continuous scenario. That is, the single scenario may include both the change scenario of the holding lamp image and the display mode of the object in the suggested effect.

  A second modification example of the feature 4 will be described. Only the gold hold display at a specific timing in the process from the time of holding a prize (at the time of occurrence of a hold) to the time of hold 1 may be set as a target for which a difference in the appearance rate depending on the set value. Here, the specific timing is the time of occurrence of a hold (corresponding to “at the time of a hold prize” in FIG. 59), that is, the gold hold display at the time when the hold lamp image is first displayed (hereinafter, “direct boiling gold hold”). ) Is provided with a difference due to the set value.

  Also in this modified example, in the setting 1, the reliability of the direct boiling storage is about 99%, and as the setting becomes higher, the reliability of the direct boiling storage gradually decreases. In the setting 6, the reliability of the gold storage is about 70%. I do. In this case, the number assigned to the scenario of ID 47 (the bottom row of the hatched area in FIG. 58) in the out-of-office change lottery table for setting 1 and the scenario of ID 47 in the hit-hold change lottery table for setting 1 (see FIG. 59) The numbers assigned to the lowermost part of the hatched area) are (3) the probability of multiplication by the probability of a deviation variation, the probability of selecting a deviation variation pattern that can be held for prefetching, and the probability of winning the ID 47 in the prefetch lottery (that is, Probability of winning a look-ahead that becomes a gold hold when a certain hold becomes a look-ahead target hold and an out-of-order change is executed); (4) Probability of a hit change; probability of selecting a hit fluctuation pattern that can be a look-ahead target hold The probability obtained by multiplying the probability of winning the ID 47 in the prefetch lottery (that is, a certain reservation becomes a prefetch target reservation and a hit change is executed) Ratio of probability) to win the prefetch to be the gold pending case is 1: may be set to be 99. The numbers assigned to the scenario of ID 47 in the off-hold change lottery table for setting 6 and the numbers assigned to the scenario of ID 47 in the hit-hold change lottery table for setting 6 are as described in (3) and (4) above. ) May be set to be 3: 7.

  The target of the setting suggestion may be a combination of the hold occurrence (first display timing), the hold 1, and the change, or may be limited to an arbitrary position. Further, in the case of a specific hold (gold hold) at the time of occurrence of the hold, the effect determination unit 303 may output a sound indicating a chance when the money is held at the time of occurrence of the hold. A special pattern may be output with a high probability as a voice pattern indicating. In addition, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect (hold change effect or the like) is determined at the time of occurrence of the hold, the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect is performed at a timing other than the execution of the effect lottery accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 500 (ie, the start of the symbol change). It can be said that the presence or absence and the mode are determined.

  A third modification example regarding the feature 4 will be described. In the above embodiment, the target of the setting suggestion effect was gold-holding, but as a modified example, a mode of the holding lamp image having a relatively low reliability such as “blue holding” for changing the holding lamp image to blue is suggested. It may be the target of the production. For example, in the setting 1, the reliability of the blue-holding is set to about 3%, and the reliability of the blue-holding is gradually increased. In the setting 6, the reliability of the blue-holding may be set to about 6%.

  In this case, the numbers assigned to the scenarios with IDs 1 to 4 (upper row in FIG. 58) in the off-hold change lottery table for setting 1 and the scenarios with IDs 1 to 4 in the hit-hold change lottery table for setting 1 (see FIG. 59) The numbers assigned to (upper row) are (5) the probability of multiplying the probability of occurrence of a variation, the probability of selecting a variation pattern that can be held for prefetching, and the probability of winning ID1 to ID4 in the prefetch lottery (that is, a certain value). Probability of winning the look-ahead which becomes a blue hold in the case where the hold is a look-ahead target hold and an out-of-order change is executed), (6) probability of a hit change, probability of selecting a hit variation pattern that can be a look-ahead target hold, look-ahead Probability obtained by multiplying the probability of winning ID1 to ID4 by lottery (that is, when a certain hold becomes a prefetch target hold and a hit change is executed, blue Ratio of probability) to win the prefetch to be cut is, 97: may be set to be the 3. Further, the numbers assigned to the scenarios of ID1 to 4 in the out-of-hold change lottery table for setting 6 and the numbers assigned to the scenarios of ID1 to 4 in the hit-hold change lottery table for setting 6 are (5) ), (6) may be set to be 94: 6.

  In the embodiment, a situation in which the player loses money and discourages the player leads to setting suggestion, while in the third modified example, a situation in which the player holds blue and the player feels unexpectedness leads to setting suggestion. It should be noted that the blue preservation may be set as a target of the setting suggestion effect only when the pre-reading result is a special figure 2 reservation which is a hit. This is because the higher the setting, the higher the distribution ratio of the hit fluctuation to the blue reservation (for example, the scenarios of ID1 to ID4 in FIG. 59), which makes the mounting easier.

  A fourth modification example regarding the feature 4 will be described. As a prohibition on the pending change production, (a) if there is a pending change (or a pre-reading effect other than the pending change), there is no new pending change, (b) reach the previous pending Changes cannot be made if there is a change, (c) Changes cannot be made if there is a hold that hits the previous hold, and (d) Changes in the game state, such as the end of working hours or a change in the game state such as a change in the change pattern table, are changes in the hold to be prefetched. May not be changed if performed before, at least in part. With such a prohibition, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion decreases.

  A special setting suggestion lottery may be performed in order to make a setting suggestion in a situation that falls under the prohibition of the pending change. For example, when the prohibition is applied at the time of occurrence of the hold, the effect determination unit 303 may output a special sound indicating a chance with a predetermined probability while displaying the hold lamp image of the hold in a default color. The special setting suggestion lottery at the time of such prohibition is performed when something visible to the player is being executed (for example, in the case of (a) above, when the hold lamp image of the prefetch target hold is not the default). It is desirable to execute only.

  Note that the effect determination means 303 prohibits simultaneous execution of a plurality of prefetch effects in a prefetch effect other than the hold change effect (such as the same-color chance eye lookahead described later), but also performs a plurality of hold change effects relating to different holds. You may progress simultaneously. In this case, the effect determination means 303 can execute a new hold change effect as a setting suggestion effect even during execution of a look-ahead effect of the same category (for example, another hold change effect for a different hold). Further, the effect determination means 303 may allow a plurality of displays of the pending change effects of less than a predetermined level, and may prohibit a plurality of displays of the pending change effects of a predetermined level or more. For example, multiple simultaneous displays are allowed for a pending change effect whose change range falls within the default color to green hold, and multiple simultaneous displays are prohibited for a hold change effect where the change range reaches red hold or gold hold. Is also good.

  A fifth modification example regarding the feature 4 will be described. In the pre-reading effect (and the lottery for the pre-reading effect), the pre-read information of the variation pattern (that is, the information of the preliminary pattern determination) can also be used as a parameter. Therefore, when performing a hold change effect targeting a hold that a specific change pattern is scheduled to be executed, a hold lamp image (here, an object indicating the change, The "variable lamp image" may be used for setting suggestion.

  Specifically, the ratio of the color distribution of the fluctuating lamp image when the battle reach as a particular fluctuating pattern evolves may be set as follows. In the case of the setting 1, the default color: 30%, blue: 30%, green: 20%, red: 10%, and gold: 10%. In the case of the setting 6, the default color: 30%, blue: 10%, green: 25%, red: 20%, and gold: 15%. In this manner, the effect determination unit 303 may display the variable lamp image in a color indicating that the degree of expectation per hit is high, with a higher probability as the set value is higher. In this case, the higher the set value, the lower the expected degree of hit when a color (red, gold) indicating that the expected degree of expected hit is higher appears.

  The default color is a color in the case of the non-winning of the pending change (or the non-winning of the variable lamp image change notice lottery to be drawn at the start of the fluctuation). Therefore, by not providing a difference due to the set value in the display in the default color, a difference due to the set value can be provided in the highly expected color while maintaining the same probability of being changed at least once as a whole. That is, in the case of the high setting, it is possible to configure so that the pending change effect does not enter the bargain state. Note that a configuration in which there is no difference due to the set value in the display in the default color is also applicable to the setting suggestion in the gold reservation described in the embodiment.

  Still further, the idea of providing a setting difference in the prefetch effect based on the prefetch information of the variation pattern and the idea of providing a setting difference in the prefetch effect (specific prefetch effect) by the gold reservation are displayed by holding gold. Under the circumstance, the appearance frequency (probability) of the circumstance where the fluctuation has ended (out of alignment) before reaching the super reach may be used as the setting suggestion. For example, it is possible to indicate a high setting if the symbol fluctuation stops before super-reach development (this is a fork of normal reach, and during the direction of super-reach development) It is. In this case, it is premised that the super-reach will be determined in principle above the gold reserve or the red reserve except for exceptional circumstances that suggest such setting.

  A sixth modification example regarding the feature 4 will be described. The technology described in the feature 4 is an effect that irreversibly changes in units of change over a plurality of changes. In other words, if the effect is such that the expected degree of transition to the advantageous game is increased each time the change is made, a change in hold is performed. The present invention can be applied to a look-ahead effect different from the effect. For example, the present invention can be applied to the same color chance production using the color of the decorative pattern 61. The same-color chance production is performed in a manner of three decorative patterns 61 (here, colors) in a plurality of changes from the occurrence of the hold to the end of the corresponding change with respect to the hold to be prefetched (in other words, hit suggestion). It is a look-ahead production that changes.

  The patterns of the decorative pattern 61 in the same color chance eye effect are, in order from the one with the lowest degree of expectation, a blue pattern (blue decorative pattern 61), a green pattern, a red pattern, a red pattern + gold effect (for suggesting setting), and a red pattern + It may be a rainbow effect (fixed). Then, similarly to the gold hold of the embodiment, it may be designed such that the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of selecting the red symbol + gold effect is. In other words, it may be designed such that the higher the set value is, the lower the expectation of the red symbol + gold effect is. For example, the expectation in setting 1 may be 70%, and the expectation in setting 6 may be 50%. That is, the design may be designed such that the higher the value is, the higher the value of the red symbol and the gold effect.

  In the same color chance production, a replacement lottery is possible immediately before the stop in the symbol change (for example, before the speed of the decorative symbol 61 is reduced). Therefore, the effect determining means 303 may determine, by lottery, the presence or absence and the mode of the same color chance effect in the change after the symbol change starts. In the case of an effect design in which the same color chance effect is to be displayed continuously for a predetermined number of times or more, if the hold is 1 when the hold occurs, the effect determination unit 303 restricts (for example, prohibits) the execution of the same color chance effect. You may.

  As another example, the technology described in the feature 4 may be applied to an operation effect of the movable character 66 or a zone shift effect as another example of a look-ahead effect to which is applicable. The operation effect of the movable auditors 66 continues the operation of the movable auditors 66 from the next change after the occurrence of the look-ahead target hold to the change corresponding to the hold in a manner according to the preliminary determination information of the hold. It may be a look-ahead effect. In addition, the zone transition production is a production zone that is different from the first production zone among a plurality of types of production zones having different production tendencies (motifs, characters, backgrounds, stories, etc.). The effect may be an effect of switching to the second effect zone according to the preliminary determination information.

  In the case of the operation effect of the movable character 66 or the zone shift effect as well, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of these effects as in the case of the gold reservation of the feature 4. 58), a lottery table similar to that of FIGS. 58 and 59 may be determined. Alternatively, a lottery table similar to that shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 may be set such that the higher the setting, the more the effect is likely to result in a departure while progressing to the high expectation pattern.

  A seventh modification example regarding the feature 4 will be described. The effect deciding means 303 may display the holding lamp image of the holding as an image showing a number. In addition, the effect determination unit 303 may set, as the number of the hold lamp image, a number indicating a tempai pattern (the type of the decorative pattern 61) when the change corresponding to the hold (the change) reaches the reach. . In this case, when the effect determination unit 303 makes a setting suggestion at the time of the change, the reach may be established with the decorative pattern 61 having a number different from (or inconsistent with) the number of the holding lamp image. Either the number of the holding lamp image or the number of the temporary symbol in the fluctuation may be used for setting suggestion.

  An eighth modification example regarding the feature 4 will be described. If the change of the reliability (difference due to the set value) of the specific mode (for example, gold hold) in the hold change effect is not recognized by the player, the change of the hold effect with a high degree of expectation is displayed, but the change is lost. As a result, there is a possibility that the result of the change of the player may only be spoiled with the expectation that the change result will be a hit. Therefore, the effect determination unit 303 may change the fluctuating lamp image during the change of the symbol corresponding to the target holding of the holding change effect.

  For example, the effect determination unit 303 may cause a premium character or a rare character to appear from among the gold reserves (the gold changing lamp image) and suggest the setting based on the type of the appeared character. Alternatively, the effect deciding means 303 may display a notice effect of a content suggesting a set value or a notice effect of notifying a set value by a visual change such as a change in the speech of the character in the fluctuation. In addition, if the above-mentioned effect is displayed after the change effect or the notice effect has been lost due to the hit branch, the player may mistakenly think that a hit by the so-called resurrection effect has occurred. It is desirable to restrict it from being executed.

  The present invention has been described based on the third embodiment. The third embodiment is an exemplification, and it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. In the third embodiment, the modification has been described for each feature.

(Fourth embodiment)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment has the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment. In addition to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, Then, a setting suggestion effect is executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the base technology and the differences from the first to third embodiments will be mainly described, and the description of the common points will be omitted. Further, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same or corresponding elements as those described in the base technology, the first to third embodiments, and described. I do.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment has the following features related to setting suggestion effects.
Characteristic. Conflict setting suggestion notification:
In general, the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be displayed in various modes when the setting is high, and when the setting is low, it is determined that the display is to be performed in a situation in which the content indicating the advantage over the setting value is set. Because the display is not performed or the display is restricted, the number of effects that can be performed is small and the content tends to be monotonous. Further, if the low setting is determined by the setting suggestion effect, the player's willingness to play may be impaired. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, an effect that can always appear in accordance with the rules of the gaming situation or in accordance with the result of the lottery is displayed in a gaming situation different from (or inconsistent with) the gaming situation. In such a case, the setting suggestion effect is provided, or the reliability as the setting suggestion effect is increased. Hereinafter, the setting suggestion effect in the fourth embodiment is also referred to as “contradiction setting suggestion effect”.

  Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment sets a normal effect having a content consistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period and a content inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantage period And the suggestion effect can be selectively executed. The normal effect and the setting suggestion effect are effects belonging to the same type of effect category (effect type). In different situations, the same effect pattern (approximately the same as a player) can be selected. Note that the “same” of the normal effect and the setting suggestive effect may be that the lottery table or the lottery result is the same, or that the effect visually recognized by the player is the same even if the different lottery table or the lottery result is the same (almost the same appearance) (Including substantially the same). As a result, even if the gaming machine is actually set at a low setting, a normal effect having the same content as that at the time of the high setting can be executed, thereby realizing a variety of effects and enabling a high setting as viewed from the player. Since the character remains, it becomes easier to promote the player's willingness to play.

  The above-described features of the fourth embodiment can be mounted alone, and can be arbitrarily combined with the base technology and the features described in the first to third embodiments. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the contradiction setting suggestion effect will be described in detail.

  The effect determining means 303 in the pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the fourth embodiment is configured such that, when a special game ends in an advantageous period in which a gaming state advantageous to the player continues, the special game executed so far in the advantageous period It is possible to execute a normal effect of the content that matches the number of games (ie, the number of consecutive games). In addition, when the special game ends during the advantageous period, the effect determining means 303 sets, with a predetermined probability, an effect that is not a regular effect but is inconsistent with the number of special games that have been executed up to that time during the advantageous period. It can be executed as a suggestive effect.

  The advantageous period in the fourth embodiment is the period of the extended-village state shown in FIG. The extended holiday period is a period in which the normal game in the time reduction state and the special game (including the small hit V and the symbol big hit) are repeated, and is also the execution period of the rush effect described above. The effect determination means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display a special game end screen when the special game ends during the extended holiday period. The special game end screen may be displayed in a special game end demonstration effect.

  FIG. 60 shows an example of the special game end screen. The special game end screen 610 includes a background image 612 including a character or the like, a result image 614, and a trophy image 616. The result image 614 shows the number of big hits (XX times) in the current extended holiday period and the number of prize balls paid out in the current extended holiday period (XXXPT). The trophy image 616 shows a trophy for setting suggestion.

  The effect determination means 303 displays the trophy image 616 having the content matching the number of times of executing the special game in the extended period (in other words, the number of extended games) at a predetermined first probability as a normal effect. The effect determination means 303 displays the trophy image 616 in one of a plurality of types of modes according to the number of executions of the special game during the extended holiday period as a normal effect. The normal effect is displayed when the lottery is selected to determine whether or not to display the display of the trophy image 616 on the special game end screen 610, and is displayed when the normal effect is selected. Since the trophy image 616 is associated with the number of executions of the special game as described later, the trophy image 616 in a mode that does not match the setting value suggested when the trophy image 616 is used as the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In some cases, the display of the trophy image 616 accompanying the execution of the normal effect can be said to be a gaseous effect from the viewpoint of setting suggestion.

  In the embodiment, the color of the trophy image 616 displayed on the special game end screen 610 in the normal effect is associated with the number of times the special game is executed. Specifically, the bronze trophy image 616 (also referred to as “copper trophy”) corresponds to twice the number of extended games, and the silver trophy image 616 (also referred to as “silver trophy”) corresponds to three consecutive games. , And the golden trophy image 616 (also referred to as “gold trophy”) corresponds to four consecutive holidays. The giraffe-patterned trophy image 616 (also referred to as a “giraffe-patterned trophy”) corresponds to five consecutive holidays, and the rainbow-colored (for example, seven-colored) trophy image 616 (also referred to as a “rainbow trophy”) is a series. Corresponds to more than 6 times

  In addition, the effect determination means 303 displays the trophy image 616 having contents inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period (in other words, the number of consecutive villas) as a setting suggestion effect at a predetermined second probability. . In the embodiment, the color of the trophy image 616 is associated with a suggested setting value. Specifically, the bronze trophy corresponds to setting 2 or more (settings 2 to 6), the silver trophy corresponds to setting 3 or more (settings 3 to 6), and the gold trophy corresponds to setting 4 or more (settings 4 to 6). The giraffe trophy corresponds to setting 5 or more (setting 5 or 6), and the rainbow trophy corresponds to setting 6.

  The effect determination means 303 stores a lottery table (also referred to as a “trophy lottery table”) for determining whether to execute a normal effect or a setting suggestive effect using the trophy image 616 (FIGS. 61 to 65). In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61, the display of a plurality of types of trophy images 616 corresponding to the number of consecutive villas in the advantageous period, which is the normal effect described above, and the display of the trophy image 616 serving as a setting suggestion effect are the same. It is stored so that it can be determined by one lottery by the trophy lottery table. The effect determination means 303 determines the color of the trophy image 616 to be displayed on the special game end screen 610 by lottery based on the set value of the own machine with reference to the trophy lottery table corresponding to the number of consecutive games in the advantageous period. In addition, regarding the display of the trophy image 616, the lottery of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may be individually performed using different tables, respectively, and when individually performed, the setting suggestion effect is drawn first. In the case of winning, the normal production lottery shall not be performed, or in the case where the individual lottery has been won simultaneously, the mode in which only the setting suggestive effect is displayed with priority and the mode in which the setting suggestive effect is executed as much as possible Is preferred.

  FIG. 61 shows an example of the trophy lottery table. The lottery table in the drawing is a lottery table that is referred to by the effect determination unit 303 when the number of consecutive holidays is two. The lottery table in the figure is described in the value range 10000, and indicates the number of each trophy (selection probability) according to the set value of the own device. The appearance probability of the trophy image 616 is designed to be 20% (the total number of IDs 1 to 5 is 2000), that is, the trophy image 616 is displayed on the special game end screen 610 with a probability of 20%. Here, the “appearance probability” means the total probability of the display probability of the trophy image 616 as a normal effect and the display probability of the trophy image 616 as a setting suggestion effect.

  In addition, it is set to display a trophy corresponding to the number of consecutive villas as a normal effect, such as displaying a bronze trophy when the number of consecutive villas is two and displaying a silver trophy when the number of consecutive villas is three. In the sense that it is not a suggestion, it is also referred to as "gasse" hereinafter. The lottery table in FIG. 61 is designed so that a trophy indicating a higher set value than the set value of the own device is not selected. For example, in the setting 4, the giraffe trophy and the rainbow trophy are not assigned numbers, that is, these trophies are not selected.

  In the lottery table of FIG. 61, the area of the silver trophy in the case of the setting 3, the area of the silver trophy and the gold trophy in the case of the setting 4, the area of the silver trophy, the gold trophy and the giraffe pattern trophy in the case of the setting 5, and the setting 6 The area above the silver trophy in the case of is a setting suggestive area. Except for the setting 2, the copper trophy area is an area that becomes a gusset (in other words, a normal effect). Further, the area of the copper trophy in the case of the setting 2 is an area in which it is not known whether the setting is suggested or a gasp (from the player's point of view, the correspondence between the number of consecutive villas and the trophy image 616 is not inconsistent, and may be treated as “gasse”. Good).

  In the lottery table of FIG. 61, the gasp ratio (the execution probability of the normal effect) when the trophy image 616 is displayed is designed to be 50%. Also, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect when the trophy image 616 is displayed (the reliability of the display of the setting suggestion effect) is designed to be 50%. For example, in the case of the setting 4, the numeral range 1000 is assigned to the bronze trophy as the normal effect ("gase" of the setting suggestive effect). A silver trophy and a gold trophy as setting suggestion effects are also assigned a numerical range of 1000 (total). In the fourth embodiment, a setting suggestion effect (trophy image 616) indicating the setting value “1” is not provided, that is, any of the same effect patterns as the setting suggestion effect is executed as a normal effect. Since it is “gase”, the gase ratio when the set value is “1” is not 50%, but is exceptionally 100%.

  According to the configuration of the embodiment, when the special game is completed in the extended game period, the effect is common in that the trophy image 616 is used. It is possible to selectively execute setting suggestion effects with consistent contents. As a result, even if the gaming machine is set at a low setting, the trophy image 616 in the same mode as when the gaming machine is set at a high setting can be displayed. For example, even if the setting value of the gaming machine is “1”, when the number of consecutive games is “4”, a gold trophy indicating the setting of 4 or more may be displayed as a normal effect, and the player's willingness to play is provided. Is easy to maintain.

  The technique described in the fourth embodiment is also useful for the slot machine 1010. The advantageous period in the slot machine 1010 is, for example, a period in which ART and a special game are repeated. When the special game (big bonus or regular bonus) ends in the advantageous period, the effect determining means 1304 of the slot machine 1010 determines the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period (only the number of big bonuses) with the first probability. A good effect may be performed, and a setting suggestion effect of a content inconsistent with the number of times of executing the special game in the advantageous period may be executed at the second probability.

  Further, the "advantageous period" in the fourth embodiment is a consecutive holiday period, which has been described as a period in which a normal game in a time-saving state and a special game (including a small hit V and a big hit) are repeated. If it is a situation that can be recognized as a `` rensoku period '', for machines that do not have a small hit V as gaming machine specifications, the period during which the probability variation period is in operation and the special game is repeated should be designed as the `` advantage period '' Is also possible. In addition, even when the gaming state in the main control device has ended the “advantageous period”, within a predetermined period (for example, from the end of the “rensou period” until the special symbol changes 30). In the case of returning to the "advantageous period", it is regarded that the "advantageous period" has continued, and the processing is performed on the effect control means (sub CPU) side (such as the number of special games at the end of the previous extended holiday period, etc.). (Inheriting information for setting suggestion effect determination).

  The present invention has been described based on the fourth embodiment. The fourth embodiment is an exemplification, and it is understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. Hereinafter, modified examples will be described.

  A first modification will be described. In the above embodiment, the display of the trophy image 616 suggesting a set value higher than the set value of the own device is restricted. However, as a modified example, the trophy image 616 suggesting a set value higher than the set value of the own device can be displayed. It may be configured. FIG. 62 shows an example of a trophy lottery table of a modified example related to the trophy lottery table of FIG. In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 62, a part of the number of “gase area” or “area where setting suggestion is not known” in the trophy lottery table of FIG. (Non-selected area). Thus, for example, when the set value of the own device is “3”, the effect determination unit 303 can display a gold trophy and a giraffe pattern trophy indicating a set value higher than the set value of the own device.

  In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, the setting 6 is confirmed when a rainbow trophy appears as a setting suggestion, but in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 62, the trophy lottery table of FIG. . Therefore, the rainbow trophy in the present modification indicates that the setting 6 is rich. The reason why the rainbow trophy is set not to appear in the settings 1 to 3 is that the expectation of the ball held by the player when the rainbow trophy is displayed and the actual ball (degree of advantage) are displayed. The purpose is to prevent the deviation from becoming large. Further, with regard to the rainbow trophy, the setting 4 and the setting 5 may be set so as not to appear, and may be configured as a special set value confirmation effect.

  In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 62, when the setting is low (for example, setting 1 to 3), no rainbow trophy is assigned to a rainbow trophy, that is, no rainbow trophy is displayed as a fake trophy. As a result, the trophy image 616 that greatly deviates from the actual set value is displayed, and it is possible to prevent the expectation of the player from being excessively increased. In addition, when the own device has the setting 1, there is no trophy suggesting the setting 1, and therefore, if a trophy appears, all trophies are lost. In addition, when the user's own machine is set to 6, it can be said that all trophies become true, so that there is no gasp.

  In the first modification, the effect determination unit 303 may display a trophy image 616 indicating a setting value different from the setting value of the own device. Also, in the embodiment, there is a possibility that a normal effect which does not indicate the setting is displayed. Here, the probability that the effect deciding means 303 executes the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value of the own machine may be configured to be different depending on the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period.

  As a specific configuration, the trophy lottery table referred to by the effect determination unit 303 may be configured so that the gase ratio decreases as the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period increases. In addition, the trophy lottery table may be configured such that when the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period is equal to or more than a predetermined value, the goose ratio is lower than when the number of executions is less than the predetermined value.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, when the gash ratio is 50% when the number of extended games is two, the trophy lottery table referred to when the number of extended games is five is less than 50%. (For example, 25%). Also, for example, in the trophy lottery table referred to when the number of consecutive villas is five, the range of the number of values to be allocated to the area that becomes a fake shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. May be expanded.

  According to this aspect, a setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value can be provided to the player as a privilege for obtaining a large number of big hits (small hits V and symbol big hits) by continuing the advantageous period, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Can be further enhanced.

  A second modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500 suggests setting a normal effect (gase effect) according to the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period when the special game in the advantageous period ends. The probability of displaying the trophy image 616 as one of the effects may be increased. For example, the effect determining means 303 has a higher probability as the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period becomes higher, or when the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period becomes a predetermined value or more, the execution number becomes the predetermined value. The trophy image 616 may be displayed on the special game end screen 610 with a higher probability than when the value is less than the value.

  FIG. 63 shows an example of a trophy lottery table of a modification. The trophy lottery table of FIG. 61 is related to the trophy lottery table of FIG. In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the area of the copper trophy in the case of the setting 2, the area of the copper trophy and the silver trophy in the case of the setting 3, the area of the copper trophy to the gold trophy in the case of the setting 4, and the copper in the case of the setting 5 The area of trophy to gold trophy, the area of copper trophy to gold trophy in the case of setting 6, and the area of rainbow trophy are areas for setting suggestion. The area of the giraffe pattern trophy except for the setting 5 is an area that becomes a gasp (in other words, a normal effect). In addition, the area of the giraffe pattern trophy in the case of the setting 5 is an area in which it is not known whether the setting is suggested or a fake.

  In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 is higher than that of the trophy lottery table of FIG. The appearance rate of the trophy image 616 is a probability of displaying the trophy image 616 that may be a gasket but may be a setting suggestion. For example, the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the lottery table of FIG. 61 is 20%, but the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the lottery table of FIG. 63 is 30%. Specifically, in the lottery table of FIG. 63, the number range of no trophy (ID0) is reduced to 7000, and the number range of selecting any trophy is expanded to 3000 in comparison with the lottery table of FIG. I have.

  According to the configuration of the second modified example, as a benefit to obtaining a large number of big hits (small hits V and symbol big hits) by continuing the advantageous period, effects with the trophy image 616 at high frequency (normal effects or setting suggestive effects). Can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  A third modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500 is used when the special game in the advantageous period ends, and when performing either the normal effect or the setting suggestive effect, Is configured to increase the probability of selectively executing the setting suggestion effect according to the number of times the special game is executed (in other words, to reduce the ratio at which the normal effect, that is, the “gase” effect is executed). Is also good. For example, the effect determination means 303 has a higher probability as the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period increases, or when the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period becomes a predetermined value or more, the number of executions becomes the predetermined value. The trophy image 616 may be displayed in a mode as a setting suggestion effect with a higher probability than when the value is less than the value. In the example of the five-story villa shown in FIG. 63, the ratio of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect at which some trophy image 616 is displayed is approximately normal effect: setting suggestion effect = 1 (33%): 2 (67%) 61, the ratio of the setting suggestion effect is larger than the ratio shown in the example of the double-split room in FIG. 61, that is, the ratio of the normal effect: the setting suggestion effect = 1: 1.

  Also in this modification, the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63 is referred to. In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 is higher and the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than that of the lottery table of FIG. . The appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61 is 20%, but the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63 is 30%.

  In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, the gasp ratio (the execution probability of the normal effect) when the trophy image 616 is displayed is 50%, but in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the trophy image 616 is displayed. In this case, the gasket ratio is 33%. In other words, in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, when the trophy image 616 is displayed, the probability that it corresponds to the setting suggestion is 67%. For example, in the case of the setting 4, the numeral range 1000 is assigned to the giraffe pattern trophy as the normal effect, and the numeral range 2000 (total) is assigned to the copper trophy to the gold trophy as the setting suggestive effect.

  According to the configuration of the third modified example, a setting suggestion effect by the trophy image 616 can be provided to the player at a high frequency as a privilege for continuing the advantageous period and obtaining a large number of big hits (small hits V and symbol big hits). This can further enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, since the advantageous period is set to the “rensou period”, the advantageous period may end without being able to acquire the special game. Therefore, the number of times the special game is acquired in the “rensou period” increases. As a result, the number of trials of the special game in the advantageous period decreases in inverse proportion. Therefore, in the lottery under a situation where the number of trials can be reduced, the trophy image 616 is made easier to appear as in the second and third modifications, and the ratio of causing the trophy image 616 to appear as a setting suggestion is increased ( It can be said that this is a technique that can be configured to reward the player for achieving more difficult conditions by increasing the reliability).

  A fourth modification will be described. Although not described in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500 sets the suggested value in the setting suggestion effect according to the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period when the special game in the advantageous period ends. May be configured to be narrowed. For example, the effect determination unit 303 may determine with higher probability that the trophy image 616 is displayed in a mode in which the range of the suggested setting is relatively narrower as the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period increases. Alternatively, when the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period reaches a predetermined number or more, the effect determination unit 303 determines that the trophy image 616 is to be displayed in a mode in which the suggested setting width is relatively narrow. It may be determined more frequently.

  FIG. 64 shows an example of a trophy lottery table according to a modification. The trophy lottery table of FIG. 61 is related to the trophy lottery table of FIG. In the lottery table shown in the drawing, the numbers are set such that the trophy appearance rate is 27% and the gasp ratio (the appearance rate of the normal effect) is 35%.

  In the trophy lottery table for each number of extended games in the fourth modification, the trophy mode in which the set value (or set value range) to be suggested is a set value (or set value range) smaller than the normal effect is set. The range (selection probability) is set to zero. As described above, the normal effect is a gaseous effect in which a trophy image 616 of a color corresponding to the number of extended games is displayed. For example, in the lottery table of FIG. 64, the bronze trophy (setting 2 or more suggestion) and the silver trophy (setting 3 or more suggestion) corresponding to the suggestion content less than the gold trophy (setting 4 or more suggestion) corresponding to the consecutive number of times 4 are displayed. On the other hand, the numerical range is set to 0.

  As another aspect, in the trophy lottery table for each number of consecutive villas, the set value range to be suggested is a set value range that is suggested when the effect of the effect pattern that is a normal effect at the same timing is executed as the set suggested effect. The numerical range may be set to 0 for a wider trophy mode. In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 64, a bronze trophy (setting 2), which is a setting suggesting effect that suggests a wider set value range than a normal effect gold trophy (setting suggesting effect 4 or more, suggesting setting 4 or more) corresponding to the number of consecutive villas 4 The numerical range is set to 0 for the above suggestions) and for the silver trophy (suggestions of 3 or more). As a result, as shown in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, the maximum setting range to be suggested when the number of consecutive villas is two was 5 (that is, setting 2 to 6). Is narrowed down to 3 (that is, settings 4 to 6).

  According to the configuration of the fourth modified example, by narrowing the suggestion range of the setting suggestion effect in accordance with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period, as a privilege for acquiring many special games in the advantageous period, A setting suggestion effect with a higher degree can be provided.

  As still another aspect, in addition to the size of the suggested setting value range, the concept of the priority of the setting suggestive effect shown in the third embodiment is adopted, and the setting suggestive effect that can be executed as a normal effect at the same timing is adopted. The number range in the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect pattern having a lower priority than the effect pattern of the effect pattern may be set to 0. According to this aspect, the suggestion contents to the player can be narrowed down to contents having higher priority and more useful. In the fourth modification, the suggestion target range is narrowed (the setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value equal to or less than the setting value when the normal effect is the setting suggestion is not executed). The specification is not limited to those that are not performed (the number range is set to 0), and a specification may be adopted in which the execution frequency is reduced as much as possible (for example, the number range is set to 10 or less) so as to make it difficult to appear.

  A fifth modification will be described. In the above embodiment, when the special game ends as an advantageous period, the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect using the trophy image 616 are selectively executed. As a modification, when the specific game state (probably changing game state or time-saving game state of the pachinko gaming machine) ends as the advantageous period, the effect determination means 303 normally uses the trophy image 616 in the end effect of the advantageous period. The effect and the setting suggestion effect may be selectively executed. The end timing of the advantageous period may be a timing at which the time-saving (probable change) game state ends as the game state or a fluctuation in which the special figure 2 hold after the time reduction ends becomes 0, and four fluctuations of the special figure 2 after the time reduction ends It may be an eye. In the case of a gaming machine with a probability change, a special game with a normal jackpot without a transition to a probability change may be ended.

  In the fifth modification, as shown in FIG. 60, the effect determination means 303 displays the number of big hits (small hit V + symbol big hit) acquired so far in the advantageous period on the effect screen displayed at the end of the advantageous period. The result image 614 indicating the number of winning balls may be displayed, and the trophy image 616 as a normal effect or a setting suggestive effect may be displayed. The fifth modification is different from the fourth embodiment in the timing at which the trophy image 616 is displayed as a normal effect or a setting suggestion effect, and it is of course possible to combine the trophy image 616 with another modification of the fourth embodiment.

  A sixth modification will be described. In the above embodiment, when the special game ends in the advantageous period, the lottery is performed in the trophy lottery table corresponding to the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period, and the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect using the trophy image 616 are selected. Ran. As a modification, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous period (specific game state) is within a predetermined section (in other words, within a value range), effect determination means 303 is executed on condition that a special game is acquired. Even if the trophy lottery table is used or not, and the type of the trophy image 616 is selectively executed, the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect are changed according to the section in which the special game is acquired as the effect. Good. The effect performed on condition that the special game has been acquired may be an effect before the transition to the special game, a special game start demonstration, a special game end demonstration, or an effect after the special game ends.

  As another aspect, the effect determination means 303 is executed on condition that a special game has been acquired when the total number of symbol variations executed in the advantageous period (in other words, the total number of games) is within a predetermined section. As an effect, a normal effect and a setting suggestion effect using the trophy image 616 may be selectively executed. As yet another aspect, the effect determination means 303 determines that the special game has been acquired when the cumulative number of symbol variations (in other words, the number of elapsed games) executed after the end of the previous special game is within a predetermined section. As an effect performed as a condition, a normal effect and a setting suggestion effect using the trophy image 616 may be selectively executed. As in the sixth modification, the condition that a special game is acquired in a situation where the number of remaining games in the advantageous period is small and a situation where the total number of games in the advantageous period is large is set by acquiring the special game in the situation. Because the number of trials for performing the suggestion effect execution lottery is reduced as compared to the situation up to the situation, acquiring a special game, that is, a situation where it is highly difficult to perform the setting suggestion effect execution lottery It can be said that it is a condition. In this way, when the difficulty in achieving the conditions for receiving the setting suggestion effect lottery is high, the setting suggestion effect lottery can be received, or by setting a higher reliability setting suggestion effect to be executed, It is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the specific game state which is the advantageous period.

  A seventh modification will be described. As described above in part in the fourth embodiment or the modification, the effect determination unit 303 determines that the number of consecutive games in the advantageous period, in other words, the number of special game acquisitions in one or one advantageous period is a predetermined value. The setting suggestion effect may be executed only in the above case. For example, the effect determination unit 303 may execute the setting suggestion effect by displaying the trophy image 616 that is inconsistent with the number of extended holidays, as in the embodiment. In addition, the effect determination unit 303 determines whether to display the trophy image 616 as a setting suggestive effect, in addition to the display based on the number of extended games, the execution of a special game in a specific section, and the like, or a one-time advantageous period. The setting suggestion effect may be executed when the cumulative number of game values (for example, prize balls or medals) acquired during the process is equal to or more than a predetermined amount, or when the game value belongs to a range of a predetermined amount that is previously divided. For example, the effect determination means 303 displays the trophy image 616 matching the cumulative number of game values as a normal effect at a predetermined first probability, and replaces the normal effect with a predetermined second probability. Then, the trophy image 616 inconsistent with the cumulative game value may be displayed as a setting suggestion effect.

  In the seventh modification, the effect determination unit 303 may execute the following (1) to (3) alone or in combination as the condition that is difficult to achieve is achieved. (1) The effect determination means 303 may increase the reliability of the setting suggestion effect, in other words, reduce the ratio of the gaseous effect (the effect suggesting false content or the normal effect of the embodiment) by the authenticity ratio. Is also good. (2) The effect determination means 303 may narrow the setting value range suggested in the setting suggestion effect, in other words, display the setting suggestion effect in a mode in which the suggestion setting value range is narrow with a high probability. Good. (3) The effect determination means 303 may increase the winning rate of the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. In other words, the lottery table (here, a trophy lottery table as shown in FIGS. 61 to 64) referred to by the effect determination means 303 is such that the more difficult the condition is, the higher the probability that the setting suggestion effect becomes. May be set to be executed.

  In this modified example, the trophy lottery table with the number of consecutive villas of 3 (or 3 to 5 of consecutive villas) has a total execution probability of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect (in other words, the display probability of the trophy image 616) of 10 On the other hand, in the trophy lottery table in which the number of consecutive villas is six or more, the execution probability of the total of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may be set to 20%. Further, in the trophy lottery table with three consecutive villas (or three to five consecutive villas), the distribution ratio between the normal effect and the setting suggestive effect is set to 50%: 50%, while the number of consecutive villas is six. In the trophy lottery table described above, the distribution ratio of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may be set to 35%: 65%.

  Further, in the trophy lottery table for three consecutive villas (or three to five consecutive villas), the image A indicating the setting 2 or more (that is, five types of the settings 2 to 6) has a relatively high probability. It may be set to be selected. For example, the selection may be made so that the image A is selected with a higher probability than the selection probability of the image A in the trophy lottery table where the number of consecutive villas is six or more. On the other hand, the trophy lottery table with six or more consecutive villas may be set so that the image B indicating the setting 5 or more (that is, two types of the setting 5 or 6) is selected with a relatively high probability. . For example, the selection may be made so that the selection probability is higher than the selection probability of the image B in the trophy lottery table with three consecutive villas.

  Note that, as a condition that is difficult to achieve, the effect determination unit 303 executes the above (1) to (3) alone or in combination when the remaining advantageous period is smaller or the remaining advantageous period is equal to or less than a predetermined value. May be. This embodiment is particularly suitable for a machine with a variable number of cuts (so-called ST machine). In addition, as a condition that is difficult to achieve, the effect determining means 303 determines that the longer the duration of the advantageous period or the duration of the advantageous period is a predetermined value or more, the above (1) to (3) alone or in combination May be executed. This embodiment is particularly suitable for a gaming machine having a certainty changing machine or a falling specification until the next time.

  As an exception to the configuration shown in the seventh modified example, when the big hit ends in a single shot, that is, the advantageous period is obtained without the occurrence of the extended game which is to acquire the special game again in the specific game state after the first special game. When the process is completed, the effect determination means 303 suggests a setting to win with a low probability at the end of the advantageous period (for example, a lower probability than when a predetermined number of big hits occur in the advantageous period, for example, a probability of about 1%). A setting suggestion effect may be displayed using an effect lottery table (trophy lottery table). In this case, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be a low probability, while the reliability may be a high probability such as 95%. For example, in the trophy lottery table, the selection probability of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may be set to 5%: 95%. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which a highly-reliable setting suggestion effect can be executed when a result that is unfortunate to the player, such as the end of a single shot, a decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed. When the number of games in the advantageous section is set as the execution condition of the setting suggestion effect, for example, when the number of remaining games is the same, an exception may be provided in which the reliability and execution probability of the setting suggestion effect improve. .

  An eighth modification will be described. The effect determination means 303 may change the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect according to the time information or the like output from the timing means 307. Hereinafter, the lottery tables for setting suggestion effects, such as the holding change lottery table in the third embodiment and the trophy lottery table in the fourth embodiment, are collectively referred to as “setting suggestion lottery tables”. For example, the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in a specific time slot may be set to have a higher setting suggestion effect execution probability than the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in other time slots. The specific time period is the N-th of a predetermined effect (for example, an effect including a setting suggestion pattern) after the power is turned on, in the morning, in the evening (for example, from 5:00 to 7:00 pm), until a predetermined number of changes after the power is turned on. (N is, for example, 2 to 3), or any combination thereof.

  In addition, the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in a specific time zone has a higher execution probability of the total of the normal effect (gase effect) and the setting suggestion effect than the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in other time periods. May be done. For example, when the trophy image 616 is displayed as a normal effect or a setting suggestion effect, the appearance probability of the trophy image 616 in a specific time zone may be increased. In addition, the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in a specific time zone may be set to have higher reliability of the setting suggestion than the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in other time zones. In other words, the normal effect ( The execution probability of the (gase effect) may be set low.

  A ninth modification will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the probability of a small hit upon entering the second starting port 12 is set higher than the probability of a small hit upon entering a ball into the first starting port 11, and the probability of entering the second starting port 12 during a time reduction is reduced. A so-called "small hit rush" machine having a game property of increasing the number of payouts by acquiring many small hits associated with a ball may be used. The effect determination means 303 in the small hit rush machine is used when the number of consecutive small hits in the advantageous period (for example, during a probable change or during working hours) reaches a predetermined number, or when the number of payouts in the advantageous period reaches a certain amount. Alternatively, a contradiction setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a special notice effect (cut-in effect or the like) during a normal game. As a result of an increase in the game value (payout) during the advantageous period, it is possible to prevent the display opportunity of the setting suggestion effect from being lost only at the end of the special game.

  For example, a game machine that displays a setting suggestion effect as a special game end effect when the cumulative value of the game value acquired during the advantageous period belongs to the range of 6000 to 6999 and a condition for executing the setting suggestion effect is satisfied. Modification) will be considered. In this gaming machine, when a game value of 6000 to 6999 is acquired by obtaining a prize ball by a small hit during a normal game in an advantageous period, a special game is acquired at the place and the special game is executed. There may be a problem that the setting suggestion effect and the lottery of the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed. According to the configuration of this modification, the setting suggestion effect can be displayed by a special notice effect (cut-in effect or the like) even during the normal game, so that the above problem can be solved. In the case of the slot machine 1010, a period in which the ART and the special game are repeated is defined as an advantageous period, and when the number of medals obtained during the advantageous period reaches a certain amount, a contradiction setting suggestion effect is provided as the special announcement effect described above. May be displayed.

  As an example of the setting suggestion effect, when the number of game values acquired satisfies the condition that the game value of 1000 × N (N is an integer) is accumulated in a favorable period at a timing other than during the execution of the special game, The content of the image attached to the N character images is displayed as a normal effect on the display of “OOOO (1000 × N) GET!”. When a setting suggestive effect is executed, “OOOO” is displayed. ○ GET! ”Is displayed as a setting suggestion (for example, suggesting a setting value M or more). In addition, as a setting suggestion effect, not only a contradiction of an image (look) but also a mode in which simultaneously executed voices and lamps are executed in combination with a contradiction mode different from a normal mode may be executed as a setting suggestion effect. If the sound data reproduced when the N character images are displayed is not a contradiction of the number of characters but is special sound data, the set value is suggested (the set value N or more is suggested). May be adopted. It should be noted that the example in which the setting in which the lamp and the audio data are inconsistent with the combination of the image data is set and suggested is applicable to the fourth embodiment and other modifications.

  A tenth modification will be described. In addition to the contradiction setting suggestion effect described in the fourth embodiment, the effect determination means 303 can display a setting suggestion effect (here, a situation inconsistent with the game state or a state inconsistent with the game state) that does not occur. It may be called “matching setting suggestion effect.” The matching setting suggestion effect may be designed such that the appearance rate is higher than the contradiction setting suggestion effect and the reliability is low (there is a lot of noise). In addition, as an example of the matching setting suggestion effect, there is an effect example that suggests the evenness of the setting value. The effect is an odd-numbered effect and an even-numbered suggestion that suggests an even-numbered setting among the matching setting-indicating effects, depending on whether the setting value is even or odd (whether the setting value is 2, 4, 6, or 1, 3, 5, or 5). It is configured to change the appearance ratio with the odd number suggestion effect indicating the setting. Also, only in the case of the setting 6, among the matching setting suggesting effects, the ratio of the appearance rate of the effect that becomes a gusset to the occurrence rate of the true effect is set to 1: 1. Among them, the ratio of the appearance rate of the effect that is a fake effect to the appearance rate of the effect that is a true effect may be 1: 4.

  An eleventh modification will be described. FIG. 65 shows an example of a special game end screen according to a modification. The effect determination means 303 displays the character image 604 as a background image on the special game end screen 610, the total number of jackpots acquired during the advantageous period (the number of consecutive games in one advantageous period, three in this case), The total number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous period (here, 3310 pt) and the title 618 (here, level 2) are displayed.

  The effect determination unit 303 displays the character images 604 of the number of people matching the number of consecutive games or the number of balls to be displayed as a normal effect on the special game end screen 610. In the present modified example, as the normal effect, the character images 604 of the same number as the number of consecutive villas are displayed. As another aspect, one character image 604 when the amount of balls is 1000 to 1999 pt, two character images 604 when the amount of balls is 2000 to 2999 pt, and three characters when the amount of balls is 3000 to 3999 pt. The image 604 may be displayed.

  In addition, the effect determination unit 303 displays a title 618 having a content that matches the number of consecutive games or the number of balls to be displayed as a normal effect on the special game end screen 610. In the present modified example, a title 618 indicating the same level (LV) as the number of consecutive holidays is displayed as a normal effect. As another aspect, a title 618 indicating level 1 when the amount of payouts is 1000 to 1999 pt, a title 618 indicating level 2 when the amount of payouts is 2000 to 2999 pt, and a level 3 when the amount of payouts is 3000 to 3999 pt. The title 618 may be displayed.

  At a first probability determined in the setting suggestion lottery table shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the effect determination means 303 determines the number of consecutive games or the number of balls to be displayed as a setting suggestion effect on the special game end screen 610. Is displayed. In the present modified example, the character images 604 of the number of persons different from the number of consecutive villas are displayed as the setting suggestion effect. For example, in FIG. 65, the display of two character images 604 suggests that the setting is 2 or more even though the number of consecutive holidays is three.

  The effect deciding means 303 uses the second probability determined in the setting suggestion lottery table shown in FIG. 61 and the like as the setting suggestion effect on the special game end screen 610, the content of inconsistency with the number of consecutive games or the number of balls to be played. 618 is displayed. In the present modification, a title 618 indicating a level different from the number of consecutive holidays is displayed as a setting suggestion effect. For example, in FIG. 65, although the number of extended holidays is three, the display of the title 618 indicating level 2 indicates that the number is two or more. In general, it is desirable that the level is not downgraded. Therefore, the effect determination means 303 stores the level of the title 618 displayed in the previous normal effect and the setting suggestion effect, and if the level to be displayed as the new setting suggestion effect is less than the previously displayed level, the new setting The execution of the suggestion effect may be prohibited.

  In the case of the slot machine 1010, the display contents on the special game end screen 610 may be the character image 604, the number of big bonuses in the advantageous period (for example, the ART period), the number of regular bonuses, and the total number of medal acquisitions. The effect deciding means 1304 of the slot machine 1010 may execute an additional effect (an effect of notifying the cumulative value of the additional number) of the number of games of the ART, and at that time, at least one of the character image 604 and the title 618. May be performed or a setting suggestion effect may be performed.

  A twelfth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the fourth embodiment, the effect determining means 303 is similar to the special game end demonstration during a predetermined number of special figure changes (for example, four special figure 2 changes) immediately after the end of the special game. An effect (herein, referred to as “pseudo demonstration effect”) may be displayed. The effect determination unit 303 may execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, display of the trophy image 616) described in at least one of the embodiment and the modification in the pseudo demonstration effect. If the first change immediately after the end of the special game is a big hit or a small hit, the player may not be able to sufficiently confirm the contents of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, during the display of the celebration image after the end of the special game, a setting suggestion effect may be executed by a special notice such as a cut-in effect.

  A thirteenth modification will be described. If the power supply is cut off during the extended holiday period, the information on the number of consecutive holidays and the information on the acquired game value stored in the RAM of the sub-board 300 are deleted (sub-reset). It may not be possible to execute. For example, when a setting suggestion lottery table according to the number of extended games is provided, if the information on the number of extended games is deleted, the table that should have been referred to cannot be determined. Can occur. As described above, when the number of consecutive villas is 5 or more, a situation in which a high setting suggestion can be expected in a situation, or a situation in which a lottery of a high-reliability setting suggestion effect can be received, and a lottery can be received, is disadvantageous to a player. Could be

  Therefore, when the game state at the time of power return corresponds to an advantageous period such as during a big hit or during an electric chew support game (during a reduced working time), the effect determination means 303 executes the execution of the next setting suggestion effect until the end of the advantageous period. During a predetermined period such as a lottery timing, a lottery is performed by referring to a special setting suggestion lottery table (for example, a table that is referred only when the power is restored) in which the execution probability (winning probability) of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the normal setting suggestion lottery table. May be executed. Alternatively, when the game state at the time of power return is the advantageous period, the effect determination means 303 increases the number of areas in the normal setting suggestion lottery table where the setting suggestion effect is to be executed by calculating ( For example, the number may be doubled), and a lottery for determining whether or not there is a setting suggestion effect may be executed.

  A fourteenth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, a specific effect (herein, referred to as “specific effect”) that can be executed only in the normal game in the normal state outside the advantageous period is displayed during the advantageous period in exceptional cases. The setting may be suggested by performing the setting. For example, a plurality of types of variable effects that can be displayed during the normal game in the normal state (for example, a reach effect, which is referred to as “normal variable effects” here) may be associated with a plurality of types of set values in advance. The effect determination means 303 determines that, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol for the predetermined fluctuation time is determined on the main board, at the start of the fluctuation during the working hours, when the winning in the setting suggestion lottery is at a low probability of about 1%, A normal fluctuation effect corresponding to the set value of the own device may be displayed. In this case, when the design changes during the working hours, the setting is suggested when the same effect (for example, the same reach) as the change in the normal state is developed.

  The above “same effect” means that the motif, the story, the characters appearing, and the like are common, and the flow of the effect may be different. For example, the content is different up to a predetermined timing after the reach development, but may be the same after the predetermined timing after the reach development. As described above, the effect is partially modified, so that the effect scale is associated with different fluctuating times selected during the time reduction and during the normal game. Further, the effect determination unit 303 may further display an object for setting suggestion, such as the trophy image 616 of the embodiment, while displaying the normal fluctuation effect as the setting suggestion during the working hours.

  In connection with the fourteenth modification, the effect determining means 303, when notifying that the possibility of a big hit or a small hit is high during the normal game in the normal state, reaches the appearance of the first mode of notifying the big hit or the small hit. The effect (here, story reach effect) may be displayed with a high probability. On the other hand, when notifying that the possibility of a big hit or a small hit is high during the electric chew support (during the time reduction), the effect determining means 303 gives a reach effect of the appearance in the second mode of notifying the big hit or the small hit ( Here, the battle effect may be displayed with a high probability.

  In this case, when notifying the big hit or the small hit during the electric chew support, the effect determination means 303 may display the reach effect (story reach effect) having the appearance of the first aspect with a low probability as the setting suggestive effect. Good. Further, the effect determining means 303 may change the mode of the story reach effect displayed during the electric tue support according to the set value of the own device. For example, the effect determination means 303 selects a story reach effect indicating the story A when suggesting an even set value (2, 4, 6) and suggesting an odd set value (1, 3, 5). , A story reach effect indicating the story B may be selected. In addition, the effect determination unit 303 selects a story reach effect indicating the story C when suggesting a high setting (for example, setting 4 or more), and selects a story reach effect indicating the story D when suggesting the setting 6. Is also good.

In addition, the story reach effect in the normal game in the normal state, the time length varies depending on the type, but during the electric tue support, the special fluctuation pattern table during the predetermined period calculated from the end of the previous special game, The effect time of each change may be fixed. Therefore, even if the story reach production displayed during the normal state and the story reach production displayed during the Den Chu support show the same content, some content may be different due to the adjustment of the time length There is. In the above-mentioned special fluctuation pattern table, selection probabilities may be determined as follows.
[At the time of departure] Shortened fluctuation pattern 75%, normal notice departure pattern A 16%, normal notice departure pattern B4%, reach departure development pattern with setting suggestion (for example, departure story reach) 5%.
[Hit time] Hit pattern A 30%, hit pattern B 20%, hit pattern C 20%, reach development with setting suggestion hit pattern 30% (for example, a story reach to hit).

  A fifteenth modified example (game performance explanation contradiction) will be described. In this modification, the setting suggestion is that there is an inconsistency or error in the game content explained by the dialogue announcement, in other words, the setting suggestion that a game different from the game explained by the dialogue announcement is executed. For example, in a certain change, the character A gives a notice of the dialogue “If the dialogue line NO24 is changed to green, it can be expected to develop into super reach! Is displayed, and after that, the change related to the green hold does not develop into the super-reach despite the change to the green hold in the hold change effect, the lower digit value of “Serif NO24” is “4”. May indicate that the set value is 4 or more.

  In this case, only when the setting value is set to 4 or more, the effect determining means 303 changes the holding lamp image to green holding at a predetermined probability when receiving the preliminary determination information regarding the holding that does not evolve to super reach. In addition to determining the scenario of the pending change effect to be changed, the execution of the above-mentioned dialogue notice may be determined. Further, the effect determination means 303 may set the lower one digit value of “line“ NO ”so as to match the set value of its own device.

  As another example, in a certain variation, a dialogue announcement by the character B is displayed, "If the same announcement appears three times from the beginning of the variation to the third pseudo variation from the beginning of the variation, it seems that the possibility of X-reach development is high." In the case where the same notice has appeared three times up to the third pseudo fluctuation in the fluctuation of, but the X-reach has not been developed, “2”, which is the last digit of “Serif NO32”, is equal to or greater than the set value of 2 May be suggested.

  As yet another example, a button image is displayed in a certain fluctuation, such as a dialogue announcement by the character A, "Serif NO3 is a chance," and a new image or the like is displayed even though the button is pressed in the fluctuation. If the image is dismissed without being pressed, or if an image indicating disappointing content is displayed due to the button press operation, “3”, which is the last digit of “line No. 3”, exceeds the set value of 3 or more. It may be a suggestion.

  In this case, the effect determination means 303 may determine the execution of the above-mentioned dialogue announcement and the display of the button image with a predetermined probability when a change that does not develop into super reach is started. The effect deciding means 303 may set the lower one digit value of “line“ NO ”so as to match the set value of its own device. Note that the success pattern when the button operation is pressed is pseudo continuous fluctuation, development to super reach, or the like.

  In the fifteenth modified example, a dialogue announcement by the character X, such as "Serial No. 99, it seems that there is something meaning to lie between the characters A and B ..." It is desirable to provide a production that implies that the game is connected to In addition, it is desirable that the content of the dialogue of the dialogue announcement that becomes a gutter at the time of the setting suggestive effect is not an affirmative but an ambiguous expression such as “expected” or “highly likely”. In the above example, the last digit of the line number is set as setting suggestion information, but the difference between the value of the tens digit and the value of the single digit may be set as setting suggestion information. In any case, it is desirable that the set value is suggested in some form according to the image of the dialogue notice.

  The “random number” referred to in the present description or the claims does not need to be a physical random number generated by a random number generation circuit or a true random number in a mathematical sense, but may be a hardware random number or a random number generation using a 16-bit counter. A pseudo random number such as a software random number using an algorithm may be used. Alternatively, a combination of a hardware random number and a software random number, for example, a plus random number method in which an initial value is changed each time the counter makes one rotation may be used.

  In this specification or in the claims, "table" or "reference (selection criterion)" means a correspondence between a first parameter such as a lottery value and a second parameter such as a value indicating an option. Not only refers to the data defined by the table structure, but also widely includes such a correspondence relationship realized by a program structure for deriving the second parameter from the first parameter. The term “criterion (selection criterion)” is appropriately referred to as a concept substantially synonymous with “table” including these. When a table structure is used, a selection criterion that is substantially one kind may be constituted by a combination of a plurality of structurally divided tables. Indicates the number of substantive types of tables, not the number of structured tables.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine in which a game ball (prize ball) is paid out as a profit based on entering a ball is exemplified. However, instead of paying out a prize ball, a game ball is launched using an electronic profit management system. -It can also be applied to a so-called enclosed-type pachinko machine that manages the giving of prize balls. Such enclosed type pachinko machines typically have a predetermined number of game balls circulating in the game machine, playing games with the circulating game balls, and capable of firing game balls instead of paying out prize balls. Benefit the player by increasing the number of times. For example, a ball circulating means for receiving game balls rolled in the game area and circulating in the game machine by sending it to the game area again without discharging it to the outside of the game machine, the number of shot balls of the game ball, the number of received balls And a ball number management means for managing the number of balls possessed based on the number of payout balls, and a ball number display means for displaying the number of managed ball numbers.

  Any combination of the above-described embodiments and modifications is also useful as an embodiment of the present invention. A new embodiment caused by the combination has the effects of the combined example and the modified example. It should be understood by those skilled in the art that the functions to be fulfilled by the components described in the claims are realized by each component shown in the embodiment and the modified example alone or in cooperation with each other.

The techniques described in the first embodiment and the modified examples described above can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 1-1-1]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area, having a ball changing mechanism that can be opened so that ball entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
Right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entering the first starting port or a second lottery value acquired upon entering the second starting port. When,
Holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, until the start of a variable display of a symbol corresponding to the success / failure determination;
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the pass / fail determination,
A special winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and the entering of a game ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to a player,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening further passes through a specific area provided therein. In this case, a special game control means that is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game and executes a special game with the opening of the special winning opening,
An operation port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
Activated lottery means for executing an activated lottery for determining whether to operate the incoming ball variation mechanism, triggered by entering the operating port,
Normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery,
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the hit, an operation control means for opening the entering ball variation mechanism,
As the game state relating to the ease of entering the second starting port in the normal game, the normal state and the ease of entering the second starting port by increasing at least the winning probability of the operation lottery from the normal state. A specific game control means having a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game; ,
With
In the normal game in the normal state, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit, the operation control means may determine whether or not a plurality of game balls are to be fired at a predetermined time or longer. A ball game machine that opens the entry ball fluctuation mechanism.

[Aspect 1-1-2]
The easy ball entry state ends when one symbol change triggered by the ball entry into the second starting port ends,
In the one symbol change time triggered by the ball entering the second starting port in the easy ball entry state, at least two hits of the ordinary symbol occur when the operation lottery is continuously executed. The ball game machine according to aspect 1-1, wherein the time is set to be equal to or longer than a possible time.

[Aspect 1-2]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area, having a ball changing mechanism that can be opened so that ball entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
Right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entering the first starting port or a second lottery value acquired upon entering the second starting port. When,
Holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, until the start of a variable display of a symbol corresponding to the success / failure determination;
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the pass / fail determination,
A special winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and the entering of a game ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to a player,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening further passes through a specific area provided therein. In this case, a special game control means that is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game and executes a special game with the opening of the special winning opening,
An operation port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
Activated lottery means for executing an activated lottery for determining whether to operate the incoming ball variation mechanism, triggered by entering the operating port,
Normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery,
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the hit, an operation control means for opening the entering ball variation mechanism,
As the game state relating to the ease of entering the second starting port in the normal game, the normal state and the ease of entering the second starting port by increasing at least the winning probability of the operation lottery from the normal state. A specific game control means having a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game; ,
With
In the normal game in the normal state, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit, the operation control means may determine whether or not a plurality of game balls are to be fired at a predetermined time or longer. Release the entry ball fluctuation mechanism,
The operation control means may determine that the opening time of the incoming ball variation mechanism has reached the predetermined time, or that the number of incoming balls to the second starting port is equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of reserves of the second lottery value. A ball game machine for terminating the opening of the incoming ball variation mechanism when the number reaches the number.

[Aspect 1-3]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area, having a ball changing mechanism that can be opened so that ball entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
Right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entering the first starting port or a second lottery value acquired upon entering the second starting port. When,
Holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, until the start of a variable display of a symbol corresponding to the success / failure determination;
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the pass / fail determination,
A special winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and the entering of a game ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to a player,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening further passes through a specific area provided therein. In this case, a special game control means that is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game and executes a special game with the opening of the special winning opening,
An operation port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
Activated lottery means for executing an activated lottery for determining whether to operate the incoming ball variation mechanism, triggered by entering the operating port,
Normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery,
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the hit, an operation control means for opening the entering ball variation mechanism,
As the game state relating to the ease of entering the second starting port in the normal game, the normal state and the ease of entering the second starting port by increasing at least the winning probability of the operation lottery from the normal state. A specific game control means having a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game; ,
Effect control means for displaying a staging content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
In the normal game in the normal state, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit, the operation control means may determine whether or not a plurality of game balls are to be fired at a predetermined time or longer. Release the entry ball fluctuation mechanism,
The effect control means, in the normal game in the normal state, when the entering ball variation mechanism is released in accordance with the predetermined hit of the normal symbol, the content of prompting the launch of a game ball aimed at the second starting port The special effect is displayed, and during the display of the special effect, the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the success / failure determination based on the ball entering the first starting port is reduced and displayed,
In the normal game in the easy ball entry state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol indicating the result of the success / failure determination based on the ball entering the first starting port is fixed to a time shorter than the average fluctuation time in the normal game in the normal state. ,
The effect control means displays the special effect in the normal game in the easy-to-enter state, and, during the display of the special effect, the variation of the decorative symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination based on the ball entering the first starting port. A ball game machine that hides the production.

[Aspect 1-4]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area, having a ball changing mechanism that can be opened so that ball entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
Right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entering the first starting port or a second lottery value acquired upon entering the second starting port. When,
Holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, until the start of a variable display of a symbol corresponding to the success / failure determination;
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the pass / fail determination,
A special winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and the entering of a game ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to a player,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening further passes through a specific area provided therein. In this case, a special game control means that is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game and executes a special game with the opening of the special winning opening,
An operation port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
Activated lottery means for executing an activated lottery for determining whether to operate the incoming ball variation mechanism, triggered by entering the operating port,
Normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery,
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the hit, an operation control means for opening the entering ball variation mechanism,
As the game state relating to the ease of entering the second starting port in the normal game, the normal state and the ease of entering the second starting port by increasing at least the winning probability of the operation lottery from the normal state. A specific game control means having a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game; ,
Effect control means for displaying a staging content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
The easy ball entry state ends when the symbol change of a predetermined number of times triggered by the ball entry into the second starting port ends,
A ball game machine, wherein the effect control means displays a special effect of prompting the launch of a game ball aimed at the second starting port during the last symbol change in the easy entry state.

[Aspect 1-5-1]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area, having a ball changing mechanism that can be opened so that ball entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
Right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entering the first starting port or a second lottery value acquired upon entering the second starting port. When,
Holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, until the start of a variable display of a symbol corresponding to the success / failure determination;
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the pass / fail determination,
A special winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and the entering of a game ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to a player,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening further passes through a specific area provided therein. In this case, a special game control means that is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game and executes a special game with the opening of the special winning opening,
An operation port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
Activated lottery means for executing an activated lottery for determining whether to operate the incoming ball variation mechanism, triggered by entering the operating port,
Normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery,
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the hit, an operation control means for opening the entering ball variation mechanism,
As the game state relating to the ease of entering the second starting port in the normal game, the normal state and the ease of entering the second starting port by increasing at least the winning probability of the operation lottery from the normal state. A specific game control means having a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game; ,
Effect control means for displaying a staging content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
In the normal game in the normal state, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit, the operation control means may determine whether or not a plurality of game balls are to be fired at a predetermined time or longer. Release the entry ball fluctuation mechanism,
The effect control means, in the normal game in the normal state, when the entering ball variation mechanism is released in accordance with the predetermined hit of the normal symbol, the content of prompting the launch of a game ball aimed at the second starting port Display special effects,
The effect control means may determine that the change of the special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port or the change of the special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port is a predetermined standby demo transition time. If not, display a predetermined standby demonstration on the effect display device,
The holding control means, the general figure lottery value for the operation lottery acquired at the time of the ball entry into the operation port, up to a predetermined number, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol showing the result of the operation lottery Hold until start,
A ball game machine wherein the standby demo transition time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol when the ordinary figure lottery value is suspended to an upper limit.

[Aspect 1-5-2]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area, having a ball changing mechanism that can be opened so that ball entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
Right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entering the first starting port or a second lottery value acquired upon entering the second starting port. When,
Holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, until the start of a variable display of a symbol corresponding to the success / failure determination;
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the pass / fail determination,
A special winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and the entering of a game ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to a player,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening further passes through a specific area provided therein. In this case, a special game control means that is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game and executes a special game with the opening of the special winning opening,
An operation port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
Activated lottery means for executing an activated lottery for determining whether to operate the incoming ball variation mechanism, triggered by entering the operating port,
Normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery,
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the hit, an operation control means for opening the entering ball variation mechanism,
As the game state relating to the ease of entering the second starting port in the normal game, the normal state and the ease of entering the second starting port by increasing at least the winning probability of the operation lottery from the normal state. A specific game control means having a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game; ,
Effect control means for displaying a staging content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
In the normal game in the normal state, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit, the operation control means may determine whether or not a plurality of game balls are to be fired at a predetermined time or longer. Release the entry ball fluctuation mechanism,
The effect control means, in the normal game in the normal state, when the entering ball variation mechanism is released in accordance with the predetermined hit of the normal symbol, the content of prompting the launch of a game ball aimed at the second starting port Display special effects,
The effect control means is that the entering of the game ball into any of a plurality of winning openings or entrances provided in the game area, the predetermined standby demo transition time has not been detected, and the special symbol is If not fluctuating, display a predetermined standby demonstration on the effect display device,
The holding control means, the general figure lottery value for the operation lottery acquired at the time of the ball entry into the operation port, up to a predetermined number, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol showing the result of the operation lottery Hold until start,
A ball game machine wherein the standby demo transition time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol when the ordinary figure lottery value is suspended to an upper limit.

[Aspect 1-6]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area, having a ball changing mechanism that can be opened so that ball entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
Right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entering the first starting port or a second lottery value acquired upon entering the second starting port. When,
Holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, until the start of a variable display of a symbol corresponding to the success / failure determination;
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the pass / fail determination,
A special winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and the entering of a game ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to a player,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening further passes through a specific area provided therein. In this case, a special game control means that is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game and executes a special game with the opening of the special winning opening,
An operation port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
Activated lottery means for executing an activated lottery for determining whether to operate the incoming ball variation mechanism, triggered by entering the operating port,
Normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery,
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the hit, an operation control means for opening the entering ball variation mechanism,
As the game state relating to the ease of entering the second starting port in the normal game, the normal state and the ease of entering the second starting port by increasing at least the winning probability of the operation lottery from the normal state. A specific game control means having a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game; ,
Effect control means for displaying a staging content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
The easy ball entry state ends when the symbol change of a predetermined number of times triggered by the ball entry into the second starting port ends,
The effect control means ends the change based on the fluctuation based on the second lottery value remaining in the holding control means after the end of the easy ball entry state, or the change which triggers the end of the easy ball entry state. In such a case, the effect on the previous ball is displayed on the effect display device,
The effect control means, when the special symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first starting opening is changing, is a bullet for displaying an effect related to the payout in a form having higher visibility than the variable effect. Ball game machine.

The techniques described in the second embodiment and the modified examples described above can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 2-1]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball changing mechanism capable of displacing a ball to be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
Right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entering the first starting port or a second lottery value acquired upon entering the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device that displays a symbol variation to indicate the result of the pass / fail determination,
Holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, until the start of a variable display of a symbol corresponding to the success / failure determination;
A special winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and the entering of a game ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to a player,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening further passes through a specific area provided therein. In this case, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games with the opening of the special winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game,
Opening and closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the special winning opening,
With
The special winning opening includes an opening and closing member for switching between an open state and a closed state of the special winning opening, and when the special winning opening is in a closed state, a game ball rolls on the opening and closing member,
The unit game in the special game and the small hitting game are both ended when the number of balls entered into the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number,
One opening time of the special winning opening in the small hitting game is set to a short time during which a game ball rolling on the opening and closing member can enter the special winning opening,
A ball game machine, wherein the opening / closing control means is capable of repeatedly opening the big winning port for a short time a predetermined number or more times in the small hitting game.
According to this configuration, in a machine equipped with a small hit jackpot, a common jackpot for the big hit and the small hit can be used to secure a wide area of the board on which the staging can be performed, thereby enhancing the amusement of the staging. it can. In addition, in the small hit game, it is possible to obtain a prize ball equivalent to one round during the big hit, and it is easy for the player to have a sufficient feeling of throwing out.

[Aspect 2-2-1]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball changing mechanism capable of displacing a ball to be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
Right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entering the first starting port or a second lottery value acquired upon entering the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device that displays a symbol variation to indicate the result of the pass / fail determination,
Holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, until the start of a variable display of a symbol corresponding to the success / failure determination;
A special winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and the entering of a game ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to a player,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening further passes through a specific area provided therein. In this case, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games with the opening of the special winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game,
An effect display device on which the effect is displayed;
Effect determination means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device,
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entering the special winning port during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entering the special winning opening, which is a condition for ending a unit game in the special game,
A ball game machine wherein the effect determination means displays an image corresponding to the predetermined number during the small hit game, and changes the image according to a ball entering the big winning opening during the small hit game.
According to this configuration, the small hit development jackpot loading machine suggests to the player that a relatively large number of balls can be entered into the special winning opening during the small hit game (in other words, the possibility of winning a ball), The player can be encouraged to fire during the small hit game.

[Aspect 2-2-2]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball changing mechanism capable of displacing a ball to be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
Right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entering the first starting port or a second lottery value acquired upon entering the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device that displays a symbol variation to indicate the result of the pass / fail determination,
Holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, until the start of a variable display of a symbol corresponding to the success / failure determination;
A special winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and the entering of a game ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to a player,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening further passes through a specific area provided therein. In this case, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games with the opening of the special winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game,
An effect display device on which the effect is displayed;
Effect determination means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device,
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entering the special winning port during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entering the special winning opening, which is a condition for ending a unit game in the special game,
The effect determination means, if the game ball that entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, after the end of the small hit game, according to the type of symbol indicating a small hit, Display one of multiple types of suggested effects that indicate the profit that the player can obtain,
The effect determination means, during the small hit game, to display an image indicating the degree of expectation that a high profit is suggested in a later suggested effect, according to the ball into the big winning opening during the small hit game A ball game machine that changes the image.
According to this configuration, the small hit development jackpot equipped machine can identify the degree of expectation that high profit is suggested by the later suggestive effect by making the ball enter the big winning opening during the small hit game. The launch during the small hit game can be encouraged.

[Aspect 2-3]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball changing mechanism capable of displacing a ball to be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
Right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entering the first starting port or a second lottery value acquired upon entering the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device that displays a symbol variation to indicate the result of the pass / fail determination,
Holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, until the start of a variable display of a symbol corresponding to the success / failure determination;
A special winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and the entering of a game ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to a player,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the actuation of the special electric auditors and opening of the big winning opening,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening further passes through a specific area provided therein. In this case, the special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games with the operation of the special electric accessory and the opening of the special winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game,
An effect display device on which the effect is displayed;
Effect determination means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device,
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entering the special winning port during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entering the special winning opening, which is a condition for ending a unit game in the special game,
The effect determination means, when the game ball entered the big winning opening during the small hit game, passes through the specific area, to display an effect that informs that, and, from the small hit game to a special game Displaying an image indicating the cumulative number of times the special electric accessory has been activated,
The ballistic game machine, wherein the effect determining means displays an image indicating that the special electric auditors is operating for the first time as the image during the small hit game.
According to this configuration, even during the small hitting game, an image indicating “the first round” or the like is displayed, that is, a series of count display is performed from the small hitting game to the special game. Thereby, it is suggested that a payout equivalent to one round of the special game can be obtained in the small hitting game, and the player can be prompted to fire during the small hitting game.

[Aspect 2-4]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball changing mechanism capable of displacing a ball to be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
Right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entering the first starting port or a second lottery value acquired upon entering the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device that displays a symbol variation to indicate the result of the pass / fail determination,
Holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, until the start of a variable display of a symbol corresponding to the success / failure determination;
A special winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and the entering of a game ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to a player,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening further passes through a specific area provided therein. In this case, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games with the opening of the special winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game,
An effect display device on which the effect is displayed;
Effect determination means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device,
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entering the special winning port during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entering the special winning opening, which is a condition for ending a unit game in the special game,
The type of profit that the player can obtain with respect to the special game executed when the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, and the normal after the end of the special game At least one of the types of profits that the player can obtain for the game depends on the type of the symbol indicating the small hit,
The effect determination means, when the game ball that entered the big winning opening during the small hitting game passes through the specific area, after the last opening of the big winning opening in the small hitting game, A ball game machine that displays an effect indicating a type of profit that can be obtained by a player according to a type of a symbol indicating a small hit before the first opening of the special winning opening in the special game.
According to this configuration, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the specific area, the effect indicating the type of profit that the player can obtain is displayed according to the small hit symbol, so that the game ball in the small hit game is displayed. Does not pass through the specific area, it is possible to prevent the effect contents from being inconsistent with the actual profit type. In addition, vibration detection may be performed in order to prevent fraud in a small hit game, but according to the above configuration, a suggestion effect is performed with the timing of vibration detection removed, so that a vibration such as an effect of causing a player to press a button is performed. It is also possible to provide a suggestive effect of the resulting mode.

[Aspect 2-5]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball changing mechanism capable of displacing a ball to be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
Right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entering the first starting port or a second lottery value acquired upon entering the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device that displays a symbol variation to indicate the result of the pass / fail determination,
Holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, until the start of a variable display of a symbol corresponding to the success / failure determination;
A special winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and the entering of a game ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to a player,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening further passes through a specific area provided therein. In this case, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games with the opening of the special winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game,
An effect display device on which the effect is displayed;
Effect determination means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device,
When there is a ball in the second starting port, regardless of whether or not the symbol change display based on the lottery value obtained when the ball is entered is immediately started, the symbol is acquired when the ball is entered. When the result of the hit determination based on the performed lottery value is a small hit, the preliminary determination information indicating that the small hit is obtained in the fluctuation corresponding to the entering ball can be notified to the effect determination means. Determining means;
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entering the special winning port during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The effect deciding means is a case where a game ball that has entered the special winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, and the preliminary determination information is a lottery value at which the small hit is 1 A ball-and-play game machine capable of executing at least one effect of notifying the occurrence of a small hit between the end of the special game and the start of the normal game when indicating that one or more games are suspended.
According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that the possibility of obtaining a large profit is high by suggesting that the small jackpot development jackpot can be additionally acquired in the machine equipped with the small jackpot development jackpot. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

The technology described in the third embodiment and the modification described above can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 3-1]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
Hit / fail judgment means for executing a hit / fail judgment based on a lottery value acquired in response to a ball entering the starting port,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the pass / fail determination is variably displayed,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, a special game control means for executing a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game,
Setting changing means for changing to any one of a plurality of settings that may have different game advantages;
Storage means for storing a set value set by the setting change means,
Effect control means capable of executing an advantageous information effect for informing that a transition to a state advantageous to the player is scheduled;
With
In the special game, when the advantage notification effect is performed before the start of the end demonstration, the effect control unit can execute a setting suggestion effect indicating the set value stored in the storage unit in the end demonstration. However, if the advantageous notification effect has not been executed before the end demonstration is started, the ball game machine limits the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the end demonstration.
Until now, setting suggestion effects were not common in ball and ball game machines. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the end demonstration of the special game, the setting suggestion effect suggests or informs that the transition to an advantageous state (for example, a probability variation state or a reserved in-house) is scheduled. May cause the player to make a mistake. According to the above-described ball game machine, the setting suggestion effect is executed on the condition that the advantageous information effect has already been executed, so that it is easy to prevent the misrecognition of the player, and the expectation of the player is spoiled. It is easy to prevent that.
In addition, `` restrict the execution of the setting suggestion effect '' means that it is not displayed at all in the effect, including that the display possibility is significantly reduced, so that the lottery of the setting suggestion effect is not performed in the first place, This includes canceling the effect lottery result that is the execution of the determined setting suggestion effect. The same applies to other embodiments.

[Aspect 3-2]
Triggered by a predetermined game operation, a lottery means for executing a lottery to determine whether to shift to a special game advantageous to the player from the normal game,
Special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result that the lottery by the lottery means can be shifted to the special game,
Setting changing means for changing to any one of a plurality of settings that may have different game advantages;
Storage means for storing a set value set by the setting change means,
Effect control means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value stored in the storage means,
With
The effect control means stores a plurality of setting suggestion effects and a plurality of priorities in association with each other, and after executing a setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority, a second priority lower than the first priority. A gaming machine that restricts the execution of setting suggestion effects corresponding to priorities.
According to this gaming machine, the interest in the game can be increased or the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed in accordance with the correspondence between the type of the setting suggestion effect and the priority. For example, a higher priority may be given to a setting suggestion effect having a narrower suggestion value range. In this case, the range of the setting value suggested to the player by the setting suggestion effect is wider than the range of the setting value suggested earlier, thereby impairing the expectation of the player (the expectation that the setting value can be specified). Can be prevented. Also, a setting suggestion effect having a higher suggested setting value may be given a higher priority. In this case, it is possible to prevent the setting value suggested to the player by the setting suggestion effect from being lower than the setting value suggested earlier than that, thereby preventing the player's expectation from being impaired.

[Aspect 3-3]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball changing mechanism capable of displacing a ball to be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
Right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a first lottery value acquired upon entering the first starting port or a second lottery value acquired upon entering the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device that displays a symbol variation to indicate the result of the pass / fail determination,
A special winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and the entering of a game ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to a player,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or during the small hit game, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening further passes through a specific area provided therein. In this case, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games with the opening of the special winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game,
Setting changing means for changing to any one of a plurality of settings that may have different game advantages;
Storage means for storing a set value set by the setting change means,
Effect control means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value stored in the storage means,
With
The effect control means executes the special game end demonstration effect for a first time when the special game ends, and when the small hitting game ends without the game ball passing through the specific area, The end game effect of the hit game is executed for a second time shorter than the first time,
A ball game machine, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a setting suggestion effect in the end demonstration effect of the special game, but restricts the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the end demonstration effect of the small hit game.
The execution time of the end demonstration effect of the small hit game is short, and it is difficult to secure the time of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, in the end demonstration of the small hit game, the setting suggestion effect is not executed, so that it is possible to avoid the execution of the lottery process and the display process that have substantially no meaning.

[Aspect 3-4-1]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
Hit / fail judgment means for executing a hit / fail judgment based on a lottery value acquired in response to a ball entering the starting port,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the pass / fail determination is variably displayed,
The lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, holding control means to hold until the start of the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the determination of success or failure,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, a special game control means for executing a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game,
Effect control means for executing the effect,
When there is a ball in the starting opening, regardless of whether or not the symbol change display based on the lottery value acquired upon the ball entry is immediately started, the symbol is acquired upon the ball entry. When the result of the execution of the hit determination based on the lottery value is a big hit, a prior determination means capable of notifying the effect control means of advance determination information indicating that a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation corresponding to the entering ball,
Setting changing means for changing to any one of a plurality of settings that may have different game advantages;
Storage means for storing a set value set by the setting change means,
With
The effect control means, according to the advance determination information, a suggestive effect indicating the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game occurs in the future symbol change, a plurality of symbol changes up to the future symbol change Can be run over
The suggestion effect is controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes, and is designed such that the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game occurs differs according to the effect mode of the suggestion effect,
The expectation level suggested by the production mode of the suggested effect in the later symbol variation of the plurality of symbol variations is equal to or more than the expected value suggested by the production mode of the suggested effect in the previous symbol variation. Designed,
A ball game machine in which the probability that the suggested effect becomes a specific effect mode differs depending on the set value stored in the storage means.
According to this ball-and-ball game machine, the specific production mode in the suggestion effect based on pending look-ahead suggests the set value, so that the suggestion effect indicates both a big hit and a set value. To further enhance the player's expectations and interest in the game.

[Aspect 3-4-2]
A game board on which a game area is formed,
A starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area,
Hit / fail judgment means for executing a hit / fail judgment based on a lottery value acquired in response to a ball entering the starting port,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the pass / fail determination is variably displayed,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed, a special game control means for executing a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game,
Effect control means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating the degree of expectation that the shift to the special game occurs in the present symbol change,
Setting changing means for changing to any one of a plurality of settings that may have different game advantages;
Storage means for storing a set value set by the setting change means,
With
The suggestion effect is controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes, and is designed such that the degree of expectation of the transition to the special game is different depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect,
A ball game machine in which the probability that the suggested effect becomes a specific effect mode differs depending on the set value stored in the storage means.
According to this ball-and-ball game machine, it is possible to newly provide a game ability for estimating a setting based on the appearance frequency of each of a plurality of effect modes that can be suggested for the effect effect.

The technology described in the fourth embodiment and the modified example described above can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 4-1-1]
Triggered by a predetermined game operation, a lottery means for executing a lottery to determine whether to shift to a special game advantageous to the player from the normal game,
Special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result that the lottery by the lottery means can be shifted to the special game,
Setting changing means for changing to any one of a plurality of settings that may have different game advantages;
Storage means for storing a set value set by the setting change means,
Effect control means capable of executing a normal effect having contents matching the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period, when the special game ends in an advantageous period in which a gaming state advantageous to the player continues. When,
With
The effect control means, at a predetermined probability when the special game is finished in the advantageous period, not the normal effect, but the effect of the content inconsistent with the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period, A gaming machine that can be executed as a setting suggestion effect indicating the setting value stored in the means.
According to this gaming machine, when the special game ends in the advantageous period, the normal effect of the content that matches the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period and the content that is inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period By enabling the setting suggestion effect to be selectively executed, even if the gaming machine is set at a low setting, a normal effect having the same content as at the time of the high setting can be executed, which can lead to promotion of a desire to play. it can.

[Aspect 4-1-2]
A mode in which the probability that the effect control means executes a setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value stored in the storage means can be different depending on the number of times the special game is executed during the advantageous period. The gaming machine according to 1-1.
According to this gaming machine, by changing the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the setting value in accordance with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period, the interest of the game in the advantageous period can be further enhanced. In addition, for example, when the execution probability of a setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests a setting value is increased as the number of times of execution of the special game in the advantageous period increases, the setting value is correctly suggested as a privilege for continuing the advantageous period. A setting suggestion effect can be provided.

[Aspect 4-1-3]
Triggered by a predetermined game operation, a lottery means for executing a lottery to determine whether to shift to a special game advantageous to the player from the normal game,
Special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result that the lottery by the lottery means can be shifted to the special game,
Setting changing means for changing to any one of a plurality of settings that may have different game advantages;
Storage means for storing a set value set by the setting change means,
Effect control means capable of executing a normal effect having contents matching the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period, when the special game ends in an advantageous period in which a gaming state advantageous to the player continues. When,
With
The effect control means further executes, instead of the normal effect, an effect inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period as a setting suggestion effect indicating a set value stored in the storage means. Is possible,
When the special game in the advantageous period ends, it is possible to execute either the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect with a predetermined probability, and execute the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect. , A probability that the setting suggestion effect is selectively executed in accordance with the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period is increased.
According to this gaming machine, when the special game ends in the advantageous period, the special game is acquired in the advantageous period by increasing the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect according to the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period. A setting suggestion effect can be provided as a privilege to the user.

[Aspect 4-2-1]
Triggered by a predetermined game operation, a lottery means for executing a lottery to determine whether to shift to a special game advantageous to the player from the normal game,
Special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result that the lottery by the lottery means can be shifted to the special game,
Setting changing means for changing to any one of a plurality of settings that may have different game advantages;
Storage means for storing a set value set by the setting change means,
When the advantageous period, which is a period in which the gaming state advantageous to the player continues, ends, an effect control unit capable of executing a normal effect of the content matching the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period,
With
The effect control unit is configured to store, in the storage unit, an effect of a content that is not the normal effect but a content inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period at a predetermined probability when the advantageous period ends. A gaming machine that can be executed as a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value.
According to this gaming machine, when the advantageous period ends, a normal effect of the content matching the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period and a setting suggestion effect of the content inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period Can be selectively executed, even if the gaming machine is set at a low setting, a normal effect having the same content as at the time of setting at a high setting can be executed, which can lead to promotion of a desire to play a game.

[Aspect 4-2-2]
A mode in which the probability that the effect control means executes a setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value stored in the storage means can be different depending on the number of times the special game is executed during the advantageous period. The gaming machine according to 2-1.
According to this gaming machine, by changing the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the setting value in accordance with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period, the interest of the game in the advantageous period can be further enhanced. In addition, for example, when the execution probability of a setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests a setting value is increased as the number of times of execution of the special game in the advantageous period increases, the setting value is correctly suggested as a privilege for continuing the advantageous period. A setting suggestion effect can be provided.

  11 first starting port, 12 second starting port, 221 first hit / fail judgment means, 222 second hit / fail judgment means, 240 hold control means, 260 special game control means, 265 small hit game control means, 270 specific game control means, 303 effect determination means, 304 effect control means, 500 pachinko gaming machine, 1010 slot machine.

Claims (2)

Triggered by a predetermined game operation, a lottery means for executing a lottery to determine whether to shift to a special game advantageous to the player from the normal game,
Special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result that the lottery by the lottery means can be shifted to the special game,
Setting changing means for changing to any one of a plurality of settings that may have different game advantages;
Storage means for storing a set value set by the setting change means,
When the advantageous period, which is a period in which the gaming state advantageous to the player continues, ends, an effect control unit capable of executing a normal effect of the content matching the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period,
With
The effect control unit is configured to store, in the storage unit, an effect of a content that is not the normal effect but a content inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period at a predetermined probability when the advantageous period ends. A gaming machine that can be executed as a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value.   The probability that the effect control means executes a setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value stored in the storage means may be different depending on the number of times the special game is executed during the advantageous period. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images